XF Owners Handbook 10MY Tcm144 47656

User Manual: 2010 Jaguar XF Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 391 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OWNER’S HANDBOOK

Publication Part No. JJM 10 02 40 101

This handbook forms part of the Owner literature supplied with your new vehicle. Left-hand drive

and right-hand drive conditions may be shown in the graphics and where information is specific to

a particular country, it is indicated as such.

Please take the time to study the operating instructions with your vehicle as soon as you can.

IMPORTANT

The information contained in this handbook covers all vehicle derivatives and optional equipment.

Some of the options may not be fitted to your vehicle, unless they formed part of the original vehicle

specification. Therefore, some parts of this handbook may not apply to your vehicle. Furthermore,

due to printing cycles, it may include descriptions of options before they become generally

available.

The options, hardware and software in your vehicle are from the available specifications for the

market in which the vehicle was intended for sale. If your vehicle is to be used in another

geographical area, you may have to modify the vehicle specification to suit local conditions.

Jaguar Cars Limited is not responsible for the cost of any modifications.

The information contained in this publication was correct when it went to print. Vehicle design

changes may have been made after this handbook was printed. When this occurs a handbook

supplement is added to the literature pack. Subsequent updates can be viewed on the Jaguar

Internet site at: www.ownerinfo.jaguar.com.

In the interest of development, the right is reserved to change specifications, design or equipment

at any time without notice and without incurring any obligations. This publication, or part thereof,

may not be reproduced nor translated without our approval. Errors and omissions excepted.

Published by Jaguar Technical Communications.

Contents

Introduction

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY...................................... 9

LABEL LOCATIONS ........................................... 9

HEALTH AND SAFETY..................................... 10

DATA RECORDING.......................................... 11

DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS ......................... 11

FASCIA AND CONTROLS ................................ 12

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES............................ 14

Keys and remote controls

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ............................ 16

GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO

FREQUENCIES ................................................ 16

USING THE REMOTE CONTROL ..................... 17

UNLOCKING AND DISARMING THE VEHICLE. 18

LOCKING AND ARMING THE VEHICLE ........... 19

DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE JAGUAR SMART

KEY ................................................................. 20

PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL...... 21

CHANGING THE REMOTE CONTROL BATTERY ...

EMERGENCY KEY BLADE ............................... 25

Locks

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING............................ 26

USING THE EMERGENCY KEY BLADE ............ 28

VALET MODE.................................................. 30

JAGUAR SMART KEY SYSTEM TRANSMITTERS

KEYLESS ENTRY ............................................ 33

GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING .................. 35

Alarm

ARMING THE ALARM ..................................... 37

DISARMING THE ALARM ............................... 38

SECURITY SENSORS...................................... 39

Seats

SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION ............ 41

ELECTRIC SEATS............................................ 42

HEAD RESTRAINTS ........................................ 44

REAR SEATS................................................... 45

HEATED SEATS............................................... 47

CLIMATE SEATS ............................................. 48

Seat belts

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION ............................ 49

SEAT BELT REMINDER .................................. 50

USING SEAT BELTS DURING PREGNANCY.... 51

FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS ........................ 51

SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ................ 52

Supplementary restraints system

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................ 53

AIRBAG WARNING LAMP .............................. 57

WHIPLASH PROTECTION............................... 57

AIRBAG LABELS............................................. 58

AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION................... 58

Child safety

CHILD SEATS ................................................. 59

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING ............................ 60

BOOSTER CUSHIONS..................................... 61

CHILD SEAT ANCHOR POINTS....................... 62

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS ................................... 65

Pedestrian protection

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................ 66

AFTER DEPLOYMENT OF THE PEDESTRIAN

PROTECTION SYSTEM ................................... 66

Steering wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL .............. 67

HORN ............................................................. 68

HEATED STEERING WHEEL............................ 68

AUDIO CONTROL ........................................... 69

VOICE CONTROL ............................................ 69

CRUISE CONTROL.......................................... 74

Lighting

LIGHTING CONTROL ...................................... 75

AUTOLAMPS .................................................. 76

REAR FOG LAMPS.......................................... 77

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS...................... 77

DIRECTION INDICATORS ............................... 78

HEADLAMPS - DRIVING ABROAD.................. 78

HEADLAMP LEVELLING ................................. 79

CORNERING OR STATIC BENDING LAMPS.... 79

INTERIOR LAMPS .......................................... 80

APPROACH LAMPS........................................ 81

REMOVING A HEADLAMP .............................. 81

REMOVING A REAR LAMP ............................. 82

CHANGING A BULB ........................................ 83

HEADLAMP UNIT BULBS ............................... 83

Contents

SIDE REPEATER LAMP .................................. 85

REAR LAMP BULBS ....................................... 85

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART........................ 87

Wipers and washers

WINDSCREEN WIPERS .................................. 88

RAIN SENSOR ................................................ 89

WINDSCREEN WASHERS............................... 89

HEADLAMP WASHERS................................... 90

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES .................... 90

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES.................... 91

Windows and mirrors

ELECTRIC WINDOWS..................................... 93

INTERIOR MIRROR ........................................ 94

EXTERIOR MIRRORS ..................................... 95

BLIND SPOT MONITOR .................................. 97

Instruments

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW .................. 99

WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS .......... 100

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS ..... 104

Information displays

GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 105

WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES. 106

TRIP COMPUTER ......................................... 107

TOUCH-SCREEN........................................... 109

PERSONALISED SETTINGS .......................... 111

Climate control

AIR VENTS ................................................... 115

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL................. 116

ELECTRIC SUNROOF .................................... 121

Convenience features

SUN VISORS ................................................ 123

SUN BLINDS................................................. 123

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER............... 123

CLOCK .......................................................... 124

AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS ..................... 125

GLOVE BOX .................................................. 125

CUP HOLDERS ............................................. 126

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS........................ 127

GARAGE DOOR TRANSCEIVER .................... 128

PORTABLE AUDIO INTERFACE..................... 131

Starting the engine

GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 132

KEYLESS STARTING..................................... 133

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE....................... 134

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)............ 135

Transmission

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ....................... 137

Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 144

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS..................... 144

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) ............... 146

Parking aid

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 148

USING THE PARKING AID............................. 148

Rear view camera

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 152

Driving hints

RUNNING-IN ................................................. 154

ECONOMICAL DRIVING ................................ 155

Cruise control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 156

USING CRUISE CONTROL............................. 156

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 159

USING ACC ................................................... 159

FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION ....................... 164

ADVANCED EMERGENCY BRAKE ASSIST..... 165

Automatic speed limiter (ASL)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION .......................... 167

USING THE ASL ............................................ 167

Driving dynamics

GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 169

WINTER MODE ............................................. 169

DYNAMIC MODE........................................... 170

STABILITY CONTROL.................................... 170

Fuel and refuelling

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................. 174

Contents

FUEL QUALITY.............................................. 174

ALTERNATIVE FUELS FOR PETROL ENGINES.....

175

DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES......................... 176

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL ............................... 177

FUEL CUT-OFF .............................................. 177

FUEL FILLER FLAP........................................ 178

REFUELLING................................................. 179

DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION DEVICE......

180

FUEL CONSUMPTION ................................... 181

Load carrying

GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 182

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS......................... 182

REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE................... 182

Towing

TOWING A TRAILER (V6 petrol and diesel

vehicles only)................................................ 183

LEVELLING ................................................... 184

RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS ........... 185

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS ...................... 185

TOW BAR...................................................... 186

Vehicle care

CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS .................. 187

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR ........................... 187

CLEANING THE INTERIOR ............................ 189

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE ............ 191

Maintenance

GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 192

OPENING AND CLOSING THE BONNET ........ 195

ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW ........... 196

ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Petrol engines ....... 197

ENGINE OIL CHECK - V8 Petrol engines ....... 199

ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Diesel engines ....... 201

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION ........................ 203

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK ............................ 204

BRAKE FLUID CHECK ................................... 206

POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK ................ 208

WASHER FLUID CHECK ................................ 209

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................... 210

Vehicle battery

BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS ................... 212

BATTERY CARE ............................................ 212

USING BOOSTER CABLES............................ 214

CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY............. 215

CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY............. 215

Wheels and tyres

GENERAL INFORMATION............................. 216

TYRE CARE................................................... 217

USING WINTER TYRES ................................ 223

USING SNOW CHAINS ................................. 223

RUN FLAT TYRES......................................... 224

TOOL KIT...................................................... 224

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL......................... 225

TYRE REPAIR KIT......................................... 229

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM.... 234

TYRE GLOSSARY ......................................... 238

TYRE SPECIFICATIONS - ARDUOUS TERRAIN ...

239

Fuses

CHANGING A FUSE....................................... 241

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS................................. 242

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART ...................... 245

Emergency equipment

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS.................... 250

WARNING TRIANGLE ................................... 250

FIRST AID KIT .............................................. 250

FIRE EXTINGUISHER.................................... 250

Status after a collision

DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION ..................... 251

INSPECTING SAFETY SYSTEM COMPONENTS...

252

Vehicle recovery

TOWING POINTS.......................................... 253

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE .................... 254

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS.. 256

Vehicle identification

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE ................ 257

ENGINE NUMBER ......................................... 257

TRANSMISSION NUMBER ........................... 257

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)... 257

VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATE....................... 257

Contents

Technical specifications

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ............................ 258

WEIGHTS...................................................... 259

DIMENSIONS................................................ 260

Type approvals

DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY ............... 262

Audio introduction

RADIO RECEPTION....................................... 268

Audio unit overview

AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW............................... 269

Audio unit operation

ON/OFF CONTROL ........................................ 271

VOLUME CONTROL...................................... 271

AUDIO CONTROL ......................................... 272

WAVEBAND BUTTON ................................... 274

AUTOSTORE CONTROL................................ 274

STATION PRESET BUTTONS ........................ 275

TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL .............. 276

Audio unit menus

RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS) ....................... 277

PRIORITY PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY) .......... 278

Digital audio broadcasting

GENERAL INFORMATION ............................. 280

AUDIO CONTROLS ....................................... 282

DISPLAY OPTIONS....................................... 283

CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING................... 284

CHANNEL OPTIONS ..................................... 284

PRESET BUTTONS ....................................... 287

SETTINGS..................................................... 288

Compact disc player

COMPACT DISC COMPATABILITY................ 292

LOADING COMPACT DISCS ......................... 292

EJECTING COMPACT DISCS ........................ 294

COMPACT DISC SELECTION ........................ 294

TRACK SELECTION....................................... 295

COMPACT DISC PAUSE................................ 295

SHUFFLE/RANDOM ...................................... 295

REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS ............... 296

COMPACT DISC DISPLAY OPTIONS ............ 296

MP3 FILE PLAYBACK ................................... 297

Portable audio

PORTABLE AUDIO......................................... 299

AUXILIARY INPUT DEVICES ......................... 302

Telephone

GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 307

TELEPHONE PAIRING AND DOCKING........... 309

VOICE MAIL .................................................. 313

ANSWER OPTIONS ....................................... 314

PHONE OPTIONS .......................................... 314

PHONEBOOK................................................. 315

MAKING A CALL............................................ 317

NAMES.......................................................... 318

LAST 10 OPTION........................................... 320

HANDS-FREE CONTROLS ............................. 321

OTHER FEATURES ........................................ 322

TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL ...................... 323

Television

GENERAL INFORMATION.............................. 328

TELEVISION CONTROLS............................... 329

USING THE TELEVISION ............................... 330

FINDING TV CHANNELS................................ 331

TELEVISION SETUP ...................................... 332

Navigation system

THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM........................... 334

SATELLITE SIGNALS..................................... 334

GETTING STARTED ....................................... 336

MENU STRUCTURE....................................... 337

MAIN MENU.................................................. 338

USER SETTINGS ........................................... 338

TURN-BY-TURN NAVIGATION ...................... 339

LANGUAGE SELECTION ................................ 339

MEASUREMENT UNITS................................. 340

KEYBOARD LAYOUT ..................................... 340

MAP SPLIT SCREEN ..................................... 341

MAP DISPLAY ICONS ................................... 342

SETTING A DESTINATION............................. 344

ROUTE PREFERENCES.................................. 347

START GUIDANCE......................................... 347

VOICE GUIDANCE ......................................... 349

CANCEL GUIDANCE ...................................... 350

QUICK POI SELECTION ................................. 350

CALIBRATION ............................................... 351

RESTORE SYSTEM DEFAULTS ..................... 352

LANGUAGE SELECTION ................................ 353

Contents

MEMORY ...................................................... 353

AVOID POINTS.............................................. 355

HOME ........................................................... 355

DESTINATION ENTRY................................... 356

POSTCODE ................................................... 357

MAP.............................................................. 357

COORDINATES ............................................. 357

MEMORY ...................................................... 358

PREVIOUS .................................................... 358

MOTORWAY ................................................. 359

COMPASS..................................................... 360

POINTS OF INTEREST................................... 362

POI ICON DISPLAY ....................................... 363

CANCELLING POI ICON DISPLAY................. 365

JAGUAR DEALERSHIP LOCATIONS.............. 365

ENTRY BY TOWN.......................................... 365

ENTRY BY CATEGORY .................................. 365

OTHER SELECTION METHODS..................... 366

CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES .......... 366

POI ENTRY MESSAGES ................................ 366

QUICK POI SELECTION................................. 366

SELECTING A QUICK POI CATEGORY........... 367

MEMORY POINTS......................................... 367

RDS-TMC OVERVIEW ................................... 368

USING TMC .................................................. 370

SURVEILLANCE SETTING............................. 372

USING VOICE CONTROL............................... 373

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS.. 374

ORDNANCE SURVEY DATA .......................... 378

NAVTEQ CORPORATION............................... 379

EUROPEAN DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY .....

380

Introduction

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY

Warnings

Cautions

Symbols

This recycling symbol identifies

those items that must be disposed

of safely in order to prevent

unnecessary damage to the

environment.

This symbol identifies those

features that can be adjusted,

disabled or enabled by your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

LABEL LOCATIONS

Warning labels attached to your

vehicle bearing this symbol mean:

Do not touch or adjust components

until you have read the relevant

instructions in the handbook.

Labels showing this symbol

indicate that the ignition system

utilises very high voltages. Do not

touch any ignition components

while the starter switch is turned

on.

WARNING

Safety warnings are included in this

handbook. These indicate either a

procedure which must be followed

precisely, or information that should be

considered with great care in order to avoid

the possibility of personal injury.

CAUTION

Cautions are included in this handbook.

These indicate either a procedure which

must be followed precisely, or information that

should be considered with great care in order

to avoid the possibility of damage to your

vehicle.

Introduction

Warning labels

Labels are attached to your vehicle at several

positions. These are applied to draw your

attention to important subjects, e.g. tyre

pressures, tow bar use, airbags, roll-over risk,

engine compartment hazards, etc.

Additional information labels may also be

found at these locations.

1. Left-hand front suspension tower - Air

conditioning label

2. Top face of battery - Battery warning

symbols

3. End of fascia (passenger side) -

Passenger airbag label

4. Sun visor - Airbag label

5. Base of left-hand C pillar - Tyre pressure

label, Airbag warning label, Vehicle

Identification Number label

6. Right-hand B pillar - Vehicle

Identification Number label (China)

7. Inner face of fuel filler flap - Fuel

specification label

It is important that you are familiar with these

subjects to ensure that your vehicle and its

features are used safely. Using the index at the

back of this handbook, refer to the relevant

topic for more information.

HEALTH AND SAFETY

E95340

WARNINGS

The vehicle should not be parked over

long dry grass or other combustible

material, particularly during dry

weather. As the heat generated by the exhaust

and emission control systems may be

sufficient to start a fire.

Before exiting the vehicle, ensure that

P park is selected and the park brake

applied. When exiting the vehicle,

ensure that the Jaguar Smart Key is removed

from the vehicle.

Introduction

DATA RECORDING

Service data recording

Service data recorders in your vehicle are

capable of collecting and storing diagnostic

information about your vehicle. This potentially

includes information about the performance or

status of various systems and modules in the

vehicle such as engine, throttle, steering or

brakes.

In order to properly diagnose and service your

vehicle, Jaguar service and repair facilities may

access vehicle diagnostic information through

a direct connection to your vehicle.

Event data recording

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems

for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds

or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

•How various systems in your vehicle were

operating.

•Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened.

•How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or the brake pedal.

•How fast the vehicle was travelling.

•The rotational position of the steering

wheel.

These data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

Note: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle

only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no

data are recorded by the EDR under normal

driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the

vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they

have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

DISABILITY MODIFICATIONS

Occupants with disabilities which may require

modification of the vehicle, must contact a

Dealer/Authorised Repairer before any

modifications are made.

Introduction

FASCIA AND CONTROLS

JAG1634

A t

n t F e

1 0 m

n t Fu

10 km

12 3 45678 9 10 11 12 13 14 1615

12 3 45678 9 10

21 22

11 12 14 15

28 25

Introduction

1. Steering wheel audio controls.

See AUDIO CONTROL (page 69).

2. External lamp controls. See LIGHTING

CONTROL (page 75).

3. Sequential gear change down paddle.

See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(page 137).

4. Speedometer. See INSTRUMENT PANEL

OVERVIEW (page 99).

5. Driver’s horn and airbag. See HORN

(page 68). See Supplementary

restraints system (page 53).

6. Message centre. See WARNING AND

INFORMATION MESSAGES (page 106).

7. Tachometer. See INSTRUMENT PANEL

OVERVIEW (page 99).

8. Sequential gear change up paddle.

See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(page 137).

9. Wiper and washer control. See Wipers

and washers (page 88).

10. Cruise control and Adaptive cruise

control steering wheel controls.

See Cruise control (page 156).

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

(page 159).

11. Audio control panel. See Audio unit

overview (page 269).

12. Fascia lock/unlock buttons.

See LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

(page 26).

13. Touch-screen. See TOUCH-SCREEN

(page 109).

14. Hazard warning lamp switch.

See HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

(page 77).

15. Climate control panel. See Climate

control (page 115).

16. Glove box proximity sensor. See GLOVE

BOX (page 125).

17. Engine START/STOP switch.

See Starting the engine (page 132).

18. JaguarDrive gear selector.

See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(page 137).

19. JaguarDrive mode selectors. See Driving

dynamics (page 169).

20. Electric Parking Brake (EPB).

See ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)

(page 146).

21. Steering wheel adjustment control.

See ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL

(page 67).

22. Starter control docking unit for the

Jaguar Smart Key.

See DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE

JAGUAR SMART KEY (page 20).

23. Bonnet release lever. See OPENING AND

CLOSING THE BONNET (page 195).

24. Luggage compartment release switch.

See LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

(page 26).

25. Headlamp levelling control.

See HEADLAMP LEVELLING (page 79).

26. Instrument lighting dimmer control.

See INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER

(page 123).

27. Rear fog lamps switch. See REAR FOG

LAMPS (page 77).

28. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Forward

Alert switch. See FORWARD ALERT

FUNCTION (page 164).

Introduction

PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

The vehicle has been designed, built and

tested, to cope with a variety of driving

conditions, some of which can place the

severest possible demands on control systems

and components. As such, fitting replacement

parts and accessories that have been

developed and tested to the same stringent

standards as the original components, will

safeguard the continued reliability, safety and

performance of your vehicle.

To augment the vehicle's already impressive

performance, a comprehensive range of Jaguar

approved spare parts and accessories is

available.

Jaguar parts are the only parts built to original

equipment specifications and approved by

Jaguar designers; this means that every single

part and accessory has been rigorously tested

by the same engineering team that designed

and built the vehicle.

A full list and description of all accessories is

available from your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer.

Electrical equipment

Always consult your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer before fitting any accessory.

Fitting inferior quality parts or accessories,

may be dangerous and could invalidate the

vehicle warranty.

It is recommended that you always consult

your Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice

regarding the approval, suitability, installation

and use of any parts or accessories before

fitting.

WARNINGS

Do not fit non-approved parts and

accessories or carry out

non-approved alterations or

conversions. It may be dangerous and could

affect the safety of the vehicle and occupants.

Also, the terms and conditions of the vehicle

warranty may be invalidated.

Jaguar will not accept any liability for

death, personal injury or damage to

property which may occur as a direct

result of fitment of non-approved accessories

or the carrying out of non-approved

conversions to Jaguar vehicles.

Jaguar strongly advise against

making any modifications to the

suspension or steering system. This

could seriously affect the handling and

stability of the vehicle leading to loss of control

or roll-over.

WARNING

It is extremely hazardous to fit or

replace parts or accessories, the

installation of which requires the

dismantling of, or addition to, either the

electrical or fuel systems.

Introduction

Airbag system

To prevent malfunction of the airbag system

always consult your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer before fitting any of the following:

•Electronic equipment such as a mobile

phone, two-way radio or in-car

entertainment system.

•Accessories attached to the front of the

vehicle.

•Any modification to the front of the vehicle.

•Any modification involving the removal or

repair of any wiring or component in the

vicinity of any of the airbag system

components, including the steering wheel,

steering column, instrument or fascia

panels.

•Any modification to the fascia panels or

steering wheel.

After-sales service

The After Sales Parts service is of paramount

importance, with franchised representation in

over 100 countries worldwide, Jaguar are able

to support your vehicle wherever you go.

Travelling abroad

In certain countries, it is a legal requirement to

fit parts made to the vehicle manufacturers'

specification.

Owners should ensure that any parts or

accessories fitted to the vehicle while travelling

abroad, will also conform to the legal

requirements of their own country when they

return home.

WARNING

The components that make up the

airbag system are sensitive to

electrical or physical interference,

either of which could easily damage the

system and cause inadvertent operation or a

malfunction of the airbag module.

E95341

Keys and remote controls

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The security system and entry to the vehicle are

controlled by the Jaguar Smart Key remote

control. All doors and the luggage

compartment can be locked and unlocked

using the remote control buttons.

Keyless Entry is an enhancement of the Jaguar

Smart Key and allows entry to the vehicle,

without the need to press a button. Full security

integrity of the vehicle is still maintained.

See KEYLESS ENTRY (page 33).

The Jaguar Smart Key also allows the vehicle to

be started without the use of a starter key.

See KEYLESS STARTING (page 133).

Two handsets, incorporating a detachable

emergency key blade, are supplied. Separate

emergency key blades are available from

Dealers.

The emergency key blade number is recorded

on an attached label. Peel off the label and

attach it to the designated area on the Security

Card, supplied in the literature pack. Keep the

Security Card safe, but not in the vehicle.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO

FREQUENCIES

Note: The radio frequency used by your remote

control may be used by other devices. For

example: amateur radios, medical equipment,

wireless headphones, or other remote control

devices. This may cause the frequency to be

jammed, and prevent your remote control from

operating correctly.

Environmental conditions can affect the

operation of remote controls and the operating

range may vary considerably depending on the

vehicle's location.

CAUTION

Remove all Jaguar Smart Keys from the

vehicle when it is left unattended. This

will ensure the vehicle is left in a secure

condition.

If a Jaguar Smart Key is lost, a

replacement can be obtained and

programmed to the vehicle by your Dealer.

Notify your Dealer as soon as a Jaguar Smart

Key is lost or stolen and have the remaining

Jaguar Smart Key(s) reprogrammed.

E93136

Keys and remote controls

USING THE REMOTE CONTROL

Jaguar Smart Key

Note: The operational range of the Jaguar

Smart Key will vary considerably depending on

atmospheric conditions and interference from

other transmitting devices.

Note: Some features of the security system are

market dependent or are options, so may not

be present on your vehicle.

1. Unlock.

2. Lock.

3. Luggage compartment release.

4. Convenience headlamp feature.

5. Panic alarm.

6. Emergency key blade.

7. Emergency key blade release button.

Unlocking

Press to unlock. See UNLOCKING

AND DISARMING THE VEHICLE

(page 18).

Locking

Press to lock. See LOCKING AND

ARMING THE VEHICLE (page 19).

Luggage compartment

Press to unlock, disarm and open

the luggage compartment. The

vehicle security system will remain

active, but for the period the luggage

compartment is open, the intrusion and

inclination sensing systems will be inhibited.

Door and bonnet security will remain active.

When the luggage compartment is

subsequently closed, the hazard warning

lamps will flash after a few seconds, to confirm

that the vehicle has rearmed the full alarm

system (if previously armed).

Approach lamps

When approaching the vehicle in

the dark, press to switch on the

approach illumination. The

headlamps will illuminate for up to 25 seconds.

Pressing the button again or operating the

starter button, will turn the approach lamps off.

Panic button

Press and hold for three seconds,

or press three times within three

seconds, to activate the emergency

alarm. The horn, siren and the hazard lamps

will operate.

Once active for more than five seconds, the

alarm can be cancelled by pressing the button

and holding for three seconds, or pressing

three times within three seconds.

WARNING

Never leave the Jaguar Smart Key in

the vehicle if children or animals are

also left in the vehicle. The vehicle's

systems and remote control functions could

be operated, which may result in injury.

4 3 2

E90683

Keys and remote controls

The emergency alarm will also be cancelled if

the Jaguar Smart Key is inserted into the

starter control unit and the START/STOP

button is pressed or if the vehicle detects a

valid Jaguar Smart Key when the START/STOP

button is pressed.

Care of the Jaguar Smart Key

Do not expose to extremes of heat, dust,

humidity or allow contact with fluids. Do not

leave the transmitter exposed to direct

sunlight.

Irregular operation

If difficulty is experienced with remote keyless

entry, keyless entry, keyless starting or Jaguar

Smart Key operation, it may be caused by:

•Internal battery low voltage. Replace the

battery. See CHANGING THE REMOTE

CONTROL BATTERY (page 24).

•High levels of localised external electrical

interference, e.g. a radio transmitter.

•Until the battery can be replaced, or until

the vehicle is outside the area of electrical

interference, the Jaguar Smart Key must

be inserted into the starter control unit.

UNLOCKING AND DISARMING THE

VEHICLE

Your vehicle can be unlocked using

either Single or Multi-point entry.

Single-point entry is a security

feature that only unlocks the driver's door

when the unlock button is pressed.

To change from Single to Multi-point entry (or

vice versa), press both the lock and unlock

buttons simultaneously for three seconds. The

hazard warning lamps will flash twice to

confirm the change.

The change can also be achieved using the

vehicle touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING

THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Single-point entry

First press: Unlocks the driver's door and

enables the other doors to be opened from the

inside (unless the child safety locks have been

activated on the rear doors). The hazard

warning lamps will flash twice, to indicate that

the vehicle is unlocked and the alarm has been

disarmed. The interior lamps will illuminate to

assist entry to the vehicle.

Note: In some markets, an audible warning will

sound.

Second press: Unlocks the passenger doors

and the luggage compartment.

Multi-point entry

Press briefly to unlock all the doors and

luggage compartment and to disarm the alarm.

The hazard warning lamps will flash twice to

indicate that the vehicle is unlocked and the

alarm has been disarmed. The interior lamps

will illuminate to assist entry to the vehicle.

Note: In some markets, an audible warning will

sound.

Power-fold mirrors

If automatic power-fold is enabled, the door

mirrors will unfold when the vehicle is

unlocked. The power-fold feature can be

enabled/disabled using the touch-screen.

See EXTERIOR MIRRORS (page 95).

Global opening

Press and hold the unlock button for three

seconds. The vehicle will unlock (either single

or multi-point) and the alarm will be disarmed

immediately. After the three seconds, all of the

windows and sunroof will open. This feature

can be enabled/disabled using the vehicle

touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING THE

REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Keys and remote controls

LOCKING AND ARMING THE VEHICLE

Press the lock button to secure the

vehicle. The vehicle can be Single

or Double locked, as follows:

Single locking

Press the lock button briefly. Single locking

secures the vehicle and prevents the doors

being opened from outside of the vehicle. The

doors can be unlocked and opened from inside

the vehicle. The hazard warning lamps will

flash once as confirmation.

Note: In some markets, an audible warning will

sound.

Double locking

Press the lock button twice within three

seconds. Double locking secures the vehicle

and prevents the doors being unlocked or

opened from inside or outside of the vehicle,

except with the correct Jaguar Smart Key. The

hazard warning lamps will flash twice (with a

long second flash) and an audible warning will

sound, as confirmation.

Double locking provides additional security if

the vehicle is left unattended. The vehicle

cannot be opened by breaking a window and

operating the door locks from inside the

vehicle.

Power-fold mirrors

If automatic power-fold is enabled, the door

mirrors will fold in towards the vehicle body

when the vehicle is locked. The power-fold

feature can be enabled/disabled using the

touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING THE

REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Lock confirmation

If you are uncertain whether the vehicle is

locked and armed (either by single or double

locking), press the lock button again. The

hazard warning lights will flash to indicate and

confirm the current lock status.

Note: If the vehicle is not already locked and

armed, pressing the lock button will single lock

the vehicle. Press again to double lock, if

required.

Global closing

Press and hold the lock button for three

seconds. The vehicle will single lock and the

alarm will be fully armed immediately. After the

three seconds, all the windows and the sunroof

will close.

WARNING

The vehicle will only lock, if all door,

luggage compartment and bonnet

apertures are closed. If a lock attempt

is made when an aperture is open, the vehicle

will not lock and two audible error warnings

will sound.

WARNING

Never double lock the vehicle with

people, children, or pets inside. In the

event of an emergency they would be

unable to escape, and the emergency services

would be unable to release them quickly.

WARNING

Ensure that no children, pets, or

obstructions are in any open aperture

before operating global closing.

Safety mechanisms are in place to prevent

serious injury, however, injuries can still

occur.

Keys and remote controls

Automatic relocking

If a door, or the tailgate, are not opened within

one minute of unlocking the vehicle using the

Jaguar Smart Key, doors will lock again

automatically. This feature can be

enabled/disabled using the touch-screen.

See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL

(page 21).

DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE JAGUAR

SMART KEY

Docking the Jaguar Smart Key

During normal operation, it is not necessary to

dock the Jaguar Smart Key. However, if the

unlock button on the Smart Key fails to operate

and the vehicle has been unlocked using the

emergency key blade, it will be necessary to

dock the Jaguar Smart Key to deactivate and

disarm the alarm system.

The Smart Key should also be docked when the

vehicle is being towed, in order to prevent the

steering column from locking.

Insert the Jaguar Smart Key into the starter

control unit, located on the driver's side of the

vehicle, as shown.

Note: When docking the Jaguar Smart Key, it is

recommended that the emergency key blade is

left in place. The end of the key blade can then

be used as a handle, to pull the Smart Key from

the control unit when undocking.

E92455

Keys and remote controls

Undocking the Jaguar Smart Key

To remove the Jaguar Smart Key from the

starter control unit:

1. Ensure that the vehicle is at rest with the

gear selector in the P position and the

ignition switched off.

2. Press the Jaguar Smart Key and release.

The key will eject into its rest position.

3. Remove the Jaguar Smart Key from the

starter control unit.

Message centre information displays

PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE

CONTROL

The Jaguar Smart Key and various features of

the vehicle security system, can be

programmed to your individual requirements

by use of the touch-screen.

The programmable features are as follows:

•Drive-away locking (including variable

speed)

•Single or multi-point entry (2 stage

unlocking)

•Alarm trigger information (market

dependent)

•Window global open or close (passive

entry vehicles only)

•Valet key mode

•Passive arming

•Automatic relock and arm.

CAUTION

Ensure the engine is switched off before

attempting to undock the Jaguar Smart

Key, otherwise damage to the Smart Key may

occur.

E92456

Message Meaning

SMART KEY NOT

FOUND, PLEASE

INSERT IN SLOT

The Jaguar Smart Key

has not been detected,

insert into the starter

control unit.

CHECK SMART

KEY

The Jaguar Smart Key

detected by the in-vehicle

systems is not the one

belonging to the vehicle.

REMOVE SMART

KEY

Remove the Jaguar

Smart Key from the

starter control unit.

Keys and remote controls

Selecting single (2 stage unlock) or

multi-point entry

From the main Home touch-screen menu,

select Vehicle:

•Select Veh. settings.

•The Security menu is selected

automatically as the default.

•Select: 2-stage unlocking On (for single-

point entry) or Off (for multi-point entry).

Note: This selection changes the setting for

both keyless entry and for when unlocking

using the Jaguar Smart Key.

Selecting alarm sensor override

From the main Home touch-screen menu,

select Vehicle:

•Select Veh. settings.

•The Security menu is selected

automatically as the default.

•Touch the arrow button to scroll down to

Alarm sensors and select either On or Off.

Selecting Off will override the interior and tilt

sensors until the vehicle is locked and

unlocked again. This facility is normally used

for recovery of the vehicle or travelling on a

ferry.

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Drive away

locking

2 stage unlocking Off On

12:26 pm

Off On

Valet mode

LAN1510

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

Valet

12:26 pm

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Passive arming

Off On

Alarm sensors Off On

12 : 26 pm

Off On

Auto-relock and

arm

Valet mode

E93148

Keys and remote controls

Selecting drive-away locking

From the main Home touch-screen menu,

select Vehicle:

•Select Veh. settings.

•The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

•Select the arrow button to scroll down to

Drive away locking and select either On or

Off.

Setting the drive-away locking speed

•Once Drive away locking On is selected,

select the speed from the list at which you

want the locks to activate (8, 16 or 32 km/h

or 5, 10 or 20 mph). To change between

Imperial and Metric measurement units,

select Units.

Selecting window global opening or

closing

From the main Home touch-screen menu,

select Vehicle:

•Select Veh. settings.

•The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

•Scroll down to Global open or Global

close and select either On or Off.

Selecting passive arming

From the main Home touch-screen menu,

select Vehicle:

•Select Veh. settings.

•The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

•Scroll down to Passive arming and select

either On or Off.

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Drive away

locking

2 stage unlocking Off On

12 : 26 pm

Off On

Valet mode

E93149

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Drive away

locking

2 stage unlocking

Speed (MPH)

Off On

12 : 26 pm

Off On

Valet mode

510 20

Units

JAG1306

Vehicle

Security

Parking Off On

Off

Off On

global open

Mirror fold back

12 : 26 pm

Windows

global close

Windows

Valet mode

E93150

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Passive arming

Off On

Alarm sensors Off On

12 : 26 pm

Auto-relock a

Valet mode

E93151

Keys and remote controls

Selecting automatic relock and arm

From the main Home touch-screen menu,

select Vehicle:

•Select Veh. settings.

•The Security button is selected

automatically as the default.

•Scroll down to Auto-relock and arm and

select either On or Off.

CHANGING THE REMOTE CONTROL

BATTERY

When the battery needs renewing, there will be

a significant decrease in the effective range of

the Jaguar Smart Key transmitter and the

message SMART KEY BATTERY LOW is

displayed in the message centre.

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Passive arming

Off On

Alarm sen On

12 : 26 pm

Off On

Auto-relock and

arm

Valet mode

E93152

E90710

Keys and remote controls

To renew the battery, follow the procedure

below:

1. Remove the key blade from the Jaguar

Smart Key. See USING THE REMOTE

CONTROL (page 17).

2. Remove the two side covers, one at a time,

by inserting a small, flat bladed

screwdriver between the cover and body

and lightly twist the screwdriver.

3. Insert the screwdriver between the two

body halves of the Jaguar Smart Key.

Apply light pressure to the screwdriver and

separate the two halves.

4. Remove the printed circuit board, taking

care not to touch the battery terminals.

Remove the old battery and dispose of it

safely.

5. Fit a new battery, type CR2032 (available

from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer),

with the positive (+) downwards, in the

battery receptacle. Avoid touching the new

battery, as moisture/oil from the fingers

can reduce battery life and corrode the

contacts.

Refit the parts in the reverse order, ensuring

that they click securely into place.

Battery disposal

Used batteries must be disposed of

correctly, as they contain a number

of harmful substances. Seek advise

on disposal from your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer and/or your local

authority.

EMERGENCY KEY BLADE

To extract: Press and hold the release button

(7), while pulling the key blade (6) from the

Jaguar Smart Key body.

To insert: Press and hold the release button

while pushing the key blade into appropriate

slot in the Jaguar Smart Key.

The key blade operates the left-hand front door

lock and the luggage compartment lock.

See USING THE EMERGENCY KEY BLADE

(page 28).

E92438

Locks

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

Locking and unlocking from outside the

vehicle

Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the

Jaguar Smart Key, is explained earlier in this

handbook. See USING THE REMOTE

CONTROL (page 17). Locking and unlocking

the vehicle using the Keyless Entry system is

explained later in this handbook. See KEYLESS

ENTRY (page 33).

Note: To help prevent locking the Jaguar Smart

Key inside the vehicle, it has been made

difficult to slam lock a door using the interior

door locking lever. The door will not lock.

Luggage compartment

Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed within

a metal box, it will not be detected by the

vehicle security system.

The luggage compartment can be opened at

any time, using the appropriate button on the

Jaguar Smart Key or via keyless entry. It can

also be opened using the exterior release,

provided the doors are unlocked.

Provided the vehicle is not locked or alarmed,

the luggage compartment can also be opened

using the interior release button.

The luggage compartment can also be

unlocked and opened using the emergency key

blade, as described later in this section.

Drive-away locking

This feature locks all unsecured locks when the

vehicle reaches a designated forward speed.

This designated speed and whether or not

drive-away locking is enabled, can be set using

the vehicle touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING

THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

WARNING

Never double lock the vehicle with

people, children or pets inside. In the

event of an emergency they would be

unable to escape, and the emergency services

would be unable to release them quickly.

When the vehicle is double-locked the doors

cannot be opened, either from inside or

outside the vehicle.

Breaking a window will not allow a door to be

opened.

CAUTION

If the luggage compartment is opened

after the driver and passenger doors are

locked, ensure that the Jaguar Smart Key

remains outside the vehicle when it is closed

again. If the Jaguar Smart Key is inadvertently

left inside the luggage compartment, an

audible warning will sound and the luggage

compartment will re-open after three seconds.

Locks

Locking and unlocking from inside the

vehicle

Door lock and release levers

1. Press the locking lever to lock the door,

pull the lever to unlock the door. Operating

the locking lever on either front door will

lock all closed doors. If the doors are

locked, operating the locking lever on

either front door will unlock all four doors

(provided the doors were locked from

inside the vehicle and the alarm is

disarmed).

2. Pull the release lever to open a door. If the

doors are locked, operating the lever will

have no effect.

Note: If the car was locked using the Jaguar

Smart Key, then operating the locking lever will

only unlock that door and the alarm will sound.

Note: If the vehicle has been double-locked,

then the interior door lock and release levers

will not operate. The vehicle must be unlocked

using the Jaguar Smart Key.

Fascia buttons

Locking: With all the doors closed, press the

button to lock all doors and the luggage

compartment. Press and hold to lock all doors

and the luggage compartment and close all

windows and the sunroof. The windows and

sunroof will stop closing if the button is

released.

Note: The fascia locking button will not

function unless all the doors are closed.

Unlocking: Press to unlock all doors and the

luggage compartment. Press and hold to

unlock all doors and the luggage compartment

and open all windows and the sunroof. The

windows and sunroof will stop opening if the

button is released.

E93160

E93161

E93162

Locks

Press to open the luggage compartment.

Mislock

If one of the doors, the bonnet, or the luggage

compartment are not shut fully when the

vehicle is locked using the Jaguar Smart Key or

by Keyless locking, the vehicle will not lock and

two warning tones will sound. Check that all

doors, the bonnet and the luggage

compartment are closed properly and lock the

vehicle again.

If one or more of the doors fails to lock

properly when a lock attempt is made using the

Jaguar Smart Key, two warning tones will

sound and one or more of the doors may not be

locked.

USING THE EMERGENCY KEY BLADE

The emergency key blade will be needed to

unlock the vehicle, if the Jaguar Smart Key has

a discharged battery or is damaged. The

emergency key blade is also used for accessing

the luggage compartment if the vehicle has

been left in Valet mode. Withdraw the key from

the Jaguar Smart Key for use. See USING THE

REMOTE CONTROL (page 17).

Locking and unlocking the doors

Remove the front left-hand door lock cover as

follows:

1. Insert the emergency key blade into the

slot on the underside of the cover.

2. Gently lever the key blade upwards.

3. Carefully twist the key blade, to lever the

cover off the retaining clips.

Insert the key blade into the exposed lock to

operate.

Note: To refit the door lock cover, push it firmly

back into place until all three securing tabs

click into position.

JAG1333

JAG1310

Locks

To lock: Ensure all the doors are closed, then

turn the key blade towards the front of the

vehicle and release. This will lock all doors but

will not arm the alarm.

To unlock: Turn the key blade towards the rear

of the vehicle and release. If the security

system is disarmed, all doors and the luggage

compartment will be unlocked. If the security

system is armed, only the front left-hand door

will unlock. The interior lighting will be turned

on at reduced level for two minutes.

If the vehicle is unlocked using the emergency

key blade with the security system armed, the

alarm will sound when a door is opened. To

deactivate the alarm, press the unlock button

on the Jaguar Smart Key or press the engine

START/STOP button with the Smart Key inside

the vehicle. If the Jaguar Smart Key is

inoperable, the alarm can be deactivated by

docking the Smart Key into the starter control

unit. See DOCKING/UNDOCKING THE JAGUAR

SMART KEY (page 20).

Unlocking the luggage compartment

If Valet mode is selected, or if the vehicle

battery is discharged, it will be necessary to

use the emergency key blade to unlock and

open the luggage compartment.

Note: If the security system is in Valet mode,

the touch-screen can be used to cancel Valet

mode, in which case the luggage compartment

can then be opened in the normal manner.

Note: If the alarm is armed when the

emergency key blade is used to unlock the

luggage compartment, the alarm will sound

when the luggage compartment is opened.

Press the unlock button on the Jaguar Smart

Key to disarm/deactivate the alarm.

•Use the emergency key blade to prise away

the black lock cover.

•Insert the emergency key blade, then turn

the key clockwise to unlock and open the

luggage compartment.

Note: Unlocking the luggage compartment

using the emergency key blade will cancel Valet

mode.

E93157

Locks

VALET MODE

Valet mode allows the vehicle to be locked by a

parking attendant, without giving access to the

luggage compartment and glove compartment.

Valet mode also prevents operation of the

touch-screen, to prevent access to telephone

numbers or navigation addresses.

Selecting valet mode

From the main Home touch-screen menu,

select Valet:

Enter a four digit Personal identification

Number (PIN) (personally chosen) by touching

the digit screen pad. On completion, touch the

OK button.

If you wish to cancel the PIN, touch the C

button at any time during entering the number.

Once the PIN has been entered, a pop-up

screen is displayed, advising you to remove the

emergency key blade from the Jaguar Smart

Key and to keep it safe. Select OK.

The screen will indicate that the PIN has been

accepted by displaying Valet on.

The luggage compartment and glove

compartment are now securely locked in Valet

mode.

On exiting and securing the vehicle, hand the

Jaguar Smart Key, with the emergency key

blade removed, to the attendant.

Note: Ensure that the emergency key blade is

kept safely at all times.

Valet off - enter pin

Vehicle

Security

Parking

12 3

4 6

78 9

12:26 pm

Valet mode

JAG1511

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

Valet

12:26 pm

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

Vehicle

Security

Parking

12:26 pm

Valet mode

Please ensure Jaguar mechanical keyblade

is removed from Smart key stowage and

kept safe, before handing smart key to

Valet personnel

Valet mode

JAG0948

Locks

Deselecting valet mode

When you enter the vehicle, the Valet mode

screen will be displayed automatically.

Enter your four digit PIN and touch the OK

button.

A pop-up screen is displayed, advising you to

return the emergency key blade to the Jaguar

Smart Key. Select OK.

The screen will indicate that your PIN has been

accepted by displaying Valet off.

•The luggage compartment will return to

the previously set security requirement.

•The glove compartment will now open as

normal.

Note: If the PIN number has been forgotten,

the luggage compartment can be unlocked by

using the emergency key blade. This will cancel

the Valet mode.

Valet on - enter pin

Vehicle

Security

Parking

12 3

4 6

78 9

12 : 26 pm

Valet mode

JAG0946

Vehicle

Security

Parking

12:26 pm

Valet mode

Please ensure Jaguar mechanical keyblade

is returned to Smart key stowage for safe

keeping

Valet mode

JAG0949

Locks

JAGUAR SMART KEY SYSTEM

TRANSMITTERS

1. Cabin front transmitter.

2. Cabin rear transmitter.

3. Front exterior door handle transmitters.

4. Rear exterior door handle transmitters.

5. Luggage compartment interior

transmitter.

6. Luggage compartment exterior

transmitter.

7. Keyless vehicle module.

JAG1305

1 2

WARNING

Any person fitted with an implanted

medical device should ensure that the

device is kept at a distance of at least

22 cm (8.7 inches) away from any transmitter

mounted in the vehicle. This is to avoid any

possibility of interference between the system

and device.

Locks

KEYLESS ENTRY

Keyless entry allows the driver to unlock and

disarm the vehicle by simply operating the

door handle. The Keyless Entry function

operates in the following manner:

•As a door handle is operated, the vehicle

emits a search signal.

•If the Jaguar Smart Key is within

approximately 1.0 m (3 feet) of the

operated door handle, the signal will be

acknowledged.

•The vehicle recognises the Jaguar Smart

Key and disarms the alarm and unlocks the

vehicle according to the current security

setting (either Single-point or Multi-point

entry). See USING THE REMOTE

CONTROL (page 17). The hazard warning

lamps flash twice as confirmation (in some

markets an audible warning will sound

twice).

Note: The Jaguar Smart Key needs only to be

on the driver's person or in a non-metallic bag

or briefcase. It does not need to be exposed or

handled.

Note: If Single-point entry is the current

security setting and a door other than the

driver's door is opened first, then all doors will

be unlocked. If the driver's door is opened,

only the driver's door will be unlocked. All

other doors and the luggage compartment will

remain locked.

Jaguar Smart Key check

When the last open door is closed, the vehicle

will perform a search of the vehicle interior for

the Jaguar Smart Key. If one is not found,

SMART KEY NOT FOUND, PLEASE INSERT IN

SLOT will be displayed for four seconds in the

message centre. This is to alert the driver that

the Jaguar Smart Key may have been

inadvertently removed from the vehicle.

E93153

Locks

Keyless locking

The vehicle will not lock automatically.

The vehicle will only lock if all doors, luggage

compartment and bonnet are closed. If a lock

attempt is made with an open aperture, the

vehicle will not lock and two audible error

warnings will sound.

•To single-lock the vehicle, press the button

on the door handle once. The hazard

warning lamps will flash once as

confirmation (in some markets, an audible

warning will sound).

•To double-lock the vehicle, press the

button twice within three seconds. The

hazard warning lamps will flash twice (with

a long second flash). In some markets, a

double audible warning will sound.

Note: Keyless locking will only activate if the

Jaguar Smart Key is outside the vehicle. If no

Smart Key is present, two audible error

warnings will sound.

Window global closing

Press and hold the button on the door handle

for three seconds, to lock the vehicle, arm the

alarm and also close all open windows and the

sunroof. The windows and sunroof will stop

closing when the button is released.

Convenience mode

When the door is opened using either the

Jaguar Smart Key or keyless entry, the

vehicle's electrical system initiates the

convenience mode. The following systems

become functional:

•Memory.

•Seat and steering column adjustment.

•Interior and exterior lighting.

•Message centre.

•Auxiliary power socket.

WARNING

Never double-lock the vehicle with

people, children or pets inside. In the

event of an emergency they would be

unable to escape and the emergency services

would be unable to release them quickly.

E93154

Locks

Steering column lock

Your vehicle is fitted with an electronic steering

column lock. The column unlocks when it

detects a Jaguar Smart Key inside the vehicle.

The steering column automatically locks when

the starter switch is turned off and the driver's

door is opened.

Any malfunction of the steering column lock

will be indicated by the message STEERING

COLUMN LOCKED displaying in the message

centre. If this occurs:

1. Press the starter button to return to the

convenience mode.

2. Try again to unlock the steering column

lock, by turning the steering wheel gently

to the left and right.

3. If the malfunction still persists, seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING

Global opening and closing is enabled/disabled

via the touch-screen.See PROGRAMMING THE

REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Window global opening

Press and hold the unlock button

on the Jaguar Smart Key for at least

three seconds. The alarm will

disarm, all doors and the luggage

compartment will unlock and all the windows

and sunroof will open.

Note: The windows and sunroof will continue

to open when the unlock button is released.

Press and hold the interior unlock button on

the fascia. After three seconds, all the windows

and the sunroof will open.

Note: The windows and sunroof will stop

opening when the unlock button is released.

CAUTION

During vehicle recovery, the Jaguar

Smart Key must remain inside the

vehicle (or be stowed in the starter control unit

in the centre console), so that the steering

column remains unlocked.

WARNING

Accidental closing of an electrically

operated window or sunroof on

fingers, hands or any vulnerable part

of the body, can result in serious injury.

Always observe the following precautions:

Ensure that you have a clear view of all open

apertures on the vehicle and that all apertures

are unobstructed before activating global

closing.

Locks

Window global closing (not Japan)

Press and hold the lock button on

the Jaguar Smart Key. The alarm

will arm, all doors and the luggage

compartment will lock and, after three

seconds, all open windows and sunroof will

close.

Note: The windows and sunroof will continue

to close when the lock button is released.

Press and hold the exterior locking button on

the driver's door handle for at least three

seconds, with a valid Jaguar Smart Key in the

vicinity of the door.

Note: The windows and sunroof will stop

closing when the lock button is released.

Press and hold the interior lock button on the

fascia. After three seconds, all open windows

and the sunroof will close.

Note: The windows and sunroof will stop

closing when the lock button is released.

Cancelling global opening/closing

To stop the windows and sunroof from

opening/closing, during global opening/

closing operation, press any of the buttons on

the Jaguar Smart Key or operate the driver's

window switch. To stop a particular window

from opening, operate the relevant window

switch.

E93154

Alarm

ARMING THE ALARM

The engine is automatically

immobilised when the Jaguar

Smart Key is removed from the

vehicle. The alarm system is armed when the

lock button on the Jaguar Smart Key is pressed

or the button on the exterior door handle is

pressed with a valid Jaguar Smart Key in close

proximity. The hazard lamps will flash to

indicate that the alarm is armed (in certain

markets, an audible tone will sound). The alarm

can also arm automatically (known as passive

arming), 30 seconds after all doors, luggage

compartment and bonnet apertures are closed,

and the Jaguar Smart Key is removed from the

vehicle. Passive arming does not lock the

vehicle.

This feature can be enabled/disabled using the

vehicle touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING

THE REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Full alarm

To set full alarm protection, ensure that all the

windows and the sunroof are closed. Then, on

vehicles fitted with double-locking, press the

lock button twice within three seconds. The

hazard warning lights will flash twice to

confirm the alarm state and, in some markets,

an audible tone will sound.

Once fully armed the alarm will sound if:-

•The bonnet, luggage compartment, or a

door are opened.

•If a front door is unlocked using the

emergency key blade or the interior door

lock release levers and then opened.

•Movement is detected within the vehicle

interior.

•A window, front or rear windscreen, or

sunroof glass are broken.

•The vehicle is raised or tilted.

•The vehicle battery is disconnected.

•An attempt is made to disconnect the

alarm siren.

•An attempt is made to start the vehicle,

without a valid Jaguar Smart Key present.

Note: If the alarm is armed and a window or the

sunroof are left open, the alarm may sound due

to movement of air currents.

Note: Some of the above conditions are market

or option dependent and therefore may not

apply to your vehicle.

Perimeter alarm

To set perimeter alarm protection, briefly press

the lock button once. The hazard warning lights

will flash once to confirm the alarm state.

Once armed the perimeter alarm will sound if:-

•The bonnet, luggage compartment, or a

door are opened.

•If a front door is unlocked using the

emergency key blade or the interior door

lock release levers and then opened.

•The vehicle battery is disconnected.

•An attempt is made to disconnect the

alarm siren.

•An attempt is made to start the vehicle,

without a valid Jaguar Smart Key present.

Note: This setting should be used in

circumstances such as travelling on a ferry,

when pets are to be left in the vehicle, when a

window must be left open etc.

Note: Some of the above conditions are market

or option dependent and therefore may not

apply to your vehicle.

Alarm

Alarm indicator

The alarm status is displayed by the indicator.

•Indicator off - alarm disarmed.

•Indicator flashes once per second - alarm

is armed and engine immobilised.

Battery-backed sounder

In certain markets, a separate battery backed

sounder is fitted. This device will sound the

alarm if the vehicle battery or the alarm

sounder is disconnected when the security

system is armed.

DISARMING THE ALARM

When the vehicle is unlocked using

the Jaguar Smart Key or by valid

keyless entry, the alarm is

automatically disabled. The hazard lamps will

flash twice to indicate that the alarm is

disabled. In certain markets, a double audible

tone will sound.

Disarming when the unlock button fails

to work

If, when pressed, the unlock button fails to

operate the vehicle can still be unlocked and

the alarm disabled. To unlock the vehicle:-

1. Unlock the left-hand front door using the

emergency key blade. See USING THE

EMERGENCY KEY BLADE (page 28).

2. Dock the Jaguar Smart Key into the starter

control unit. See DOCKING/UNDOCKING

THE JAGUAR SMART KEY (page 20).

Note: When the left-hand front door is

unlocked using the key, the alarm will sound

until the Jaguar Smart Key is docked.

Deactivating the alarm when triggered

If the alarm has been triggered, it can be

deactivated by any one of the following

methods:-

•Pressing the unlock button on the Jaguar

Smart Key.

•Docking the Smart Key into the starter

control unit.

•Opening a door using keyless entry.

•Pressing the START/STOP button with a

valid Jaguar Smart Key present.

/ 0 km

E93168

Alarm

Alarm trigger information

If you have reason to believe that the alarm was

triggered when you were away from the

vehicle, it is possible to check on your return

using the touch-screen.

From the touch-screen Home menu, select

Vehicle and then Veh. settings. The Security

menu is displayed automatically as the default.

Use the arrow icons to scroll to the second

screen.

A text display (arrowed) will indicate if the

alarm has been triggered, and also indicate

what the cause of the trigger was (e.g. Driver

door, Passenger door, Inclination sensor,

Trunk, etc.).

SECURITY SENSORS

Note: If the vehicle is to be transported by

road, rail or sea, the vehicle should not be

double-locked or the tilt and intrusion sensors

should be deactivated using the touch-screen.

See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL

(page 21). This prevents the alarm from

sounding as the vehicle pitches and rolls.

Tilt sensor

The tilt sensor detects any change in the

vehicle's inclination to the ground. When the

alarm is armed and the vehicle double-locked,

any change in the vehicle's inclination will

activate the tilt alarm. This feature protects

against unauthorised towing away or

jacking-up of the vehicle.

The tilt alarm is disarmed when the vehicle

security system is disarmed using the Jaguar

Smart Key.

Intrusion sensor

The intrusion sensor is mounted in the roof

console and detects any movement within the

vehicle cabin via the use of ultrasonic sound

waves. When the alarm is armed and the

vehicle double-locked, any movement detected

inside the cabin will activate the alarm.

Note: It takes approximately 30 seconds for

the sensor to create an ultrasonic profile of the

cabin and be fully armed.

The intrusion alarm is disarmed when the

vehicle security system is disarmed using the

Jaguar Smart Key.

Note: Ensure all windows and sunroof are

closed prior to arming the alarm and

double-locking the vehicle. Failure to do so

may result in false alarms being sounded due

to movements detected outside the vehicle.

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Passive arm

fOn

Alarm sensors Off On

12:26 pm

Off On

Auto-relock and

arm

Valet mode

Passenger door

Alarm triggered by:

JAG1309

Alarm

Passive arming

This vehicle is fitted with a passive arming

feature which can, if enabled, automatically

arm the anti-theft system. Passive arming will

automatically arm the perimeter alarm system

30 seconds after the driver's door is closed,

provided all doors, bonnet and luggage

compartment are closed, the ignition is

switched off and there are no valid Jaguar

Smart Keys inside the vehicle.

It will also automatically arm the perimeter

alarm system 30 seconds after the vehicle is

unlocked, if none of the doors or the luggage

compartment are opened.

Passive arming will not lock the vehicle,

although access to the luggage compartment

via the interior or exterior release buttons will

be inhibited and the fuel filler flap will be

locked.

Passive arming can be disabled/enabled using

the touch-screen. See PROGRAMMING THE

REMOTE CONTROL (page 21).

Automatic relocking and re-arming of the

alarm

Automatic relock and re-arm is a feature which,

if enabled, automatically relocks the vehicle

and arms the anti-theft system.

If the vehicle is in a locked and armed state and

the remote unlock button is pressed, but none

of the doors or the luggage compartment are

opened within 45 seconds, the vehicle will

automatically relock all the doors and the

luggage compartment and will re-arm the

alarm system.

Note: Automatic relocking and arming will only

relock to a centrally locked state and will only

arm to a perimeter alarm condition.

Automatic relocking and re-arming can be

disabled/enabled using the touch-screen.

See PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL

(page 21).

Sensor faults

If the security systems detect a fault with one

of the security sensors, two error tones will

sound from the alarm siren after the vehicle is

unlocked and disarmed. If this condition

occurs, please visit your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer for rectification.

Seats

SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION

The seat, head restraint, seat belt and airbags,

all contribute to the protection of the user.

Correct use of these components will give you

greater protection, therefore you should

observe the following points:

1. Sit in an upright position with the base of

your spine as far back as possible and the

seatback reclined no more than 30

degrees.

2. Do not move the driver's seat too close to

the steering wheel. Ideally, a minimum

distance of 254 mm (10 inches) is

recommended between the breastbone

and the steering wheel airbag cover. Hold

the steering wheel in the correct position

with your arms slightly bent.

•Adjust the head restraint so that its highest

point is level with the top of your head.

•Position the seat belt so that it is mid-way

between your neck and your shoulder. Fit

the strap tightly across your hips, not

across your stomach.

•Ensure that your driving position is

comfortable and enables you to maintain

full control of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so could

cause loss of vehicle control and

personal injury.

E93242

Seats

ELECTRIC SEATS

JAG1650

2A B

Seats

1. Cushion length adjustment.

2. Bolster adjustment:

A. Bolster inflate.

B. Bolster deflate.

3. Lumbar support adjustment.

4. Seat back angle adjustment.

5. Head restraint height adjustment.

6. Height adjustment.

7. Fore and aft adjustment.

8. Cushion front tilt adjustment.

To adjust the seats, the Jaguar Smart Key must

be in the vehicle and the ignition turned on.

Driving position memory

1. Memory preset 1.

2. Memory preset 2.

3. Memory Set button.

4. Indicator light.

Once you have adjusted the driver's seat,

steering column and exterior mirrors for your

ideal driving position, the vehicle can

memorise these settings for future use.

1. Press the memory set button to activate

the memory function.

2. Press one of the preset buttons within five

seconds to memorise the current settings.

An audible chime will sound and MEMORY

1 (or 2) SETTINGS SAVED is displayed in

the message centre, to confirm the

settings have been memorised.

A seat position can only be memorised during

the five second active period.

Any existing settings for a memory preset will

be over-written when programming a memory

position.

Recalling a memorised position

Press the appropriate memory preset button (1

or 2), MEMORY 1 (or 2) SETTINGS RECALLED

will be displayed in the message centre.

WARNINGS

Do not adjust a seat while the vehicle

is moving. Failure to follow this

instruction could potentially cause

personal injury or loss of vehicle control.

Before making rearward, height or

reclining seat adjustments, check that

the rear passenger has adequate leg

room.

The driver and front passenger must

not ride with the seat fully reclined.

E93239

Seats

HEAD RESTRAINTS

For information on adjusting power-operated

head restraints, refer to the Electric seats

section. See ELECTRIC SEATS (page 42).

Whiplash protection

Both front seats are equipped with Active Head

Restraints (AHR), which reduce the risk of neck

and spinal injury (whiplash) in the event of a

rear impact. See WHIPLASH PROTECTION

(page 57).

Head restraint tilt adjustment

To adjust the angle of the head restraint, press

the locking button on the side of the restraint

(solid arrow) and move the restraint to the

desired position. Release the button to lock in

place.

The head restraint should be tilted so that it is

in close proximity to the back of the head, when

seated in the normal driving position.

WARNINGS

Head restraints are designed to

support the head, not the back of the

neck. The restraint must be

positioned correctly to restrain rearward

movement of the head in a collision. An

incorrectly adjusted head restraint increases

the risk of death or serious injury in the event

of a collision.

Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of the head restraint is above the

centre line of the head. An incorrectly

adjusted head restraint increases the risk of

death or serious injury in the event of a

collision. See SITTING IN THE CORRECT

POSITION (page 41).

On front head restraints, it is possible

to adjust the tilt of the head restraint

forwards or backwards. For greater

protection in the event of a collision, the head

restraint should be adjusted so that it is as

close to the back of the head as is practical.

Do not drive, or carry passengers,

with the head restraints removed

from occupied seats. The absence of

a correctly adjusted head restraint increases

the risk of death or serious injury in the event

of a collision.

Never adjust the head restraints while

the vehicle is in motion. An

incorrectly adjusted head restraint

increases the risk of death or serious injury in

the event of a collision.

JAG1655

Seats

Manual head restraints

1. Press the locking collar to release the head

restraint.

2. Whilst pressing the locking collar, move

the head restraint up or down to the

required position.

Note: It is not necessary to press the locking

collar to adjust the head restraint upwards.

Head restraint removal

Manual head restraints may be removed, if

required, to fit larger child seats. Press the

locking collar and lift the restraint out of the

seat back. Ensure the restraint is refitted once

the child seat is removed.

Note: It is not possible to remove power-

operated head restraints.

Note: Refer to the Child Safety section for

details on correct child restraint fitment.

See CHILD SEATS (page 59).

REAR SEATS

The split fold rear seat can be folded

completely to accommodate large loads, or

partially to accommodate long loads, and still

retain seating for passengers.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove a front head

restraint fitted with a display screen.

This may damage electrical connections.

E93185

WARNINGS

Always ensure that objects carried

within the vehicle are secured

properly. Unsecured items can cause

death or serious injury in the event of an

impact or sudden manoeuvre.

Never allow passengers to travel in

the luggage compartment under any

circumstances. All vehicle occupants

should be seated correctly, and wear a seat

belt at all times when the vehicle is in motion.

Failure to do so will greatly increase the risk of

death and serious injury in the event of an

accident or heavy braking.

Always take note of safety warnings

and labels attached to the rear seats.

The labels give advice on safely

folding and erecting the seats.

Seats

Folding the rear seats

Stow the rear seat armrest.

With the luggage compartment open, pull the

relevant seat release handle, located as shown

(illustration shows view from the rear of the

vehicle, with the luggage compartment open).

Fold the seat back part-way forward and

remove the head restraint(s) from the folded

seat back. See HEAD RESTRAINTS (page 44).

Fully fold the seat back forward and, if required,

repeat the process for the second seat section.

JAG0925

JAG0926

WARNING

Ensure that the removed rear head

restraints are stored securely. Never

leave them loose in the vehicle, as

they can cause serious injury or death in the

event of an accident, heavy braking, or sudden

manoeuvres.

JAG0927

JAG0928

Seats

Raising the rear seats

The process for raising the rear seat is the

reverse of folding.

HEATED SEATS

Note: To prevent the battery from becoming

discharged the seat heaters will only operate

when the engine is running.

Seat heating is adjusted through the vehicle

touch-screen (from either the Climate or the

Home menu). The seat heaters have three

temperature levels, indicated by the three bars

adjacent to each seat icon.

•Touch the left or right-hand seat icon (as

appropriate) to activate the seat heater,

which initially selects the maximum

temperature level (three bars).

•Touch the icon a second time to select the

medium temperature setting (two bars).

•Touch the icon a third time to select the

lowest temperature setting (one bar).

•Touch the icon again to switch off the seat

heaters.

WARNINGS

Ensure that when the seat back is

raised, the seat belts are routed

correctly and are not trapped by the

seat back.

Ensure that when the seat back is

raised, the locking mechanism is fully

engaged. Failure to do so can

increase the risk of death or serious injury in

the event of an accident or sudden manoeuvre

or heavy braking.

Before driving, ensure that the head

restraints are correctly fitted to the

rear seats.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigatio

Vehicle

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

Valet

12:26 pm

External

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

B i Subch.

JAG1512

Seats

CLIMATE SEATS

Note: To prevent the battery from becoming

discharged the climate seats will only operate

when the engine is running.

Seat ventilation is adjusted through the vehicle

touch-screen (from either the Climate or the

Home menu). The climate seats have three

heated and three cooled settings, indicated by

the three bars adjacent to each seat icon. These

bars will appear red when heated ventilation is

selected, or blue when cooled ventilation is

selected.

Heated ventilation

Touch the up arrow to activate heated

ventilation for the chosen seating position. The

system automatically selects the maximum

heated ventilation setting (3 red bars

illuminated).

To adjust the level of heated ventilation, touch

the down arrow the appropriate number of

times:

•1 touch = intermediate heated ventilation

(2 red bars).

•2 touches = minimum heated ventilation (1

red bar).

•3 touches = heated ventilation off (no bars

illuminated).

Cooled ventilation

Touch the down arrow to activate cooled

ventilation for the chosen seating position. The

system automatically selects the maximum

cooled ventilation setting (3 blue bars

illuminated).

To adjust the level of cooled ventilation, touch

the up arrow the appropriate number of times:

•1 touch = intermediate cooled ventilation

(2 blue bars).

•2 touches = minimum cooled ventilation (1

blue bar).

•3 touches = cooled ventilation off (no bars

illuminated).

Backrest ventilation only

It is possible to set the seat ventilation so that

only the seat backrest is ventilated. Backrest

only ventilation is selected using the

touch-screen.

•From the Climate menu, select Settings.

•For the left or right front seat select the

appropriate icon; either full seat ventilation

(1) or seat backrest ventilation only (2).

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12:26 pm

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BC 5Live Xtra

National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

JAG1513

Auto

12 : 26 pm

Auto

Climate

Ventilation

External

Left

Sensitivity

Climate seat

settings

Change units

Always

open

Auto

JAG0914

Seat belts

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Seat belts

Seat belt safety

WARNINGS

Seat belts are designed to bear upon

the bony structure of the body, and

should be worn low across the front

of the pelvis or the pelvis chest and shoulders,

as applicable; wearing the lap section of the

belt across the abdominal area must be

avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection for

which they have been designed. A slack belt

will greatly reduce the protection afforded to

the wearer.

Care should be taken to avoid

contamination of the webbing with

polishes, oils and chemicals, and

particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely

be carried out using mild soap and water.

The belt should be replaced if

webbing becomes frayed,

contaminated or damaged.

It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in a

severe impact even if damage to the

assembly is not obvious.

Belts should not be worn with the

straps twisted.

E82942

WARNINGS

Do not carry hard, fragile or sharp

items between your person and the

seat belt. In an impact, the pressure

from the seat belt on such items can cause

them to break, which in turn may cause death

or serious injuries.

Each belt assembly must only be used

by one occupant; it is dangerous to

put a belt around a child being carried

on the occupant's lap.

The occupants of the front seats

should not travel with the seat back at

more than 30 degrees from upright.

Doing so will reduce the protection afforded by

the seat belt.

WARNINGS

Seat belts should be worn by all

vehicle occupants, for every journey,

no matter how short. Failure to do so,

will greatly increase the risk of death or

serious injury in the event of an accident.

Never wear just the lap belt or just the

shoulder belt of a lap/shoulder

diagonal seat belt. Both of these

actions are extremely dangerous and may

increase your risk of injury.

No modifications or additions should

be made by the user which will either

prevent the seat belt adjusting

devices from operating to remove slack, or

prevent the seat belt assembly from being

adjusted to remove slack.

A slack seat belt offers a greatly reduced level

of occupant protection in an impact.

Seat belts

Seat belt checks

Note: If the vehicle is parked on an incline, the

seat belt mechanism may lock. This is not a

fault and the belt should be gently eased out

from the upper anchorage.

The seat belts should be inspected regularly to

check for fraying, cuts or wear to the webbing,

and the condition and security of the

mechanism, buckles, adjusters, and mounting

points.

•With the seat belt fastened, give the

webbing near the buckle a quick upward

pull. The buckle must remain securely

locked.

•With the seat belt unfastened, unreel the

seat belt to the limit of its travel. Check that

it unreels smoothly with no snatches or

snags. Allow the belt to fully retract, again

checking for smooth operation.

•Partially unreel the seat belt, then hold the

tongue plate and give a quick forward pull.

The mechanism must lock and prevent any

further unreeling.

If any of the seat belts fail to meet those

criteria, immediately contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

SEAT BELT REMINDER

If the driver's seat belt is not

fastened when the vehicle is in

motion, a chime will be heard and

the seat belt warning indicator will illuminate.

The warning chime and indicator will also be

activated if the front passenger seat is

occupied without the seat belt being fastened.

Note: Objects placed on the front passenger

seat may activate the seat belt reminder

warning chime and indicator. It is

recommended that any objects placed on the

front passenger seat are secured using the seat

belt.

If any damage, wear, cuts, defects or

impaired operation are noted with the

seat belts, the vehicle should be taken

to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer for immediate

attention. Do not use the vehicle if the seat

belts cannot be operated correctly.

When using seat belts to restrain

items other than occupants, take care

to ensure that the belts are not

damaged, or exposed to sharp edges.

Care must be taken to avoid

contaminating the seat belt webbing

and seat belt mechanisms with any

chemicals, liquids, grit, dirt or cleaning

products. If the seat belts do become

contaminated, they should be replaced

immediately. Contaminated seat belts my not

operate correctly in an impact and cannot be

relied upon.

The use of comfort clips, or devices

that would create slackness in the

seat belt system, is not advised.

WARNINGS

Seat belts

USING SEAT BELTS DURING

PREGNANCY

Position the lap strap comfortably across the

hips beneath the abdomen. Place the diagonal

part of the seat belt between the breasts and to

the side of the abdomen. Ensure that the seat

belt is not slack or twisted.

FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS

1. Draw the belt out smoothly, ensure that the

belt height, the seat, and your position on

the seat are correct. The belt should lay flat

across the pelvis, chest, and mid-point of

the collar bone between the neck and

shoulder.

2. With the seat belt correctly positioned,

place the metal tongue into the buckle

nearest to you. Press it in until a click is

heard.

Releasing the seat belts

Note: When releasing the seat belt it is

advisable to hold the belt before pressing the

release button. This will prevent the belt from

retracting too quickly.

To release the seat belt, press the red button.

WARNINGS

Position the seat belt correctly for the

safety of the mother and unborn

child. Never wear just the lap strap,

and never sit on the lap strap whilst using just

the shoulder strap. Both of these actions are

extremely dangerous and may increase your

risk of serious injury in the event of an accident

or during emergency braking.

Never place anything between you

and the seat belt in an attempt to

cushion the impact in the event of an

accident. It can be dangerous and will reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt in preventing

injury.

E82643

E93298

Seat belts

SEAT BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT

1. Press to release the catch.

2. With the catch depressed move the

mechanism slide up or down to the

required height. Ensure that the locking

mechanism has engaged.

When correctly positioned the seat belt should

cross the collar bone at the mid-point between

the neck and end of your shoulder.

Where possible, rear seat passengers should

adjust their seating position to achieve the

same seat belt position.

WARNING

Correct seat belt adjustment is

essential for safety and comfort.

Ensure that the height is correctly

adjusted and the mechanism is locked in place

before driving the vehicle. Do not attempt to

adjust the seat belt height once the vehicle is

in motion. Doing so may cause you to loose

control of the vehicle, or incorrectly adjust the

seat belt.

E82904

Supplementary restraints system

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Introduction

In the event of a collision, the airbag control

unit monitors the rate of deceleration caused

by the collision. This information is then used

to determine whether airbags should be

deployed.

Airbag deployment is dependent on the rate at

which the passenger compartment changes

velocity following the collision. The

circumstances affecting different collisions

(vehicle speed, angle of impact, type and size

of object hit, etc.), vary considerably and will

affect the rate of deceleration accordingly.

The Supplementary Restraint System (SRS)

components include:-

•SRS warning indicator.

•Rotary coupler.

•Airbag modules.

•Seat belt pre-tensioners (front seat belts).

•Restraints control module.

•Crash sensors.

•Airbag wiring harnesses.

The SRS is not designed to operate as a result

of:

•Rear impacts.

•Minor front impacts.

•Minor side impacts.

•Heavy braking.

•Driving over bumps and pot holes.

Therefore, it follows that considerable

superficial damage to the vehicle can occur,

without causing the airbags to deploy.

Supplementary restraints system

Airbags

1. Driver's airbag.

2. Front passenger airbag.

3. Seat mounted side airbags.

4. Curtain airbags.

E94099

3 4

WARNINGS

High speed impacts may cause

serious injury or death irrespective of

safety features fitted to a vehicle.

Always drive with caution and consideration

for the vehicle's characteristics, road and

weather conditions.

The airbag cannot provide protection

in some types of impact, therefore

seat belts should be worn at all times

by the driver and passengers in all seating

positions.

WARNINGS

Airbags inflate at high speeds, and

can cause injuries. To minimise the

risk of injury, ensure that all vehicle

occupants wear correctly positioned seat

belts, sit correctly in the seats, and position

the seats as far back as practical.

Sitting centrally and correctly in each

seating position helps ensure that a

gap is maintained between the side of

the vehicle and the head and torso. This will

aid inflation of the curtain and seat-mounted

airbags.

Airbag inflation takes place

instantaneously. Not all airbags are

designed to protect against the

effects of secondary impacts. During

secondary impact, a level of protection may be

provided by a correctly worn seat belt.

Supplementary restraints system

Note: The general location of airbags fitted to

the vehicle are marked by the word AIRBAG.

Always contact your Dealer/Authorised

repairer if:-

•An airbag inflates.

•The front or sides of the vehicle are

damaged.

•Any part of the SRS shows signs of

cracking or damage, including trim

covering airbags.

Airbag operation

Airbags cannot deploy correctly if they are

obstructed. Examples of obstructions are:-

•Any part of an occupants body in contact

with, or close to, an airbag covering.

•Objects placed on, or close to, an airbag

cover.

•Clothing, sun screens, or other material

hanging from grab handles.

•Clothing, cushions, or other material,

covering seat mounted airbags.

•Seat covers which are not approved by

Jaguar, or specifically designed for use

with seat mounted airbags.

•Luggage that intrudes into the area that

will be occupied by a deploying airbag

system.

This list is not exhaustive and it remains the

responsibility of the driver and passengers to

ensure that the airbags are not obstructed in

any way.

Deployment and deflation

In the event of a collision, the restraints control

system monitors the rate and direction of

deceleration. If required to supplement the seat

belts, airbags will be deployed as appropriate.

After operation, frontal airbags do not retain

pressure.

Front airbags

The front passenger’s and driver’s airbags are

able to deploy in two stages, depending on the

severity of the frontal impact. In a severe

impact, the airbags inflate fully to offer

maximum protection. In a lower severity

impact, less inflation may be required, so the

airbags inflate in a different manner.

WARNINGS

Phone systems should only be

installed by qualified persons familiar

with the operation of, and

requirements for, vehicles fitted with SRS. If

you are in any doubt, seek advice from your

Jaguar Dealer/Authorised repairer.

WARNINGS

For the airbags to operate correctly

the roof lining and door post trims

must be in good condition, correctly

fitted, and free from obstruction. Any damage,

wear, or incorrect fitment should be referred to

your Dealer/Authorised repairer as soon as

possible for examination and repair.

Do not allow passengers to obstruct

the operation of the airbags by

placing any part of their person, or

any objects, in contact with, or close to, an

airbag module. Airbags deploy at very high

speeds and can cause serious injury or death

if objects or occupants are within the area of

deployment.

Supplementary restraints system

Side and curtain airbags

To ensure that the side and curtain airbags are

fully effective:

Side and curtain airbags are designed to offer

increased protection for the torso and head in

a side impact. The curtain airbags may deflate

at a slower rate than the front or side airbags,

to afford prolonged protection.

Airbag deployment effects

WARNINGS

Do not allow passengers to obstruct

the operation of the airbags by

placing any part of their person, or

any objects, in contact with, or close to, an

airbag module. Airbags deploy at very high

speeds and can cause serious injury or death

if objects or occupants are within the area of

deployment.

Do not sit too close to, lean or

sleep against the door trim. The

side and curtain airbags could

injure you as they deploy.

Do not lean out of the window.

Only use approved accessories (e.g.

seat covers).

Due to the function of the curtain

airbag deployment, consult your

Jaguar Dealer/Authorised Repairer,

prior to installing any accessories in the upper

environment/pillar trim area (e.g. hands-free

telephone kits).

WARNINGS

When an airbag inflates, a by-product

of the gas generation may be released

as small particles. It is possible that

this may cause irritation and should be

thoroughly flushed from the eyes and any cuts

or abrasions.

After inflation, some airbag

components are at high

temperatures. To prevent injury, do

no touch the airbag components until they

have cooled.

In order to react with sufficient speed,

airbags are deployed by a pyrotechnic

device. Consequently, airbag

deployment is accompanied by a very loud

noise which may cause discomfort and

temporary loss of hearing.

Supplementary restraints system

AIRBAG WARNING LAMP

The airbag warning indicator is

mounted in the instrument pack,

and will illuminate as a bulb check

when the starter switch is turned on.

If any of the following warning indicator

conditions occur, the vehicle should be

checked by your Dealer/Authorised repairer

immediately.

•The warning indicator fails to illuminate

when the starter switch is initially turned

on.

•The warning indicator fails to extinguish

within six seconds of the starter switch

being turned on.

•The warning indicator illuminates at any

time other than the bulb check, when the

starter switch is on.

WHIPLASH PROTECTION

Both front seats are equipped with Active Head

Restraints (AHR), which reduce the risk of neck

and spinal injury (whiplash) in the event of a

rear impact.

When activated, the head restraint moves

upwards and forwards, supporting the

occupant's head.

After activation, the whiplash protection

mechanism automatically resets and does not

need to be replaced.

WARNING

If the warning indicator signals that a

fault is present in the system, do not

use a child restraint on the front

passenger seat. Doing so will increase the risk

of death or serious injury to the child.

E93243

Supplementary restraints system

AIRBAG LABELS

Airbag warning information is printed on the

driver and passenger sun visors.

AIRBAG SERVICE INFORMATION

All of the following operations should only be

carried out by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or

suitably qualified person:-

•Removal or repair of any wiring or

component in the vicinity of any SRS

components.

•Installation of electrical, or electronic,

equipment and accessories.

•Modification to the front or sides of the

vehicle exterior.

•Attachment of accessories to the front or

sides of the vehicle.

In the event of the vehicle being dismantled,

airbag module removal and disposal must be

carried out by a qualified person.

E94101

WARNINGS

Do not attempt to service, repair,

replace, modify, or tamper with, any

part of the SRS. This includes wiring

or components in the vicinity of SRS

components. Doing so may cause the system

to trigger, or render the system inoperative,

either of which may result in death or serious

injuries.

Do not use any electrical test

equipment or devices in the vicinity of

SRS components or wiring. Doing so

may cause the system to trigger, or render the

system inoperative, either of which may result

in death or serious injuries.

Child safety

CHILD SEATS

The seat belts fitted to your vehicle are

designed for adults and larger children. For

their safety, it is very important for all infants

and children under 12 years of age to be

restrained in a suitable child safety seat

appropriate to their age and size.

Children are always safest when seated in a

rear seating position.

If it is essential that a child travels in the front

passenger seat, Jaguar recommends that the

following preparations are made before fitting

the child restraint.

•Adjust the front passenger seat fully

rearwards.

•Adjust the lumbar support to its minimum

support position.

•Adjust the seat cushion to its highest

position. If cushion front tilt adjustment is

possible, adjust it to its lowest position.

•Adjust the seat back to the fully upright

position.

•Adjust the seat belt adjustable upper

anchorage to its lowest position.

In some countries, legislation prohibits

children travelling in the front of a vehicle.

Ensure that you are familiar with the legislation

in force where the vehicle is being used and are

in full compliance.

WARNINGS

Do not use a child restraint on a seat

protected by an airbag in front of it.

There is a risk of death or serious

injury when the airbag deploys.

Crash statistics show that children

are safest when properly restrained in

a child or infant restraint system that

is secured in a rear seating position.

For optimum safety, children should

travel in the rear of the vehicle at all

times; front passenger seat travel is

not recommended. However, if it is

essential that a child travels in the front, set the

vehicle seat fully rearward and seat the child in

an approved forward-facing child seat. Do not

use a rear-facing child seat - an inflating airbag

could impact with the seat and cause serious

injury.

Do not use a forward facing child seat

until the child using it is above the

minimum weight of 9 kg (20 lb.) and

able to sit up unaided. Up to the age of two, a

child's spine and neck are not sufficiently

developed to avoid injury in a frontal impact.

Do not allow a baby or infant to be

held or carried on the lap. The force of

a crash can increase effective body

weight by as much as thirty times, making it

impossible to hold onto the child.

Children typically require the use of a

booster seat appropriate to their age

and size, thereby enabling the seat

belts to be properly fitted, reducing the risk of

injury in a crash. Children could be

endangered in a crash if their child restraints

are not properly secured in the vehicle.

Do not use a child seat that hooks

over the seat back. This type of seat

cannot be satisfactorily secured and

is unlikely to be safe for your child.

WARNINGS

Child safety

This symbol is affixed to the end of the fascia

on the passenger side. Its purpose is to warn

against the use of a rear facing child seat in the

front passenger seat, when the front passenger

airbag is fitted.

Child restraint check list

Every time a child travels in the vehicle observe

the following:-

•Use appropriate child restraints.

•Carefully follow the restraint system

manufacturers instructions.

•Adjust the harnesses for every child on

every trip.

•Ensure that all slack is removed from the

adult seat belt.

•Always attach the top tether when

installing an ISOFIX seat. See CHILD SEAT

ANCHOR POINTS (page 62).

•Always check the security of the child

restraint.

•Do not dress a child in bulky clothing, or

place any objects/padding between the

child and the restraint.

•Regularly check the fit and condition of

child restraints. If the fit is poor, or

wear/damage is visible replace the

restraint immediately.

•Set a good example - always wear your

seat belt.

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

For optimum safety, children should travel in

the rear of the vehicle at all times; front

passenger seat travel is not recommended.

However, if it is essential that a child travels in

the front, set the vehicle seat fully rearward and

seat the child in an approved forward-facing

child seat. Do not use a rear-facing child seat -

an inflating airbag could impact with the seat

and cause serious injury.

Note: The information contained in the

following table may not be applicable to all

countries. If you are in any doubt regarding the

type and fitment of child seats seek advice from

your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Note: The legislation which governs how and

where children should be carried when

travelling in a vehicle, is subject to change. It is

the responsibility of the driver to comply with

all regulations in force.

WARNING

Original text according to ECE R94.

01. Extreme hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on a

seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

E79258

CAUTION

Information given within the table is

correct at the time of going to press.

However, availability of child restraints may

change. Please consult your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer for the latest

recommendation.

Child safety

Child safety seating and positions

•U = Suitable for universal category

restraints approved for this mass group.

•UF = Suitable for forward facing Universal

category restraints approved for this mass

group.

•X = Not suitable for child restraint fitment

in this mass group.

* Jaguar recommend that the front passenger

seat be positioned fully rearward, with the

cushion adjusted to the highest position when

installing child restraints.

Note: Ages given are approximate. In case of

doubt, the child’s weight, not age, should be

used when considering an appropriate child

seat.

BOOSTER CUSHIONS

In a situation where a child is too large to fit

into a child safety seat, but is still too small to

safely fit the three point belt properly, a booster

seat is recommended for maximum safety.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions for

fitting and use, then adjust the seat belt to suit.

Seating positions Front passenger* Rear outboard Rear centre

Mass group

0 = Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)

0 to 9 months

XU U

0+ = Up to 13 kg (29 lb.)

0 to 18 months

XU U

I = 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb.)

9 months to 4 years

UF U U

II = 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb.)

4 to 9 years

UU U

III = 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.)

8 to 12 years

UU U

Child safety

CHILD SEAT ANCHOR POINTS

ISOFIX anchor points (not Australia)

Both of the outer rear seat positions are

equipped to accept ISOFIX restraints.

This symbol is shown on a label

sewn into the seats to indicate the

position of the ISOFIX lower

anchorages.

Note: The information contained in the

following table may not be applicable to all

countries. If you are in any doubt regarding the

type and fitment of child seats seek advice from

your Jaguar Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

WARNINGS

Do not attempt to fit ISOFIX restraints

to the centre rear seating position.

The anchor bars are not designed to

hold an ISOFIX restraint in this position.

If the restraint is not correctly

anchored, there is a significant risk of

injury to the child in the event of a

collision or emergency braking.

Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only loads

imposed by correctly fitted child

restraints. Under no circumstances are they to

be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for

attaching other items or equipment to the

vehicle.

If removing a head restraint in order

to fit a child restraint, always secure

the head restraint when storing it. If

left loose in the vehicle, it may cause death or

serious injury during sudden braking or an

impact.

E94103

Child safety

ISOFIX child seats

•IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child

restraint systems of universal category

approved for use in the mass group.

•IL = These ISOFIX child restraint systems

are of the specific vehicle, restricted or

semi-universal categories.

•* = Child seats suitable for use in these

locations are Britax Cosy-Tot Premium

Infant carrier and Britax Duo Plus child

seat.

Note: Ages given are approximate. In case of

doubt, the child’s weight, not age, should be

used when considering an appropriate child

seat.

Installing an ISOFIX child seat

To install an ISOFIX child seat:-

1. Raise or remove the head restraint from

the relevant seat.

2. Lift the velcro flap to expose the ISOFIX

locking mechanism.

3. Slide the child seat into the locking

mechanism.

4. Test the security of the child restraint. To

do this attempt to pull the restraint away

from the vehicle seat and twist the restraint

from side to side. Even if the restraint

appears secure you should still check the

anchor points visually to ensure correct

attachment.

Note: Always ensure that if an upper tether is

provided, it is fitted and tightened correctly.

Mass group Size classes Fixtures Rear outboard seats

Carrycot F/G ISO L1/L2 X

0 = Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)

0 to 9 months

EISO R1 IL*

0+ = Up to 13 kg (29 lb.)

0 to 18 months

C/D/E ISO R1/R2/R3 IL*

I = 9 to 18 kg (20 to 40 lb.)

9 months to 4 years

C/D

A/B1/B

ISO R2/R3

ISO F2/F2X/F3

IUF

II = 15 to 25 kg (33 to 55 lb.)

4 to 9 years

-N/AN/A

III = 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.)

8 to 12 years

-N/AN/A

E94104

Child safety

Tether anchorage points (Australia only)

Note: A tether anchorage is provided for the

centre seat position. Do not use this anchor

position with an ISOFIX child seat.

Attaching tether straps

1. Install the child restraint securely in one of

the rear seating positions.

2. Pass the tether strap over the seat back

and beneath the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook to the tether

anchor point on the back of the seat.

Ensure that the tether strap hook is facing

the correct way. See illustration.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses

or for attaching other items or equipment to

the vehicle.

If a child seat or restraint system is to

be fitted to the centre seating

position, the centre armrest must be

in the stowed position (folded into the seat).

E94105

Child safety

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

Child safety locks are fitted to the rear doors to

allow you to prevent accidental opening of the

doors when the vehicle is in motion.

If children are to be carried in the rear seat

positions, it is recommended that the rear door

interior handles are disabled.

Note: For convenience, the rear door interior

handles should be re-enabled when carrying

adult passengers in the rear seat positions.

To change the child lock settings:-

1. Open the door to access the child safety

lock.

2. Insert the emergency key into the slot and

rotate a quarter of a turn, to enable or

disable the interior door handle, as

required.

E94106

Pedestrian protection

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The pedestrian protection system has been

designed to reduce lower leg and head injuries

in the event of a frontal collision with a

pedestrian.

The bumper includes energy absorbing foam

and plastics in its construction to reduce leg

injuries and sensors that detect the collision

with a pedestrian.

Deployment

During a pedestrian collision, the sensors

initiate a bonnet deployment system that

releases the bonnet hinge system and raises

the rear edge of the bonnet by approximately

130 mm (5.1 inches).

This increases the gap between the bonnet and

the components within the engine

compartment e.g. engine, suspension etc. This

increased gap creates a cushion to mitigate

injury caused to the pedestrian.

The bonnet deployment system is active only

when the ignition is on and the vehicle is driven

between the speeds of approximately 20 km/h

(12 mph) and 45 km/h (28 mph).

AFTER DEPLOYMENT OF THE

PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEM

The vehicle must be stopped as soon as it is

safe to do so.

The hazard warning lamps will be activated and

can only be switched off by pressing the engine

START/STOP button to turn the engine off and

on again.

A warning message CHECK PEDESTRIAN

SYSTEM will appear on the message centre

and the vehicle should be transported to the

nearest Dealer/Authorised Repairer. The

vehicle must not be driven when the bonnet

has been deployed. See Vehicle recovery

(page 253).

Note: If the warning message CHECK

PEDESTRIAN SYSTEM appears in the message

centre when the bonnet has not been deployed,

the vehicle should be taken to the nearest

Dealer/Authorised Repairer immediately. It can

be driven.

If any significant damage occurs to the front

bumper it should be inspected by a

Dealer/Authorised Repairer as soon as

possible.

E94698

CAUTION

Do not attempt to open the bonnet if the

pedestrian protection system has been

deployed.

Steering wheel

ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL

The steering wheel can be adjusted for tilt and

reach, as follows:

1. Turn the switch to the COLUMN or AUTO

position.

2. Move the switch forwards or rearwards to

adjust reach.

3. Move the switch up or down to adjust tilt.

Two steering wheel positions can be stored

and recalled by the driver position memory

system.

The message centre will indicate which switch

position has been selected by displaying the

message COLUMN ADJUST or COLUMN

ADJUST AUTO.

Entry and exit mode

Entry and exit mode provides automatic

movement of the steering column, to allow

easier entry to, or exit from, the vehicle.

Entry and exit mode is selected by setting the

steering column adjustment switch to the

AUTO position.

Exit: If the driver's door is opened, the steering

column will move to the uppermost tilt

position, unless already in that position.

Entry: When the door is closed and the ignition

is switched on, the steering column will return

to its previous position.

Note: If the steering column switch is moved

away from AUTO when the steering column is

in the Exit position, the steering column will

move back to its previous (driving) position,

when the driver's door is closed and the

ignition is switched on.

If the steering column position is manually

adjusted during Entry or Exit operation,

steering column movement will stop.

WARNING

Never adjust the steering wheel

position whilst the vehicle is in

motion. Doing so will reduce control

of the vehicle and may cause unpredictable

steering movements.

CAUTION

Do not use steering wheel mounted

security devices, as movement of the

steering wheel in entry and exit mode, could

result in damage to the vehicle or possible

injury to the occupant.

E91122

Steering wheel

HORN

The dual tone horn is operated by pressing the

centre pad on the steering wheel.

The horn also operates as the alarm sounder, if

the vehicle alarm system is activated.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL

The heated steering wheel is activated via the

touch-screen main Home menu.

With the engine running, touch the steering

wheel icon to turn the heating on. The icon will

glow red when the steering wheel heater is on.

The heated steering wheel can also be activated

via the Climate menu on the touch-screen. With

the engine running, touch the steering wheel

icon to turn the heating on or off.

E91123

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12:26 pm

External

Left

20 17

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

JAG1514

Settings

Te m p . sync.

External

Auto

C 5 C

Auto

A/C

OFF

Climate

12 : 26 pm

Auto

E94700

Steering wheel

AUDIO CONTROL

1. Rotate (up or down) to increase or

decrease volume.

2. Rotate (up or down) and release, to scroll

up or down through preset radio stations

or CD tracks.

Rotate and hold (for two seconds) to select

the next or previous radio station on the

waveband, or to select the next or previous

loaded CD (on multi-disc CD players).

3. Press repeatedly to scroll through the

audio source options, comprising: FM1,

FM2, AM, CD, DAB radio, Auxiliary input,

Portable Audio Interface and TV options.

Press and hold (for two seconds) to select

Phonebook view (when a phone is

connected to the system).

4. Press to mute the audio unit.

Press to dial, answer or end a phone call.

VOICE CONTROL

JaguarVoice control provides a safe and

convenient way of operating certain vehicle

systems, without the need to operate the

controls manually.

Voice commands are available for the phone,

navigation and touch-screen display systems,

and a notepad facility is provided, to allow

voice notes to be recorded. Help and tutorial

functions provide advice on operating the

system. Information on JaguarVoice operation

of the telephone and navigation systems is

detailed later in this handbook.

See TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL (page 323).

See USING VOICE CONTROL (page 373).

The system is controlled using the voice button

on the steering wheel (arrowed). Voice

commands are picked up by a dedicated

microphone and audible feedback will be heard

through the audio system speakers.

1 2

4 3

E91129

E95902

Steering wheel

Activating the system

To activate voice control, press the voice

button on the steering wheel. A tone will be

heard and LISTENING will be displayed in the

message centre, to indicate that the system is

now waiting for a voice command.

Note: It is only necessary to press the voice

button at the beginning of each voice session.

Language and accent

Voice feedback is given in the same language

as is set for Voice recognition. For example, if

the Voice recognition language is set to UK

English, the system will not recognise other

languages (e.g. US English). The language for

the system can be changed using the

touch-screen as follows:

1. From the Home menu, select Comms.

2. From the Comms menu, select Voice and

then select Settings.

3. Select Change, then select the desired

language from the options available.

Note: Changing the Voice recognition language

will not affect the language settings for the

touch-screen.

Giving a command

Note: If background noise is excessive (e.g.

driving with windows open), the voice system

may not recognise a given voice command.

Press and release the Voice button on the

steering wheel and, after the tone, say one of

the commands listed later in this section, or

one of the commands given in either the

Telephone voice section or the Navigation

voice section, as appropriate. See TELEPHONE

VOICE CONTROL (page 323). See USING

VOICE CONTROL (page 373).

Note: Always wait until the tone finishes

sounding before giving a voice command.

Give commands while facing forwards, in a

natural speaking voice as if talking to a

passenger or on the phone. Most accents are

understood without difficulty, but if the system

does not recognise the command, the system

will respond with SORRY and allow two more

attempts to say the command.

The system will repeat the command (as

understood by the system) back to you as

confirmation. The command will then be acted

on or the system will ask for further

information - always wait until after the tone

has sounded before speaking.

Once you are familiar with system requests, it

is possible to skip to the end of the request (to

when the tone sounds) to give your response.

To achieve this, briefly press and release the

voice button on the steering wheel during the

system request.

Note: If the Voice button on the steering wheel

is pressed before the system is ready to receive

a command, VOICE NOT READY will be

displayed in the message centre.

Voice

12 : 26 pm

Add phone nametags

Command list

Operating guide

Settings

E96024

Voice

12 : 26 pm

Feedback Volume

Voice language

English UK Change

Steering wheel

Cancelling voice control

To cancel a voice command, press and hold the

Voice button on the steering wheel until a

double tone is heard.

Note: If a phone call is received during a voice

session, voice control is cancelled.

Voice system tutorial

To listen to a tutorial on how to use

JaguarVoice, press and release the voice

button and, after the tone, say VOICE

TUTORIAL.

The tutorial is divided into four lessons and has

a total duration of approximately four minutes.

The tutorial can only be undertaken with the

vehicle stationary and parked.

The tutorial can also be accessed via the

touch-screen.

1. Select Comms from the Home menu.

2. From the Comms menu, select Voice.

3. From the Voice menu, select Operating

guide and then select Tutorial.

To cancel the tutorial, press and release the

Voice button and say CANCEL. To skip to the

previous or next lesson of the tutorial, press

and release the Voice button and say

PREVIOUS or NEXT.

Command help

For a list of the most commonly used voice

commands, press and release the Voice button

and, after the tone, say the appropriate

command from the following list:

•VOICE HELP

•NAVIGATION HELP

•PHONE HELP

•DISPLAY HELP

•NOTEPAD HELP

Voice

12 : 26 pm

Add phone nametags

Comm

Operating guide

Settings

E96025

Voice

12 : 26 pm

To give a voice command briefly press

the voice button and speak normally

after the tone

Tutorial will help you start to use your

voice control system

Tutorial

Steering wheel

Full command list

A full list of voice commands available can be

accessed on the touch-screen.

1. Select Comms from the Home menu.

2. From the Comms menu, select Voice.

3. From the Voice menu select Command

list.

4. Select Navigation or Display to view the

relevant command list or select Comms to

view the options available.

If Comms was selected, you can now choose

which system’s command list you wish to view

(Voice, Notepad or Phone)

1. Select the appropriate system (Phone in

this example).

2. Scroll down to view the entire command

list for the chosen system.

Nametags

Nametags allow the voice system to be

personalised with the addition of names for

phone numbers and navigation locations,

destinations and waypoints. A nametag can be

any unique name chosen by the user.

Details for storing and using nametags in

conjunction with the telephone and Navigation

systems, are given later in this handbook.

See TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL (page 323).

See USING VOICE CONTROL (page 373).

A spoken list of currently stored nametags can

be heard by pressing and releasing the Voice

button and saying PHONE PLAY DIRECTORY

or NAVIGATION PLAY DIRECTORY, as

appropriate.

Voice

12 : 26 pm

Add ph tags

Command list

Operating guide

Settings

E96026

Voice

12 : 26 pm

Select a system for the list of

voice commands

Comms

Navigation

Display

Voice

Phone help

Phone reject calls

Phone accept calls

Phone redial

Phone dial number

JAG0899

Voice

12 : 26 pm

Select a system for the list of

voice commands

Voice

Notepad

Phone

Steering wheel

Notepad

The notepad facility enables the user to record

a note, up to a maximum of 30 seconds

duration, which can be subsequently recalled.

Note: To hear information on notepad

commands, press the Voice button, wait for the

tone to sound and then say NOTEPAD HELP.

Recording a note

1. Press and release the Voice button, wait

for the tone to sound, then say RECORD

NOTE.

2. Say the words of the note to be recorded,

then press and hold the Voice button to

end and save the note.

Note: The maximum length of a note is 30

seconds, after which time the recording of the

note will be ended automatically.

Playing a note

Press and release the Voice button, wait for the

tone to sound, then say PLAY NOTEPAD. If

multiple notes are stored on the system, press

and release the Voice button during playback

and say NEXT, to skip to the next note.

Deleting notes

To delete an individual note, press and release

the Voice button during playback of the note to

be deleted and say DELETE.

To delete all notes stored on the system, press

and release the Voice button and say CLEAR

NOTEPAD.

Voice volume adjustment

The volume level for voice recognition can be

adjusted independently, either by using the

steering wheel controls or using the

touch-screen:

•Press the voice button on the steering

wheel, to initiate a voice session. Use the

volume control thumbwheel on the

steering wheel to adjust the volume, as

required.

•Select Vehicle from the touch-screen

Home menu, then select Veh. settings.

Find the correct entry from the menu of

infotainment volume settings and adjust as

required.

Voice commands

This is a list and a description of the basic

Voice commands used to operate the system.

A list and description of telephone and

Navigation system commands, is detailed later

in this handbook. See TELEPHONE VOICE

CONTROL (page 323). See NAVIGATION

SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS (page 374).

Command Description

VOICE HELP Plays information on

operating the Voice

system.

VOICE TUTORIAL Initiates a four-part

tutorial on use of the

Voice system.

DISPLAY HELP Plays information on

touch-screen display

voice commands.

DISPLAY SHOW

PHONE

The Phone menu is

displayed on the

touch-screen.

Steering wheel

CRUISE CONTROL

1. SET - Rotate and release to engage cruise

control (at the vehicle's current speed).

With cruise control operating, rotate up or

down to increase or decrease the speed in

2 km/h (1 mph) steps.

2. CANCEL - Press to cancel cruise control.

The previously programmed set speed will

be retained and can be reselected by

pressing RESUME.

3. RESUME - Press to resume the previously

programmed set speed (e.g. after cruise

control has been cancelled).

4. GAP (ACC only) - Rotate up or down to

increase or decrease the time gap to the

vehicle ahead. The gap can be set to one of

four pre-defined intervals. The current

setting will be displayed in the message

centre.

For more information about cruise control:

See USING CRUISE CONTROL (page 156).

For more information about adaptive cruise

control (ACC): See USING ACC (page 159).

DISPLAY SHOW

NAVIGATION

The Navigation main

menu is displayed on the

touch-screen (the

navigation caution must

be accepted before the

menu is displayed).

DISPLAY ON Turns the touch-screen

on.

DISPLAY OFF Turns the touch-screen

off.

NOTEPAD HELP Plays information on

notepad commands.

RECORD NOTE Allows recording of a

note, up to 30 seconds

long.

PLAY NOTEPAD Plays all currently stored

notes.

CLEAR NOTEPAD Deletes all notes currently

stored in notepad.

Command Description

E97079 2

Lighting

LIGHTING CONTROL

Note: If the ignition system is switched off and

the lamps are left on, the message centre will

display LIGHTS ON.

The exterior lamps are controlled by the

left-hand column stalk switch.

The rotary collar on the stalk has three

positions for turning the exterior lamps on or

off and positions for autolamps and exit delay.

Off

All exterior lamps off (except vehicles provided

with daylight running lamps).

Side lamps

Switches on the side lamps, tail, number plate

and any other marker lamps required by local

legislation. The instrument panel will also be lit.

Headlamps

Select this position to switch on the

headlamps.

Headlamp flash: Pull the switch towards the

steering wheel and release to flash the high

beam on and off. The high beam will remain on

for as long as the switch is held.

High beam: With the headlamps on, push the

switch away from the steering wheel to switch

to high beam.

The blue warning indicator on the instrument

panel will illuminate.

To turn high beam off and return to low beam,

pull the column switch towards the steering

wheel.

Note: If the rotary control switch is moved to

the OFF position, with high beam still activated,

both low and high beam will be extinguished.

Both low and high beam will illuminate when

the headlamps are turned on again.

E91137

E91138

E91139

E91140

E91141

Lighting

Daylight running lamps

In certain countries it is a legal requirement for

the lamps to be on during the hours of daylight.

With the rotary collar in the OFF position, low

beam headlamps, side lamps, tail, number

plate lamps and, where fitted, side marker

lamps will switch on automatically with the

following conditions:

•The ignition is on (market dependent).

•The vehicle gear selector out of park.

•The park brake is not applied (is released).

Condensation

In certain circumstances, misting may occur

on the inside of a lamp lens. This is caused by

natural changes in environmental conditions.

This misting is not detrimental to lamp

performance and will clear during normal

usage.

AUTOLAMPS

A light sensor, mounted on the front of the

fascia, monitors exterior light levels and

automatically switches the side lamps and low

beam headlamps on or off.

The ignition system must be on for full

automatic light operation.

When light fades towards dusk, the side lamps

and headlamps will switch on automatically.

At dawn, as light increases, the side lamps and

headlamps switch off automatically.

Do not cover the sensor and keep the

windscreen clean. Obstructing the light in this

area of the sensor may lead to unwanted

operation of the side lamps and headlamps.

Note: Low exterior light levels, caused by

adverse weather conditions, may also cause

the autolamp system to switch on the side and

headlamps.

Windscreen wiper detection

This function only operates when autolamps is

selected. The side lamps and headlamps will

switch on automatically if the windscreen

wipers are switched on for 20 seconds or

more. Once the windscreen wipers are

switched off, the side lamps and headlamps

will automatically switch off two minutes later.

E91142

Lighting

Exit delay

Three settings on the rotary collar set the time

that the headlamps will remain on after the

driver’s door has closed:

1. 30 seconds.

2. 60 seconds.

3. 120 seconds.

The message centre displays the selected delay

time (e.g. AUTOLAMP DELAY 0:60) or displays

AUTOLAMP DELAY OFF when the autolamp

delay function has been turned off.

Note: If the lamp switch rotary collar is in the

AUTO position there will be no exit delay and

the headlamps will extinguish when the ignition

system is turned off.

REAR FOG LAMPS

Rear fog lamps will only operate when

headlamp dipped beam or Auto lamps are

selected. Press the rear fog lamp button to

switch on, press again to switch off.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

Press the switch to turn the hazard warning

lamps on. When the hazard warning lamps are

operating, the indicator warning lamps will

flash in time with the hazard warning lamps.

Press again to turn the lamps off.

Use only in an emergency, to warn traffic of a

vehicle breakdown or approaching danger.

Note: Hazard warning lamps can be used when

the ignition is on or off.

JAG0924

JAG1332

E94710

Lighting

DIRECTION INDICATORS

The direction indicators are operated using the

indicator stalk. Move the stalk up or down, to

indicate a right or left turn. A green warning

indicator will flash in the instrument panel.

The indicators will operate three times (e.g. to

indicate a lane change) if the stalk is briefly

pushed up or down. Lane change flash can be

disabled or enabled by a Dealer/Authorised

Repairer.

Note: Should a direction indicator bulb fail, the

corresponding green warning indicator will

flash at twice the normal rate and the audible

ticking will sound at twice the normal rate.

HEADLAMPS - DRIVING ABROAD

Note: The headlamps must be removed in

order to change the beam pattern.

See REMOVING A HEADLAMP (page 81).

The tourist lever allows you to adjust the

headlamps to the correct beam pattern for

driving in countries where vehicles drive on the

left, or the right.

When new, the lever will be set to the correct

position for the country in which the vehicle is

sold. To change the pattern for driving on the

other side of the road, move the lever to the

opposite position.

Note: When changing the beam pattern using

the lever, ensure that you change the lever

position on both headlamps.

E91163

E94707

Lighting

HEADLAMP LEVELLING

Halogen headlamps

Use the headlamp levelling control to account

for vehicle loading changes.

Xenon headlamps

Headlamp levelling is adjusted automatically if

Xenon headlamps are fitted, to account for

vehicle load conditions, to avoid dazzling

oncoming drivers.

CORNERING OR STATIC BENDING

LAMPS

Cornering or static bending lamps are angled

outwards from the centre line of the vehicle.

These lamps broaden the beam of the

headlamps when cornering during normal

night driving.

1. Light spread of a vehicle not fitted with

static bending lamps.

2. Light spread of a vehicle fitted with static

bending lamps

The system switches on the lamp if it has

received an input from the vehicle's direction

indicator. Only the lamp on the same side as

the operating direction indicator illuminates.

The system only operates with the ignition

switched on.

Vehicle load Switch position

Driver only 0

Driver and front seat

passenger

Driver and passengers in

all seats

Maximum gross vehicle

weight

Maximum rear axle load 2 or 3

JAG1334

JAG0923

Lighting

INTERIOR LAMPS

1. Sun visor lamps. Switch on automatically

when the vanity mirror is opened.

2. Front map reading lamps. Move your

finger close to (or touch) the relevant

proximity switch to switch on/off.

3. Front interior courtesy lamp. Illuminates

when the doors are unlocked and

extinguish 20 seconds after all doors are

closed or when the vehicle is locked. The

lamps are operated by proximity sensors.

Move your finger close to (or touch) the

appropriate lens to switch on or off

manually. Touch the lens for 2 seconds to

deactivate/activate automatic illumination.

4. Glove box lamp. Automatically illuminates

when the glove box is opened.

5. Footwell lamps. Automatically illuminate

when the front doors are opened.

6. Rear map reading/interior lamps. Switch

on automatically when the doors are

opened. Press the appropriate switch to

activate an interior lamp manually (e.g. as

a map reading lamp). Press the

appropriate switch again to extinguish the

lamp. Touch the front courtesy lamp lens

for approximately 2 seconds to

deactivate/activate automatic illumination

of the rear interior lamps.

E94712

Lighting

Note: For lamps controlled by proximity

sensors, the wearing of gloves may interfere

with operation. If you are wearing gloves, it

may be necessary to touch the proximity

switch to operate the lamps.

Ambience lighting

Ambience lighting. Automatically illuminates

when the headlamps are on. Ambience lighting

creates a blue glow around the centre console

and front door armrests.

Luggage compartment lamp

Automatically illuminates when the luggage

compartment is opened.

APPROACH LAMPS

This feature is activated by pressing

the headlamp icon button on the

Jaguar Smart Key. See USING THE

REMOTE CONTROL (page 17). The headlamps

will remain on for 25 seconds or until the

button is pressed again, or until the engine

START/STOP button is pressed.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

1. Open the bonnet. See OPENING AND

CLOSING THE BONNET (page 195).

2. Remove the two bolts from the top of the

headlamp unit.

3. Remove the retaining bolt located in the

wheel arch.

Note: To improve access to the wheel arch,

turn the steering wheel to full lock, in the

direction of the affected headlamp.

4. Pull the headlamp away slightly from the

body of the vehicle.

CAUTION

It is recommended that the following

procedure should only be attempted by

a qualified technician. If in doubt, consult your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Do not place the removed lamp unit face

down on hard or abrasive surfaces.

Doing so may scratch the surface of the lens.

E94719

Lighting

5. Press the tab and pull to disconnect the

electrical connector.

6. Press the clip and pull to disconnect the

headlamp washer hose (if headlamp

washers are fitted).

7. Remove the headlamp unit.

REMOVING A REAR LAMP

Only the rear direction indicator and reverse

lamp bulbs can be replaced. Failure of any

other rear lamp unit should be investigated by

a qualified technician. Consult your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

Note: Access to the rear lamp units is achieved

through access hatches, located behind the

rear boot trim.

1. Remove the two retaining nuts.

2. Pull and slide the lamp unit rearwards to

remove.

CAUTION

It is recommended that the following

procedure should only be attempted by

a qualified technician. If in doubt, consult your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Do not place the removed lamp unit face

down on hard or abrasive surfaces.

Doing so may scratch the surface of the lens.

E94720

E94721

Lighting

CHANGING A BULB

General information

Note: In certain markets its a legal requirement

to carry spare bulbs. A replacement bulb kit is

available as an approved accessory from your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Halogen bulbs

Halogen bulbs are used for main beam and

dipped beam headlamps. Take care not to

touch the glass part of the bulb with your

fingers; always use a cloth to handle the bulb.

If necessary use methylated spirits to remove

finger prints.

Xenon lamps

Seek advice about the correct

disposal of Xenon lamp units from

your Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or

your local authority.

HEADLAMP UNIT BULBS

Halogen dipped beam

With the headlamp unit removed:-

1. Rotate the cover counter-clockwise to

remove.

2. Twist the bulb holder counter-clockwise

and withdraw it from the headlamp unit.

3. Pull the bulb from the holder to remove.

Note: When fitting the replacement bulb,

ensure the orientation of the tab (arrowed) is as

shown.

CAUTION

Always replace bulbs with the correct

type and specification. If you are in any

doubt contact your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer for advice.

WARNINGS

Replacement or maintenance of

Xenon lamps should only be carried

out by suitably qualified personnel.

High voltage is required to ignite the

gas and metal vapour which are used

to power Xenon lamps. Contact with

this voltage can cause serious injuries.

Xenon lamp units operate at a very

high temperature. Ensure that the

lamp units have cooled before

attempting to touch them.

Xenon lamp units contain Mercury

which is highly toxic and can be

extremely harmful.

E94732

Lighting

Halogen dipped and main beam

With the headlamp unit removed:-

1. Rotate the relevant cover

counter-clockwise to remove.

2. Twist the bulb holder counter-clockwise

and withdraw it from the headlamp unit.

3. Pull the bulb from the holder to remove.

Note: When fitting the replacement bulb,

ensure the orientation of the tab (arrowed) is as

shown.

Direction indicator bulbs

With the headlamp unit removed:-

1. Twist the indicator bulb holder

counter-clockwise, and remove it from the

lamp unit.

2. Press the bulb into the holder, then twist it

to remove.

E94733

E94734

Lighting

Side lamp bulbs

1. Rotate the cover counter-clockwise and

remove.

2. Pull the bulb holder tab to remove from the

lamp unit.

3. Pull the bulb to remove.

When replacing, push the bulb holder into its

socket in the lamp unit until it clicks in place.

SIDE REPEATER LAMP

REAR LAMP BULBS

Rear direction indicator and reverse

lamp bulbs

With the rear lamp unit removed:-

1. Squeeze the two tabs together, then pull to

remove the relevant bulb holder.

2. Press and release the tab on the electrical

connector and pull to remove the bulb unit.

E94735

CAUTION

These lamps are LED units and should

only be replaced by a Dealer/Authorised

Repairer.

E94736

Lighting

Number plate lamp bulb

1. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver as

shown, lever out the side of the lamp unit

and remove.

2. Twist the bulb holder 90° counter-

clockwise to access the bulb.

3. Pull to remove the bulb from the holder.

Other rear lamp bulbs

The following rear lamps are LED units and

should not be replaced by the owner:

•Tail lamps.

•Brake lamps.

•Rear fog lamps.

•High level brake lamp.

•Rear side marker lamps.

E94737

CAUTION

LED lamp units should only be replaced

by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Lighting

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Note: The tail lamp, stop lamp, rear fog lamps,

rear side lamps, side repeater lamps and high

mounted stop lamp, are LED units and are

non-serviceable. If any of these lamps should

fail, they should be investigated by qualified

personnel. Consult your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer.

CAUTION

Before attempting to replace a bulb,

ensure that both the affected lamp and

the vehicle's ignition are turned off. If the

circuit is live a short circuit can occur which

may damage the vehicle's electrical system.

Lamp Specification Power (Watts)

Halogen headlamp (Low and High beam) H7/H7 55/55

Xenon headlamp (Low and High beam) D1S/H7 35/55

Front side lamps W5W HCB 5

Front direction indicators PY21W 21

Rear direction indicators PY19W 19

Reverse lamps PS19W 19

Number plate lamps W5W 5

Interior overhead lamps W6WX 6

Footwell lamps W5W 5

Luggage lamp S10W 10

Tailgate lamps W5W 5

Glove box lamp W5W 5

Vanity mirror lamp 2 x TS1.3W 1.3

Wipers and washers

WINDSCREEN WIPERS

Note: If the wiper blades become stuck or

jammed, an electronic cut-out may temporarily

halt wiper operation. If this happens, switch off

the wipers and the ignition. Clear any

obstructions and free the wiper blades, before

attempting to switch on the ignition.

Wiper operation

1. Windscreen wipers off and parked.

2. Rain sensor activated wipe.

3. Low speed wipe.

4. High speed wipe.

5. Rain sensor sensitivity control.

Rain sensor variable delay

1. Maximum sensitivity.

2. Rotate control to adjust sensitivity.

3. Minimum sensitivity.

With the rain sensor activated, the sensitivity of

the rain sensor can be adjusted. Rotate the

control upwards to reduce the sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

Single wipe

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel for a

single wipe. Holding the switch in this position,

operates the wipers at normal speed until the

switch is released.

CAUTIONS

Do not operate the windscreen wipers

on a dry screen. The drag on the wiper

mechanism may cause damage.

In freezing or very hot conditions,

ensure that the wipers have not stuck to

the windscreen before operating. The drag on

the wiper mechanism may cause damage.

Remove any snow, ice or frost from the

windscreen, around the wiper arms and

blades, and the screen scuttle, before

operating the wipers. Snow and ice can cause

damage to the wiper mechanism, if left

uncleared.

JAG1620

JAG1622

JAG1621

Wipers and washers

Speed-dependent mode

If vehicle speed drops below 2 km/h (1.2 mph)

with the wipers operating, the wiper frequency

automatically reduces. The wipers will switch

to the next lowest speed. When the vehicle’s

speed increases to over 8 km/h (5 mph), the

original wiper speed settings are restored

automatically.

RAIN SENSOR

The rain sensor is able to detect the presence

and amount of rain, dirt or snow on the

windscreen and automatically activates the

windscreen wipers accordingly.

To activate the rain sensitive wipers, move the

wiper stalk to the rain sensor/intermittent delay

position and adjust the rain sensor sensitivity

control as required. See WINDSCREEN

WIPERS (page 88).

WINDSCREEN WASHERS

To operate the windscreen washers press and

release the button on the end of the wiper stalk.

The wipers will perform 5 normal speed wipes,

followed by a drip wipe (if configured). The

washers will operate during the first two wipes.

If the washers are operated with the wipers

operating at normal or fast speed, the washer

jets will operate for two wipes and operation of

the wipers will not be affected.

Note: If the button is pressed and held, the

wipers and washers will operate at normal

speed until the button is released (or for a

maximum of 10 seconds). After the button is

released, the wipers will operate for a further

three wipes, followed by a drip wipe (if

configured). If the wipers are already operating

at normal or fast speed, operating the washers

will not affect wiper operation.

CAUTION

Ensure that the wipers are switched off

before entering a car wash. If the rain

sensitive wipers operate during the car

washing process damage may occur to the

wiper mechanism.

MAX

JAG1623

WARNING

Some screenwash products are

flammable, do not allow screenwash

to come into contact with sources of

ignition.

CAUTION

Only screenwash products which are

approved for automotive use should be

used, and then only in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

JAG1624

Wipers and washers

Low screen wash

If the low washer fluid warning is on, the

windscreen wipers will not operate when the

wash/wipe is activated, even though there may

be washer fluid remaining in the reservoir

which is sprayed onto the screen. This is to

prevent damage to the wiper blades, scratching

of the glass or smearing dirt across the screen.

Normal, fast or single wipe can be selected

manually, to clear any spray from the

windscreen.

Timed jet function

If the timed jet function is configured,

the washer jets will only operate on the

up stroke of the wipers.

This function can be enabled/disabled by your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Drip wipe

If the drip wipe function is configured,

the wipers will operate four seconds

after a wash wipe cycle has finished, to

clear any remaining drips from the windscreen.

This function can be enabled/disabled by your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Blocked jets

If a washer jet becomes blocked, use a thin

strand of wire to unblock the jet by inserting

the wire into the jet. Ensure that the wire is

completely removed after unblocking.

HEADLAMP WASHERS

Headlamp power wash operates automatically

with the windscreen wash, and will only

operate if the headlamps are switched on and

there is sufficient washer fluid in the reservoir.

Headlamp wash operates with every fourth

operation of the screen washers, provided that

ten minutes have elapsed since the last

operation of the headlamp washers.

Note: The power wash sequence is reset when

the headlamps or the ignition are turned off.

Note: Headlamp power wash is inhibited when

the low washer fluid warning is on.

CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES

The wiping edge of the blades should be

checked and cleaned periodically. Check the

blade rubber and replace the blade immediately

if cracks, splits or roughness are detected, to

prevent damage to the glass.

Clean the blade edge by wiping with a soft cloth

or sponge, using warm soapy water.

If the wipers fail to clear the windscreen when

operated, check the condition of the blade and

replace if necessary.

WARNING

Do not operate the washer jets during

adjustment. Windscreen washer fluid

may cause irritation to the eyes and

skin. Always read and observe the washer fluid

manufacturers instructions.

WARNING

Only use cleaning products which

have been approved for use on

automotive glass and rubber.

Inappropriate products can cause smearing,

and increase glare.

E80573

Wipers and washers

CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES

Service position

The windscreen wiper service position allows

the wipers to be parked in a more accessible

position. This makes it easier to change wiper

blades.

Setting the service position

1. With the ignition switched off, pull the

wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to

the single wipe position. Hold the stalk in

this position.

2. Make sure the brake pedal is not applied

and, while still holding the wiper stalk in

the single wipe position, press the ignition

START/STOP button to switch on the

ignition.

The wipers will move to the vertical (service)

position. Release the wiper stalk.

To return the wiper blades to the operating

position, turn the ignition off.

CAUTIONS

When checking or changing the wiper

blades, they can be set to the service

position or parked normally.

E94746

JAG1625

Wipers and washers

Changing the wiper blades

Having set the wipers to the service position,

lift the wiper blade clear of the windscreen. The

removal procedure for the wiper blade is as

follows:-

1. Push the clips together on the underside of

the wiper mounting.

2. Rotate the clips and blade away from the

wiper mounting.

3. Slide the wiper blade off the wiper arm.

To fit the new blade, follow the removal

procedure in reverse.

CAUTION

Only fit the correct length and type of

wiper blade. Failure to do so may cause

damage to the wiper system, it may also affect

the operation of the rain sensor.

E94748

Windows and mirrors

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

With the ignition on or engine running, press a

switch down to lower the window, pull it up to

raise the window. Release the switch at any

point to stop window movement.

The windows will operate for five minutes after

the engine is switched off, as long as none of

the doors are opened.

One-shot operation

All four windows have one-shot operation.

Briefly pull the switch up and release, the

window will continue to raise until fully closed.

Briefly press the switch down and release, the

window will continue to lower until fully open.

Pressing or pulling the switch again will stop

the window.

Overriding anti-trap protection

Anti-trap protection will stop window

movement if an obstruction or resistance is

detected. Check the window and its aperture

and remove any obstructions, ice, etc. If it is

still necessary to raise the window, the override

procedure is as follows:-

1. Attempt to close the window. Anti-trap will

prevent closure and lower the window.

2. Within ten seconds, attempt to raise the

window again. Anti-trap will prevent

closure and lower the window.

3. Attempt to close the window for a third

time, this time holding the switch in the

close position. The window will raise

whilst the switch is held. Hold until closed.

Note: If this procedure fails to remove the

blockage, the window operation may need to

be reset.

Window reset

The windows will need to be reset if the battery

is disconnected, becomes discharged or power

supply is interrupted.

Reset as follows:-

1. Close the window fully.

2. Release the switch, then lift it to the close

position and hold for two seconds.

3. Open the window fully.

4. Release the switch, then push it to the

open position and hold for two seconds.

5. Lift and release the switch to operate the

one-shot function.

6. Repeat the procedure on each window.

WARNING

All of the windows have an anti-trap

protection system. However, before

closing a window care must be taken

to ensure that none of the occupants have any

part of their body in a position where it could

be trapped. Even with an anti-trap system

serious injury or death can occur.

E94755

Windows and mirrors

Window isolator

To prevent operation of the rear windows,

press the inhibitor switch. To allow passengers

control of the windows, press the switch again.

INTERIOR MIRROR

Auto dimming

The interior mirror dimming is adjusted

automatically according to the amount of

ambient light when the ignition is on. If reverse

gear is selected, the automatic dimming

feature is turned off to allow maximum

visibility for reversing.

Note: If the mirror becomes detached from the

windscreen it should be re-attached by a

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Note: If the rear screen is obscured, or the light

falling on the mirror is reduced by an

obstruction, the automatic dimming feature

may not operate correctly.

Manual dimming

To dim the light levels reflected by the mirror,

push the lever forward. To return it to normal

light levels, pull the lever back.

WARNING

If children are carried in the rear

seats, the isolator switch should be

used to prevent operation of the

windows. If the windows are operated by

young children there is a risk of serious injury

or death.

E94756

E94836

E94837

Windows and mirrors

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Adjusting and folding

1. Left mirror adjustment.

2. Right mirror adjustment.

3. Powerfold.

Note: Depending on the type of lens used,

distances may be difficult to judge accurately

when only using the mirrors.

Adjusting

Mirror adjustment is available with the ignition

switched on:

1. Press the left or right mirror button as

required. The tell-tale light in the switch

will illuminate to indicate that it has been

selected.

2. Move the joystick control to adjust the

mirror as required.

Folding

To fold the mirrors back, press both left and

right buttons at the same time. To unfold the

mirrors, press both of the buttons again.

The mirrors can be folded when the ignition is

on, and for up to five minutes after the ignition

is switched off, provided the driver’s door is

not opened. If the door is opened, it will be

necessary to turn the ignition on again, before

folding the mirrors.

Note: If the mirrors are folded manually, or

knocked into the folded position accidentally,

the mirror head will be loose. To re-engage the

mechanism, fold, then unfold the mirrors using

the switches.

E94820

1 2

Windows and mirrors

Automatic folding

The mirrors can be configured to automatically

fold when the vehicle is locked and unfold

when unlocked.

Note: If the mirrors were folded using the

switches, they will not unfold when the vehicle

is unlocked.

To select or deselect automatic folding:

1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select

Vehicle.

2. Security is displayed as the default menu.

Select Parking. Touch the arrow icon at the

bottom of the menu to scroll down the list,

until the screen above is displayed.

3. Select Mirror fold back - On or Off.

Mirror dip when reversing

The mirrors can be configured so that when

reverse gear is selected, the passenger door

mirror is automatically adjusted to provide an

improved viewing angle for reversing.

The exact dipped position can be adjusted

using the joystick control, when the mirror is

dipped. The next time reverse is selected, the

newly adjusted position will be selected.

When the gear selector is moved out of

reverse, or if vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h

(7.5 mph) while reversing, the mirror will

return to its previous position.

To select or deselect mirror dip:

1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select

Vehicle.

2. Security is displayed as the default menu.

Select Parking.

3. Select Reverse mirror dip - On or Off.

Heating elements

The external mirrors are equipped with heating

elements which disperse ice or mist from the

glass. The heating elements will operate

automatically, depending on the external

ambient temperature and conditions.

Vehicle

Valet mode

Security

Parking Off On

Off On

12:26 pm

Off On

Mirror fold back

E94821

global open

Windows

global close

Windows

mirror dip

Vol. presets

Off On

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Valet mode

Reverse

12:26 pm

E94822

Windows and mirrors

BLIND SPOT MONITOR

The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system

monitors a zone that covers the area adjacent

to the vehicle, that is not easily visible by the

driver and is designed to identify any object

overtaking the vehicle. The system uses a radar

on each side of the vehicle to identify any

overtaking vehicle/object within the blind spot

area of the vehicle, while disregarding other

objects which may be stationary or travelling in

the opposite direction, etc.

The radar monitors the area extending from the

exterior mirror rearwards, to approximately 7

metres (23 feet) behind the rear wheels, and up

to 2.5 metres (8.2 feet) from the side of the

vehicle (the width of a typical carriageway

lane).

Note: This radar sensor is approved in all RTTE

countries.

Note: The system covers an area of a fixed lane

width. If the lanes are narrower than a typical

carriageway lane, objects travelling in

non-adjacent lanes may be detected.

BSM automatically switches on and becomes

active when the vehicle is travelling at greater

than 16 km/h (10 mph) in a forward drive gear.

When the system initiates, it performs a

self-check, during which the warning icons in

the mirrors illuminate alternately for a short

period of time.

WARNINGS

The Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)

system is a supplement to, not a

replacement for, a safe driving style

and use of the exterior and rear-view mirrors.

It remains the driver's responsibility to detect

other vehicles, and their relative distance and

speed, when deciding whether or not it is safe

to change lanes.

Please note that BSM may not be able

to give adequate warning of vehicles

approaching very quickly from behind

or vehicles that are being overtaken rapidly.

The radar sensors may be impaired

by rain, snow or road spray. This may

affect the system's ability to reliably

detect a vehicle/object within the blind spot. In

such conditions, take extra care when

changing lanes.

BSM may not be able to detect all

vehicles and may also detect objects,

such as roadside barriers, etc.

CAUTIONS

Ensure that the warning indicators in the

exterior mirrors are not obscured by

stickers or other objects.

Do not attach stickers or objects to the

rear bumpers, that may interfere with

the radar sensors.

E96410

Windows and mirrors

BSM is designed to work most effectively when

driving on multi-lane highways.

If an object is identified by the system as being

an overtaking vehicle/object, an amber

warning icon (1) illuminates in the relevant

exterior mirror, to alert the driver that there is a

potential hazard in the vehicle's blind spot and

therefore, that a lane change might be

dangerous.

Note: If an overtaking vehicle is detected on

both sides of the vehicle simultaneously, the

warning icons in both mirrors will illuminate.

Note: BSM is automatically turned off when

reverse (R) gear is selected, when the vehicle is

in park (P), the vehicle is travelling below

16 km/h (10 mph) and also when the electrical

connector for the trailer socket is plugged in on

vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket.

When in these conditions, an amber warning

indicator within the exterior mirror is

displayed.

Sensor blockage

The BSM system will automatically disable if

either of the sensors become completely

obscured, an amber warning indicator dot (2)

is displayed in the exterior mirror and the

message BSM sensor blocked appears in the

message centre.

Note: Blockage testing is only initiated when

vehicle speed is above 32 km/h (20 mph) and

will take at least two minutes of accumulated

time travelling above this speed, to determine

that the sensor is blocked.

If the sensors become blocked, then please

check that there is nothing obscuring the rear

bumper and that it is clear from ice, frost and

dirt.

System fault

If a fault with one of the radar sensors is

detected, an amber warning indicator dot is

displayed in the exterior mirror and the

message BSM not available is displayed in the

message centre.

Note: Even if the detected fault only affects the

radar sensor on one side of the vehicle, the

whole system is disabled. If the fault is

temporary, the system will operate correctly

once the engine has been switched off and then

on again.

If a fault in the system occurs, consult your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

E96411

Instruments

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

Instrument panel

1. Speedometer.

2. Message centre.

3. Tachometer.

4. Fuel gauge.

The instruments will not show correct

information until the ignition system is on.

Speedometer

Indicates road speed.

Message centre

Displays warning and information messages

and gear selector mode and position

information. See WARNING AND

INFORMATION MESSAGES (page 106).

See AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (page 137).

Tachometer

Indicates engine speed in revolutions per

minute (RPM) x 1000.

Fuel gauge

The message centre will display FUEL LEVEL

LOW, when the fuel level is approximately 1/16

of tank capacity. This gives an approximate

range of 50 to 65 km (30 to 40 miles).

As a reminder for the location of the fuel filler,

there is an arrow above the fuel pump symbol,

which points to the relevant side of the vehicle.

l/100km

JAG1630

1 2 3

CAUTION

Never allow the vehicle to run out of fuel.

The resulting misfire may cause serious

damage to the catalytic convertor.

Instruments

100

WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS

1. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)/

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB).

2. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC).

3. Glow plugs (diesel only).

4. Adaptive front lighting system (AFL).

5. Engine malfunction.

6. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS).

7. Airbag.

8. Right-hand direction indicator.

9. Rear fog lamp.

10. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC).

11. High beam.

12. Side lamps.

13. Seat belt.

14. Message centre.

15. Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).

16. Forward alert.

17. Brakes - Electric Parking Brake (EPB)

On/Brake fluid low/Electronic Brakeforce

Distribution (EBD)

18. Left-hand direction indicator.

RED warning indicators are for primary

warnings. A primary warning must be

investigated immediately by the driver or seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

AMBER warning indicators are for secondary

warnings, to indicate that a vehicle system is in

operation or that the driver must take action

and then seek qualified assistance.

Other indicators within the instrument panel

indicate system status (e.g. blue for main beam

or green for direction indicators, when in use).

Indicator check

An indicator bulb check is initiated when the

ignition system is switched on and lasts for

three seconds (excepting the airbag warning

indicator which will remain on for six seconds).

If any warning indicator remains on after this

period, investigate the cause before driving.

Some warning indicators have associated

messages displayed on the message centre.

Note: Not all warning indicators are included in

the check (e.g. main beam headlamps and

direction indicators).

l/100km

JAG1631

123 4 5 6

8910

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11

101

Instruments

Brake - Red

Illuminates when the ignition

system is on and the parking brake

is applied and/or the brake fluid is

low. The indicator will also illuminate when

there is a fault with the Electronic Brakeforce

Distribution (EBD) system.

If the indicator is illuminated and there are no

associated messages, it means that the parking

brake is applied.

If the indicator is illuminated and the message

PARK BRAKE ON is displayed, it means that the

parking brake is applied but the vehicle is

moving. Release the parking brake or stop the

vehicle when it is safe to do so.

If the indicator is illuminated and the message

LOW BRAKE FLUID with a red priority lamp is

displayed on the message centre, low brake

fluid is indicated. In this case, loss of braking in

one or both brake circuits may be imminent.

Stop the vehicle gently and check and top-up

the brake fluid reservoir, using the

recommended fluid. If the warning message

remains, do not drive the vehicle until the brake

fault is rectified. Seek qualified assistance

before continuing. See BRAKE FLUID CHECK

(page 206).

If the indicator is illuminated and the message

EBD FAULT (with red backlight) is displayed in

the message centre, a fault with the EBD

system is indicated. Stop the vehicle gently, as

soon as safety permits and seek qualified

assistance.

Seat belt - Red

The warning indicator stays

illuminated when the ignition is on

and:

•The driver’s seat belt is not fastened.

•Or a passenger is sitting in the front seat

and their seat belt is not fastened.

The indicator should extinguish when the

relevant seat belt is fastened.

Beltminder - Red

The beltminder feature, which uses

the same indicator as the seat belt

warning, provides reminders to the

driver that the driver’s and/or front passenger’s

seat belt is unbuckled.

If the vehicle is moving at or above 16 km/h (10

mph) and the seat belt of an occupied seat is

not fastened, the warning indicator will flash.

The flashing will last for ten seconds and then

repeat every 30 seconds for approximately five

minutes or until the belt(s) is fastened or the

vehicle stops.

If the warning indicator stays illuminated with

the seat belt(s) fastened, seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible. It is safe to

drive the vehicle with the indicator illuminated,

provided that the seat belt(s) is properly

fastened.

Ensure that all occupants fasten their seat belt

before driving.

Note: If a heavy object is placed on the front

passenger seat, it may activate the Beltminder

feature. It is recommended that the object be

placed in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

If the message LOW BRAKE FLUID is

displayed, check the brake fluid level

and top-up as necessary. Do not drive

the vehicle until the brake fault is rectified.

Seek qualified assistance before continuing.

Instruments

102

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)/

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) - Amber

Illuminates if a fault has been

detected in the ABS (accompanied

by a warning message in the

message centre).

The brake system will continue to function

normally, but without ABS braking.

The warning indicator will also illuminate if a

fault has been detected in the EPB system

(accompanied by a warning message in the

message centre).

If the warning indicator illuminates or stays

illuminated after the bulb check cycle, seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Adaptive Front Lighting - Amber

Illuminates when there is a system

fault. Seek qualified assistance as

soon as possible.

Engine malfunction - Amber

Illuminates when the ignition

system is on and remains

illuminated until the engine is

started.

If the indicator illuminates when the engine is

running, there is an engine malfunction.

Specialised diagnostic equipment is required

to repair such faults. Seek qualified assistance

as soon as possible.

The vehicle may activate limp-home mode,

with the possibility of reduced engine

performance. Drive with caution.

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) - Amber

The indicator will flash twice every

second when DSC is operating.

The message DSC NOT AVAILABLE

will be displayed and the indicator will

illuminate continuously, if a fault is detected.

When Trac DSC is selected, the message TRAC

DSC is displayed for four seconds and the

warning indicator remains illuminated.

When DSC is switched off, a chime will sound,

the message DSC OFF is displayed in the

message centre and the warning indicator

remains illuminated.

Rear fog lamps - Amber

Illuminates when the rear fog lamps

are switched on.

Adaptive Cruise Control - Amber

Illuminates when adaptive cruise

control is active, to indicate that the

vehicle is in follow mode.

Forward alert - Amber

Illuminates when the forward alert

function is active.

Airbag - Amber

Flashes if the airbag system

develops a fault, then illuminates

permanently until the fault has been

diagnosed and cleared.

Seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the ABS and brake warning

indicators are illuminated at the same

time, do not drive the vehicle until the

fault is rectified. Seek qualified assistance

immediately.

103

Instruments

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System -

Yellow

Illuminates when one or more tyres

are significantly under-inflated. The

vehicle should be stopped as soon

as possible and the tyres checked and inflated

to the recommended pressure.

High beam - Blue

Illuminates when the high beam

headlamps are switched on or

flashed.

Automatic Speed Limiter - Green

Illuminates when Automatic Speed

Limiter is active.

Side lamps - Green

Illuminates when the side (parking)

lamps are switched on.

Direction indicators - Green

The appropriate indicator will flash

when the column stalk is moved up

or down to signal a turn. If a

direction indicator bulb fails, the audible ticking

and warning indicator will sound and flash at

twice the normal rate, when that direction

indicator is selected.

Hazard warning indicators

When the hazard warning lamps are switched

on, both direction indicator warning indicators

flash simultaneously.

Instruments

104

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

Various sounds are produced for warning and notification purposes as follows:

Hazard or Condition Chime or tone/remedy

External lamps remain on when

the driver’s door is opened.

A chime will sound until the lamps are switched off or driver’s

door is closed (unless the lighting control is in AUTO position).

Hazard warning indicators on. A ticking will sound until the hazard indicators are switched off.

Direction indicators on. A ticking will sound until the indicators are switched off.

Memory 1 (or 2) settings saved. A short tone as the memory selection is saved.

Airbag system failure. A tone sequence is repeated five times. Seek qualified assistance

as soon as possible.

Seat belt reminder. A chime will sound until an unfastened seat belt is fastened. The

warning will cease if occupied front seat belts are buckled, the

ignition is turned off or more than approximately three minutes

has elapsed since the start of the chime.

Electric parking brake (EPB). If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is moving a continuous

chime will sound; release the EPB. If there is a fault with the

system which would prevent the application of the EPB, a brief

sequence of chimes is initiated.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

driver intervene.

Multiple chime. Apply the brakes.

ACC low speed automatic

switch off.

A chime will sound to indicate that the ACC system is no longer

operating.

Forward Alert Multiple chime. Apply the brakes.

Speed is over 15 km/h (9 mph)

above the set limit speed.

A short warning chime. Reduce speed.

Gear selector is not in Park with

ignition off.

A chime will sound. Select Park.

Entry delay warning (European

markets only).

Intermittent slow, low pitched chime. Disarm vehicle.

The Jaguar Smart Key cannot be

detected.

A chime will sound. The remote handset should be inserted into

the starter control unit.

The Jaguar Smart Key is to be

removed from the starter

control unit.

A chime will sound for 60 seconds if the Jaguar Smart Key is in

the starter control unit and the driver’s door is opened. The

remote handset should be removed from the starter control unit.

DSC OFF A chime will sound.

105

Information displays

GENERAL INFORMATION

The driver message centre display is situated

within the instrument panel between the

tachometer and speedometer gauges. The

message centre is active as soon as a door is

opened for access.

The primary function of the message centre is

to inform the driver of the following:

•Warning messages.

•Temporary alert messages.

•Information messages.

•Turn-by-turn navigation.

The message centre screen is divided into

various zones displaying the following:

1. Gear selection, automatic or manual.

2. Warning messages, accompanied by a red

or amber backlight, if system faults are

detected. Status messages are displayed

to indicate changes in state of certain

vehicle functions (e.g. navigation).

When there are no current warning

messages, turn-by-turn navigation

information is displayed, giving

instructions for the next junction. This

facility can be turned off via the

touch-screen. See TURN-BY-TURN

NAVIGATION (page 339).

The clock can be shown when no other

information is required to be displayed.

See CLOCK (page 124).

3. Trip computer information, including total

distance covered by the vehicle. See TRIP

COMPUTER (page 107).

4. Set trip computer information display

relating A, B or Auto trip computer.

See PERSONALISED SETTINGS

(page 111).

On diesel and V8 petrol models, the

electronic engine oil dipstick reading can

also be displayed, when selected using the

trip computer button. See ENGINE OIL

CHECK - V8 Petrol engines (page 199).

5. The fuel level gauge. The small arrow on

the top of the fuel pump symbol denotes

which side of the vehicle the fuel filler cap

is located.

Auto

miles

Inst Fuel

mpg

BOOT OPEN

E95066

Information displays

106

WARNING AND INFORMATION

MESSAGES

Most displayed warning messages have an

associated warning indicator, which will

illuminate on to indicate the message priority.

Also from time to time information messages

will be displayed.

If more than one message is active, each is

displayed in turn for two seconds in order of

priority.

Messages take priority over the trip computer

data and will be displayed when the ignition is

on.

Note: The message centre information

messages and their meanings, are detailed

where necessary within the appropriate subject

sections.

Clearing messages from the display

It is possible to temporarily clear certain

warning or information messages from the

message centre.

When a message is displayed in the message

centre (e.g. WASHER FLUID LOW), a red

warning triangle icon appears on the

touch-screen, where shown.

Touch the icon to temporarily stop the

currently displayed message from appearing.

Once the message is removed, the colour of

the warning icon in the message centre

changes to white, as a reminder that an

outstanding message exists.

Note: Certain warnings, that are critical for the

safe operation of the vehicle, cannot be cleared

from the display.

Note: If multiple messages are displayed, this

process can be repeated to remove all

messages from the display.

Removed messages will display again,

whenever the ignition is switched on, until the

fault is rectified (i.e. in this example, when the

washer fluid is topped up).

WARNING

If a warning indicator is displayed,

stop the vehicle as soon as possible

when it is safe to do so. Do not ignore

critical warning messages. Failure to do so

may result in serious damage to the vehicle.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12:26 pm

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

JAG1515

107

Information displays

TRIP COMPUTER

The computer memory stores data for a

journey or series of journeys until it is reset to

zero.

The displayed information is for guidance only,

as it can be affected by traffic, road and

weather conditions.

Three independent memories are available, A,

B and Auto. A and B memories can be set

independently, while the Auto trip will reset

after every ignition cycle as the vehicle moves.

Full trip computer information for the trip

memories can be displayed on the vehicle

touch-screen located in the centre console,

while current selected trip computer

information is displayed on the instrument

panel message centre.

To access the trip computer touch-screen

settings:

•From the touch-screen Home menu, select

Vehicle.

•Select Trip computer.

•Select requirements from the menu.

Trip computer information centre display

Vehicle total distance travelled (1) and trip

distance (2) are displayed, as well as average

fuel economy and average speed if selected via

the touch-screen. Also A, B or Auto will be

displayed, depending on the current memory

selected.

Odometer

The odometer shows the total vehicle distance

travelled since the vehicle was new.

The odometer and trip distance reading is

displayed in either miles or kilometres,

depending on the settings selected via the

touch-screen.

Changing the display

Press the TRIP button on the end of the left

column stalk switch repeatedly to display the

message centre data in the following order:

•Trip distance

•Average speed

•Average fuel consumption

•Range.

Trip distance (A, B and Auto)

Distance travelled since the last memory reset.

The maximum trip reading is 16 090 kilometres

(9 999.9 miles). The computer will

automatically reset to zero if this distance is

exceeded.

Average speed (A, B and Auto)

The average speed since the last press of the

reset button.

10849

A :

238.7

E91243

E91244

Information displays

108

Average fuel consumption (A, B and

Auto)

The average fuel consumption, stated as litres

per 100 kilometres (except Japan, kilometres

per litre), miles per litre or miles per gallon (UK

only), based on the accumulated distance

travelled and the accumulated fuel used.

Range

This shows the predicted distance, miles or

kilometres, that the vehicle should travel on the

remaining fuel, assuming average fuel

economy and fuel consumption stay constant.

Electronic dipstick (diesel and V8 petrol

engines only)

This shows the current engine oil level and any

associated warnings. See ENGINE OIL CHECK -

V8 Petrol engines (page 199).

ML-km (also Miles-litre)

The display of metric or imperial units is

selected via the touch-screen.

Display language

The display language is selected via the

touch-screen.

Reset

Resetting of the trip memories is carried out via

the touch-screen.

Service interval indicator

The service interval message will only be

displayed when the vehicle has less than

3400 km (2000 miles) before the service is

due.

When the ignition is switched on, and the

vehicle has started its service countdown,

SERVICE REQ'D XXXX km (XXXX MLS) is

displayed in the message centre. At the same

time the display will glow Amber.

After approximately five seconds, the display

reverts to show the preset requirements.

When the service distance has been reached,

SERVICE REQUIRED is displayed in the

message centre and the display will glow Red.

After approximately five seconds, the display

reverts to show the preset requirements.

The distance countdown reduces in increments

of 50 km or 50 miles, depending on which

display units have been selected.

The distance countdown is controlled by the

engine management system and is

automatically adjusted to allow for driving style

and conditions. This gauges when the service

becomes necessary.

Note: After the completion of each service, the

Dealer/Authorised Repairer will reset the

distance display to commence the countdown

to the next service.

CAUTION

If no service interval indicator is

displayed during the vehicle service

cycle, make sure that your vehicle is serviced

in accordance with the intervals, as stated in

the Service Portfolio.

109

Information displays

TOUCH-SCREEN

1. Touch-screen.

2. Home menu button.

3. Touch-screen on/off.

Note: When the engine is stopped, for the

touch-screen to remain active, press the

engine START/STOP button again without

pressing the brake pedal.

1. Touch-screen: When initially activated, the

touch-screen will display the main Home

menu. From this menu, all touch-screen

facilities and operations are initiated by

touching the relevant touch-screen

buttons and icons.

2. Home menu button: Press to return to the

main Home menu from all facilities.

3. Touch-screen on/off: Press once to turn

the screen on, press again to revert to

screen-saver mode. A further press will

turn the touch-screen off.

System facilities

There are six major systems controlled via the

touch-screen, with their individual levels of

operation and settings. They are as follows:

•Audio: Radio display AM/FM or DAB,

auxiliary and portable audio, TV or CD.

•Climate: Air conditioning, Distribution,

Seats, Heated steering wheel, Automatic

air recirculation.

•Phone: Digit dial view, Phonebook, Last

ten calls (made, received, missed).

•Navigation: Destination, Stored locations,

Navigation setup, Route options.

•Vehicle: Security, Parking, Valet mode,

Trip computer, Clock, Brightness,

Contrast, System settings, Vehicle

settings, Display settings.

•Voice: Operating guide, Command list,

Add phone nametag, Settings.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12:26 pm

JAG1516

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch

1 2 3

Information displays

110

Touch-screen use

When the engine START/STOP button is

pressed, the touch-screen is activated by the

on/off switch on the centre console.

The buttons on the centre console, below the

touch-screen display, are referred to as hard

buttons and should be pressed firmly. The

touch-screen buttons are soft buttons and only

require short, light pressure to function. Do not

use excessive pressure.

When operating touch-screen buttons, always

extend the tip of one finger, and withhold the

thumb and remaining fingers from the screen.

Touching the screen with more than one finger

at a time may cause false inputs.

Throughout the handbook, the expression

Select an item (or similar wording) means

touch the on-screen button to select or alter

the required item.

The handbook shows the on-screen menus,

explains how to operate the controls and

illustrates how to select or alter settings and

requirements. After becoming familiar with the

controls, follow the on-screen menus and

prompts, to operate the system as required.

Touch-screen display icons

Touch-screen display icons are as follows

(they may not all be displayed at the same

time):

WARNING

In the interest of road safety, only

operate, adjust or view the system

when it is safe to do so.

CAUTION

Always run the engine during prolonged

use of the touch-screen. Failure to do so

may discharge the vehicle battery, preventing

the engine from starting.

Return to the previous screen

displayed.

Warning triangle button indicating

an information or warning

message in the message centre.

Touch the button to temporarily remove the

warning message from the message centre

display. See WARNING AND INFORMATION

MESSAGES (page 106).

Telephone: send button.

Telephone: end call.

Page up or increase setting to

required value.

Page down or decrease setting to

required value.

Direct access to the valet mode

setting screen.

Telephone signal strength

indicator (if supported by

Bluetooth phone).

Telephone battery level indicator

(if supported by Bluetooth phone).

No phone connected.

Valet

111

Information displays

Touch-screen care

Do not use any abrasive cleaners to clean your

touch-screen. For approved screen cleaners,

you should contact your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer.

The touch-screen inner bezel must be kept

clean to maintain optimum performance.

Finger marks and attracted dust should be

regularly removed using a soft cloth and a

Jaguar approved cleaning agent.

Where possible, avoid exposing the

touch-screen to direct sunlight for long

periods.

PERSONALISED SETTINGS

General Information

The touch-screen provides touch-control of the

vehicle Audio, Climate, Phone, Navigation and

Vehicle systems, as fitted.

Note: When the engine is stopped, the

touch-screen reverts to the stand-by mode. To

activate the touch-screen press the engine

Start/Stop button again.

Home menu display

When initially activated, the touch-screen will

display the main Home menu. The Home menu

may also be displayed at any time by pressing

the Home button on the screen surround.

Screen settings: The touch-screen brightness

and contrast can be set to individual

requirements, including dimming for night

driving. This is accessed via the Vehicle menu.

Select Cont./Bright.

Auto dimming: Select Auto dimming On.

Brightness and contrast are automatically

adjusted by the ambient light level. As the light

level decreases, the touch-screen brightness

will decrease, until the full night screen level of

brightness is initiated.

CAUTION

Care must be taken to avoid spilling or

splashing fluids onto the touch-screen.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12:26 pm

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

JAG1517

Vehicle

Off On

Auto

Trip computer

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright.

Syst. settings

Veh. settings Contrast

12:26 pm

dimming

Brightness

JAG1416

Information displays

112

Further adjustment of the touch-screen

brightness can be achieved by using the + or -

buttons in the Cont./Bright. screen or by

adjustment of the instrument panel dimmer

switch. See INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER

(page 123).

Pop-up messages

The operation of certain functions will cause a

small message (pop-up) to appear, overlaying

the touch-screen display.

The pop-up is mainly for information and will

disappear automatically after a few seconds, or

can be dismissed by touching the pop-up

screen area. If any action or adjustment is

required, the message will clearly indicate what

is required and which button to touch.

Touch-screen systems

There are five major systems controlled via the

touch-screen with their individual levels of

operation and settings. They are as follows:

•Audio

•Climate

•Phone/Comms/Voice

•Navigation

•Vehicle.

Note: The Phone entry is renamed Comms if

the JaguarVoice system is fitted and renamed

Voice if the JaguarVoice system is fitted but

without telephone.

Audio system

The vehicle Audio system interacts with

Navigation, In-car Telephone and Climate

Control systems.

The Audio system can be controlled from the

switches on the console, the touch-screen

buttons and from the multi-function controls

on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.

See AUDIO CONTROL (page 69).

Detailed instructions on the use of the audio

system are provided later in this handbook.

See Audio unit operation (page 271).

Automatic climate control

The automatic climate control system can be

controlled from the switches on the console

and the touch-screen buttons.

See AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

(page 116).

Phone/Comms/Voice

The communications system is composed of

the following facilities:

•Digit dial

•Phonebook

•Last ten calls made, received, missed.

•Voice

The telephone system can be controlled from

the touch-screen, by voice recognition or by

using the multi-function controls on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel.

See ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL

(page 67). Detailed instructions on the use of

the phone are provided later in this handbook.

See Telephone (page 307).

Navigation system

Detailed instructions on the use of the

navigation system are provided later in this

handbook. See Navigation system (page 334).

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 04

Portable audio

00:36

Settings

89.9 89.9 BBC R2

Cancel

Please wait...

Audio

E95072

113

Information displays

Vehicle system

The following system functions are set using

the touch-screen:

•Trip computer

•Clock adjust

•Brightness and contrast

•System settings

•Vehicle settings

Languages and distance units

The screen text and distance units are available

in various languages and either Imperial or

Metric units.

The required languages and units are accessed

by selecting Vehicle from the Home menu,

then selecting:

•Trip computer

•Unit change

•Preferences and then selecting from the

menu.

To change the units: Touch the button

corresponding to the desired unit display

(metric or imperial).

Note: The choice of units displayed is market

dependent. The illustration above represents a

typical screen.

Temperature display is selected by touching

either °C or °F.

Note: Celsius or Fahrenheit may be selected

independently of metric or Imperial units.

To change the language: The language

choices are displayed as a list. Scroll up or

down through the list using the up or down

arrows. Touch to select the chosen language.

Note: The navigation system is not affected by

the language change. To change the navigation

system language display, refer to the

navigation system instructions later in this

handbook. See Navigation system (page 334).

Vehicle

12 : 26 pm

Display set.

Preferences

Button audio

Miles, MPH, MPG

km, km/h, 1/100km

Display language

English UK

Vol. presets

Change

E95073

Vehicle

12 : 26 pm

Display set.

Preferences

Button audio

Miles, MPH, MPG

km, km/h, 1/100km

Display language

English UK

Vol. presets

Change

Vehicle

12 : 26 pm

Dutch

Danish

Finnish

French

Norwegian

E95074

Information displays

114

Timeout to home menu

The time period before the touch-screen

display reverts to the Home menu, after the last

user input, can be adjusted to suit personal

preference.

From the Home menu, select Vehicle.

1. Select Syst. settings.

2. Select Display set, then touch the + or -

buttons to increase or decrease the

timeout delay. The timeout can be adjusted

from ten seconds to five minutes.

Note: An initial default setting of one minute is

set if no time adjustment is made.

3. To prevent the display from reverting to

the Home menu, select Timeout to home

screen Off.

Vehicle

Trip B

Trip

auto

eset

Units

Distance

Av. speed

Av. fuel

532 Km

42 Km/h

12.3 L/100km

353 Km

Range

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright.

Trip computer

Syst. settings

Veh. settings

Trip A

12 : 26 pm

E95075

Vehicle

Display set.

But io

Vol. presets

12 : 26 PM

50 seconds

Off

Screensaver

Timeout to home

setting

screen

E95076

115

Climate control

AIR VENTS

1. Air volume adjust.

2. Air direction adjust.

3. Solar sensor.

The rotating air vents activate and rotate out of

the fascia when the engine START/STOP

button is pressed, provided the climate system

has not been manually switched off. Adjust the

volume of air using the thumbwheels (1) and

the direction of the air using the direction

controls (2), to suit your requirements.

It is possible to set the air vents so that they

remain permanently on view, even when the

ignition is switched off.

From the touch-screen Climate menu, select

Settings. Select Vent rotation Always open.

Rear vents

The temperature of the air supplied by the rear

air vents is dependent on the combined

temperature settings for the driver and front

passenger. For example, if the driver

temperature is set to 21°C (70°F) and 20°C

(68°F) for the front passenger, the temperature

of the air supplied to the rear of the vehicle will

be approximately 20.5°C (69°F).

I t F

1 k

E95077

1 1

2 3

CAUTIONS

Do not obstruct the solar sensor (3) or

the temperature and humidity sensor,

located adjacent to the glove box.

Do not obstruct the extract vents for the

climate system, located in the trim panel

behind the rear seats.

Climate

Sensitivity

Auto

Climate seat

settings

Vent rotation

12 : 26 pm

Auto Always

open

Change units

External 15˚c

Left Right

Auto

E95447

Climate control

116

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

Automatic climate control provides efficient

regulation of the vehicle environment, without

constant adjustments from the occupant.

Sensors inside the vehicle monitor

temperature, humidity and direct sunlight. The

electronic control system automatically adjusts

the heat input, blower speed, air intake and

airflow distribution, to maintain the selected

temperature(s) and reduce misting. The air

conditioning system also incorporates a

pollen/odour filter, to further increase the

comfort of the vehicle environment.

Automatic operation provides optimum

comfort under most driving conditions.

It is recommended that automatic control

(AUTO) is selected as the normal operating

mode.

Automatic control can be overridden at any

time.

Controls

1. Touch-screen display.

2. Left-hand temperature control.

3. Right-hand temperature control.

4. Blower speed, rotate to change blower

speed. Press to turn the climate control

system on/off.

5. AUTO mode, press to select fully

automatic operation.

6. Recirculation, press to switch on/off.

7. Heated rear screen, press to switch on/off.

8. Heated front screen, press to switch

on/off.

9. Defrost program, press to switch on/off.

Settings

Temp sync

External

Auto

19 21

C 5 C

Auto

A/C

Climate

12 26 pm

Auto

OFF

Auto

E95086

789

2 3

117

Climate control

Temperature controls

Separate controls allow the driver

and front passenger zone

temperatures to be independently

adjusted. Press the upper (red)

button to increase temperature and the lower

(blue) button to decrease temperature.

Both driver and passenger temperatures are

displayed on the touch-screen.

Selecting the maximum or minimum

temperature settings for the driver temperature

zone, causes the display to change to HI or LO

respectively. This cancels AUTO mode.

To quickly change from HI or LO to a

convenient mid-range temperature of 22°C

(72°F), press and hold AUTO for a few

seconds.

Note: The maximum possible temperature

differential between the driver and passenger

settings is 3°C (5.4°F)

Windscreen defrost and demist

To remove frost or heavy misting

from the windscreen, press the DEF

button. The following functions will

activate:

•The blower switches on at a high speed

(blower speed can be adjusted manually to

suit).

•The air conditioning activates (to

dehumidify the air) and cannot be switched

off.

•Recirculation is cancelled and cannot be

selected.

•The front and rear screen heaters switch

on automatically (if the engine is running).

To deselect, press the DEF button again or

press AUTO.

Heated screens

The front (F) and rear (R)

screen heaters, may be

switched on and off in

any mode, including with

the climate control system off. However, they

will only operate when the engine is running.

The front screen heater switches off

automatically after 5 minutes. The rear screen

heater switches off automatically after 21

minutes.

The screen heaters can be manually deselected

using the push buttons.

In cold ambient conditions, the front and rear

screen heaters will switch on automatically for

the timed period when the engine is started.

The front and rear screen heaters will

automatically come on at temperatures below

5°C (41°F).

Auto mode

Automatic operation utilises

the air conditioning and other

climate controls, to provide a

controlled environment over a

temperature range of 16°C to 28°C (59°F to

83°F) and should be regarded as the normal

operating mode.

To select automatic climate control press the

AUTO button.

Select the required temperature.

Front and rear screen heating and timed air

recirculation may be selected in AUTO mode,

but selecting any other manual control will

cancel AUTO operation.

To resume fully automatic operation at any

time, press the AUTO button.

Climate control

118

Blower speed

Set the blower speed as required by

adjusting the rotary control.

Press to turn the climate control

system on or off.

When operating in AUTO mode, blower speed

is controlled automatically and AUTO is

displayed on the touch-screen. Any adjustment

of the knob will cancel AUTO mode.

Note: In AUTO mode, if heating is required, the

blower only operates at low speed, until the

engine reaches normal operating temperature.

Recirculation

Press to turn recirculation on

or off. The button indicator

illuminates when recirculation

is turned on.

When selected, the air is recirculated inside the

vehicle. This helps to maintain a high or low

temperature, and is useful for preventing

fumes from entering the vehicle.

Recirculation may also be selected in AUTO

mode, if the climate control system detects

high levels of pollution in the atmosphere

outside the vehicle (if a smog sensor is fitted).

Manual operation of the recirculation control

will override the automatic setting. This facility

can be switched off through the Settings menu

on the touch-screen.

Note: Prolonged use at low temperatures may

cause the windows to mist.

Air conditioning

Press the AUTO button to turn

the air conditioning on.

The air conditioning system is

controlled automatically in AUTO mode to

maintain the desired temperature and humidity

(even if higher temperature settings are

selected).

The air conditioning system is also switched on

automatically in defrost mode (DEF) in order to

dehumidify the air.

Note: Water may collect underneath the vehicle

when parked. This is moisture expelled from

the interior of the vehicle by the air

conditioning system and is not cause for

concern.

Heated/climate seats and heated

steering wheel

The heated seats, climate seats and heated

steering wheel can be controlled from both the

Home and Climate menus on the touch-screen.

See HEATED SEATS (page 47). See CLIMATE

SEATS (page 48). See HEATED STEERING

WHEEL (page 68).

119

Climate control

Touch-screen operation

Certain functions of the climate control system

are adjusted using the Climate menu on the

touch-screen.

Select Climate from the Home menu.

The climate main menu is displayed, from

which the climate control settings can be

adjusted.

Climate control display icons

The climate control display buttons and icons

are as follows:

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12:26 pm

External

t Right

20 17

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

JAG1518

Settings

Temp. sync.

External

Auto

21 21

C .5 C

Auto

A/C

OFF

Climate

12 : 26 pm

Auto

E95094

Auto climate control

on.

Air distribution to

windscreen.

Air distribution to

face.

Air distribution to feet.

Synchronizes the

passenger's climate

control zone to the

driver's settings.

Blower speed control decrease and increase.

Access to the Settings

control menu to set

the vent rotation

mode, to adjust

personal climate zone settings and also to

access the automatic air recirculation sensor

control setting.

Auto

Temp. sync.

Settings

Climate control

120

Note: If the air vents are programmed to rotate,

they will rotate into the fascia when climate

control is turned off.

External temperature

The external temperature is displayed at the top

of the Climate menu.

Smog/pollution filter

The smog filter operates in conjunction with

the air recirculation feature, to reduce

pollutants entering the vehicle.

When pollution is detected by the smog

sensor, air recirculation is selected

automatically, to help prevent pollution

entering the vehicle.

The sensitivity of the smog sensor can be

adjusted for personal preference or the sensor

can be switched off entirely, as follows:

1. Select Settings from the Climate menu.

2. Touch the + or - buttons to increase or

decrease the sensitivity of the smog

sensor.

There are five sensitivity settings, indicated by

the five bars between the + and - buttons. To

switch the smog filter off, touch the - button

until none of the five bars are illuminated.

This icon appears at the top of the

touch-screen when the smog filter

is on. When the smog sensor is

switched off, this icon will not be displayed.

Air conditioning

on/off. When the air

conditioning is

switched off, Economy

mode is selected automatically. Economy

mode turns off the air conditioning

compressor and reduces power consumed

by the climate control system. This will

reduce air conditioning performance.

Prolonged use of Economy mode, may cause

the windows to mist.

Climate control on/off

button.

Auto

12:26 pm

Auto

Climate

Vent Rotation

External

Sensitivity

Change units

Always

open

Auto

JAG1519

Auto

121

Climate control

ELECTRIC SUNROOF

Operation

The sunroof can only be operated with the

ignition on.

Tilt

With the roof closed, press and release the

front of the switch (1). The sunroof will move

to the tilted position automatically. It can be

stopped at any point by pressing the button

again.

Fully open

With the sunroof closed, press and release the

rear of the switch (2). The sunroof will move to

the fully open position automatically. It can be

stopped at any point by pressing the button

again.

•From the fully open position, press and

release the front of the switch (1). The roof

will return to the closed position

automatically.

•From the tilted position, press and release

the rear of the switch (2). The roof will

return to the closed position automatically.

Anti-trap mechanism

If the sunroof encounters resistance when

closing it will stop, and then open fully. This is

to prevent serious injury or damage to the

mechanism.

Override

The anti-trap mechanism can be overridden to

allow the roof to be closed when movement is

restricted by dirt. To override the anti-trap

mechanism, press and hold the front of the

switch until the roof reaches the closed

position.

WARNINGS

Extreme care must be taken to ensure

that none of the occupants have any

part of their body in a position where

it could be trapped by the sunroof when

closing. Although an anti-trap mechanism is

fitted, serious injuries can occur.

Never leave children alone in the

vehicle, as this could result in serious

injury or death.

It is recommended that the Jaguar

Smart Key be removed when leaving

the vehicle.

E95097

WARNING

The sunroof can cause serious injury

should a body part become trapped.

Always ensure that the sunroof is free

from obstructions before closing.

CAUTION

Wherever possible remove any dirt,

leaves etc. from the sunroof mechanism

before closing. Failure to do so may damage

the sunroof mechanism.

Climate control

122

Calibration

If the battery is disconnected, or the power

supply is interrupted, whilst the sunroof is

partially open it will need to be recalibrated.

Once the battery is reconnected, or the power

supply is restored, recalibrate the sunroof as

follows:

1. Switch the ignition on.

2. Press the front of the switch, so that the

sunroof is in the tilt position, then release

the switch.

3. Press the front of the sunroof switch, and

hold for thirty seconds.

4. After thirty seconds the sunroof will begin

to move. Keep the front of the switch

pressed until the sunroof has fully opened,

then closed.

5. Once the open/close cycle has completed

and the sunroof has stopped moving,

release the switch.

The sunroof can now be operated as normal.

Sunroof blind

The blind can be manually opened and closed,

using the handle, with the sunroof closed or

tilted open.

The blind opens automatically when the

sunroof is fully opened and cannot be closed

with the sunroof in this position. The sunroof

needs to be fully closed before the blind can be

closed.

E95098

123

Convenience features

SUN VISORS

Pivot the sun visor downward to reduce sun

glare through the front windscreen. If required,

the visor can unclipped and then be pivoted

towards the side window to reduce sun glare

from that side of the vehicle.

Vanity mirror

Pivot the sun visor downward and raise the

cover on the vanity mirror to illuminate the

mirror. Close the cover to extinguish the

lamps. If the cover is left open, the lamps will

extinguish automatically after 16 minutes to

prevent battery drain.

SUN BLINDS

Press the switch to raise or lower the sun blind.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER

Rotate the thumbwheel up to increase, and

down to decrease, the level of instrument

illumination.

E95106

JAG1331

Convenience features

124

CLOCK

The clock is set using the touch-screen. Select

Vehicle from the Home menu.

1. From the Vehicle menu, select Clock

adjust.

2. Touch the up or down arrow icons to

adjust the hours.

3. Touch the up or down arrow icons to

adjust the minutes.

4. Touch to switch between 12 and 24 hour

clock display.

5. Touch to set the new time. The time

display in the bottom left corner of the

screen will now change to reflect any

adjustments made.

Note: Any adjustments made will be lost,

unless Set is selected before exiting the Clock

adjust menu.

Setting the clock as the screensaver

From the Home menu on the touch-screen,

select Vehicle.

From the Vehicle menu, select Syst. settings

(1).

Select Display set. (2), then touch the clock

symbol (3). The clock will now appear as the

screensaver.

Note: To select an alternative screensaver from

the four available, click on the appropriate icon.

Vehicle

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright.

Tr uter

Syst. settings

Veh. settings

Set

12:26 pm

JAG1521

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch.

Valet

12:26 pm

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

Vehicle

Trip B

Trip

auto

eset

Units

Distance

Av. speed

Av. fuel

532 Km

42 Km/h

12.3 L/100km

353 Km

Range

Clock adjust

Cont./Bright.

Trip computer

Syst. settings

Veh. settings

Trip A

12 : 26 pm

E95075

Vehicle

Display set.

But io

Vol. presets

12:26 PM

50 seconds

Screensaver

Timeout to

setting

home screen

JAG1522

125

Convenience features

AUXILIARY POWER SOCKETS

The auxiliary power socket is located in the

cubby box.

GLOVE BOX

The glove box is opened using the

JaguarSense proximity sensor on the fascia

(arrowed). To open the glove box, place the tip

of your finger close to and directly over the

sensor, as shown in the left-hand inset of the

illustration.

The sensor is able to distinguish between a

finger approach and an accidental finger rub

approach from a knee or other large items,

including being wiped for cleaning purposes.

Under these conditions, the sensor will not

react to the input and the glove box will remain

closed.

Note: When the vehicle alarm is armed or Valet

mode is selected, the proximity sensor is

disabled, preventing the glove box from being

opened.

Note: The wearing of gloves may interfere with

the operation of the proximity sensor. If gloves

are worn, it may be necessary to touch the

sensor to open the glove box.

CAUTIONS

Only Jaguar approved accessories

should be plugged into the power

sockets. Using any other equipment may

damage the vehicle's electrical system. If you

are in any doubt contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

The engine should be running when

using accessories for long periods.

Failure to do so can discharge the battery.

E95111

JAG1653

Convenience features

126

CUP HOLDERS

1. Front single cup holder.

2. Front twin cup holder.

3. Rear cup holders.

To access a front cup holder, press and release

the lid. To access the rear cup holders, fold

down the rear seat armrest.

E95112

12 3

WARNINGS

The cup holders should only be used

for soft containers. Containers which

are hard (cans, metal, ceramic, hard

plastic etc.) can cause serious injury if the

vehicle is involved in an accident, sudden

manoeuvre or braking.

Do not carry open drinks containers.

Hot liquids can cause serious injury

when spilled and may damage the

vehicle.

Do not drink, or use the drinks

holders when driving. Doing so

would break concentration, which

may result in loss of control.

127

Convenience features

Twin cup holder

The twin cup holder can be converted into a

storage compartment by removing the insert.

Use one hand to squeeze the two sides of the

insert together and, lifting the edge nearest the

driver first, use the other hand to rotate the

insert up and out of its compartment, towards

the passenger seat.

Note: An ashtray and cigar lighter pack, which

replaces the front twin cup holder, is available

from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

1. Glove box.

2. Front door stowage.

3. Cubby box.

4. Seat map pockets.

5. Rear door stowage.

E95113

WARNING

Ensure that any items stored in the

vehicle are secure and cannot move.

If the vehicle is involved in an

accident, or subject to sudden braking or

direction change, loose items can cause

serious injury.

E95121

4 4

Convenience features

128

GARAGE DOOR TRANSCEIVER The door transceiver is located in the rear-view

mirror. It can be programmed to transmit the

radio frequencies of up to three different

transmitters, which can be used to activate

garage doors, entry gates, home lighting,

security systems or other radio frequency

operated devices.

Although this section mainly describes the

procedures for a garage door opener, it also

equally applies to the previously mentioned

applications.

In some countries, this feature is also known

as the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

For further information, see Information and

Assistance later in this section.

Before programming

For best results, fit a new battery to the

hand-held transmitter of the garage door

opener (or other device) before programming.

If your garage door opener receiver (located in

the garage) is equipped with an antenna,

ensure that the antenna is hanging straight

down.

WARNINGS

Do not use the transceiver with any

garage door opener that lacks the

safety stop and reverse feature as

required by safety standards. Using a garage

door opener without these features increases

risk of serious injury or death.

When programming the transceiver

to a garage door opener or entry gate,

ensure the area is clear. This will

prevent potential harm or damage as the gate

or garage door will activate during the

programme.

CAUTION

This device may suffer from interference

if operated in the vicinity of a mobile or

fixed station transmitter. This interference is

likely to affect the hand-held transmitter as

well as the in-car transceiver.

E95122

CAUTION

When programming a device that may

require you to press and re-press the

hand-held transmitter (cycle), unplug the

device during the cycling process to prevent

possible motor failure.

129

Convenience features

To erase all programming

For first time programming, ensure that the

engine is switched off:

1. Ensure that the ignition system is in

convenience mode.

2. Press and hold the two outer buttons on

the transceiver in the rear-view mirror.

Keep the buttons pressed until the

indicator lamp begins to flash (this will

take approximately 20 seconds), then

release the buttons.

All memories in the garage door opener have

now been cleared.

Note: Do not perform this procedure when

programming the additional garage door

opener buttons.

Programming

Ensuring that the engine is switched off:

1. Ensure that the ignition system is on.

2. Hold the end of the original garage door

opener hand-held transmitter

approximately 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6

inches) away from the transceiver in the

rear-view mirror, keeping the indicator

lamp in view.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press

and hold both the chosen transceiver

button on the rear-view mirror, as shown

above, and the hand-held transmitter

button. Keep both buttons pressed. The

indicator lamp will flash slowly at first and

then change to a fast flash. When the

indicator lamp flashes rapidly, release both

buttons. The rapid flashing lamp indicates

successful programming.

4. If, after 60 seconds, the indicator lamp

does not flash rapidly, release both the

transceiver and the hand-held transmitter

buttons and repeat the procedure starting

with Step 2. Position the hand-held

transmitter at a different angle and/or

distance.

5. Press and hold the programmed garage

door opener button and observe the

indicator lamp.

•If the indicator is continuous,

programming is complete and your

device should activate when the garage

door opener button is pressed and held

for approximately 1 to 2 seconds and

then released.

•If the indicator lamp blinks rapidly for

two seconds and then turns a

continuous light, proceed with the

following programming instructions for

rolling code device equipment.

E95123

Convenience features

130

Rolling code device equipment

programming

Note: The assistance of a second person, may

make the following steps quicker and easier.

Once the button has been pressed there are

only 30 seconds in which to complete Step 3.

1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor

head unit) in the garage, locate the learn or

smart button/switch.

•The name of the button or switch may

vary between manufacturers.

2. Press and release the learn or smart

button.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and

hold the programmed garage door opener

button for two seconds and release.

4. Repeat the press, hold, release sequence

three times to complete the programming

process.

The garage door opener in the rear-view mirror

should now activate the rolling code device.

Reprogramming a single garage door

opener button

To programme a device to a previously trained

button:

1. Press and hold the desired

pre-programmed garage door opener

button for at least 20 seconds, but no

longer than 30 seconds, until the indicator

lamp begins to flash.

2. Without releasing the rear-view mirror

button, position the hand-held transmitter

approximately 50 to 150 mm (2 to 6

inches) away from the transceiver in the

rear-view mirror, keeping the indicator

lamp in view.

3. Carry out Step 3 of Programming.

Entry gate programming

The technology of some entry gates requires

you to press and re-press (cycle) the hand-held

transmitter button every two seconds during

programming.

Continue to press and hold the desired

rear-view mirror button while you cycle your

hand-held transmitter until the indicator lamp

flashes rapidly.

Information and assistance

For information on the range of available

compatible products or accessories, or for

assistance, you should contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

You can also contact the supplier’s helpline on

0 0800 0466 354 65. This toll-free number can

be called from anywhere within Europe. No

separate country code is required (the first zero

is not required when calling from within

Germany).

Contact can also be made via the internet. The

website address is www.eurohomelink.com.

The e-mail address is:

info@eurohomelink.com.

Note: Keep the original transmitter for future

use or programming procedures if, for

example, you purchase a new vehicle.

Note: The manufacturer is not responsible for

any radio or TV interference caused by

unauthorised modifications to this equipment.

Such modifications could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION

It is recommended that when you sell or

dispose of the vehicle, the programmed

transceiver buttons be erased for security

purposes.

131

Convenience features

PORTABLE AUDIO INTERFACE

1. USB connector port.

2. iPod input port.

3. Auxiliary input port.

The interface sockets are located in the cubby

box and can be used to integrate personal

media devices with the vehicle's audio system.

See Portable audio (page 299).

E95124

Starting the engine

132

GENERAL INFORMATION

START/STOP button

The START/STOP button is used to start or

stop the engine, or to turn on the ignition

without starting the engine.

Note: The START/STOP button will only be

operational if a valid Jaguar Smart key is

detected within the vehicle.

Switching on the ignition

To turn on the ignition without starting the

engine, make sure the brake pedal is not

applied and that there is a valid Jaguar Smart

Key in the vehicle, then press and release the

START/STOP button. The warning indicators

illuminate and most electrical systems will be

operational.

Note: If the brake pedal is pressed when the

START/STOP button is pressed, the engine will

start.

Steering column lock

Your vehicle is fitted with an electronic steering

column lock. The column unlocks when it

detects a Jaguar Smart Key inside the vehicle.

The steering column automatically locks when

the starter switch is turned off and the driver's

door is opened.

If the steering column remains locked, even

with a valid Jaguar Smart Key in the vehicle,

STEERING COLUMN LOCKED is displayed in

the message centre. If this occurs:

1. Press the starter button to return to the

convenience mode.

2. Try again to unlock the steering column

lock, by turning the steering wheel gently

to the left and right.

3. If the malfunction still persists, seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

E94135

CAUTION

During vehicle recovery, the Jaguar

Smart Key must remain inside the

vehicle (or be stowed in the starter control unit

in the centre console), so that the steering

column remains unlocked.

133

Starting the engine

KEYLESS STARTING

With the Jaguar Smart Key inside the vehicle

and the brake pedal depressed, press and

release the START/STOP button to start the

engine.

Note: On diesel models, Smart Start in

progress is displayed in the message centre. If

the brake pedal is released, a gear change is

made or if a fault occurs, Smart Start

cancelled is displayed in the message centre

and the start procedure is cancelled.

Starting a petrol engine

With the brake pedal applied and with a valid

Jaguar Smart Key in the vehicle, press and

release the START/STOP button. The engine

will start, the JaguarDrive selector will elevate

out of the centre console and the air vents in

the front fascia will rotate to the open position.

Starting a diesel engine

With the brake pedal applied and with a valid

Jaguar Smart Key in the vehicle, press and

release the START/STOP button. In ambient

conditions, after 3 seconds, the engine will

start to crank. The JaguarDrive selector will

elevate out of the centre console and the air

vents in the front fascia will rotate to the open

position.

Note: Smart Start in progress is displayed in

the message centre prior to the engine

cranking. If, during the start procedure, the

brake pedal is released, a gear change is made

or if a fault occurs, Smart Start cancelled is

displayed in the message centre and the start

procedure is cancelled.

Cold climates

In very cold conditions, the delay between

pressing the START/STOP button and the

engine cranking, can be up to 12 seconds.

During this delay, keep the brake pedal applied

and do not press the START/STOP button

again, as this will switch off the ignition. Also in

very cold conditions, expect engine cranking

times to increase.

WARNING

Never start the engine or leave it

running, when the vehicle is in an

enclosed space. Exhaust gases are

poisonous and can cause unconsciousness

and death if inhaled.

E94136

Starting the engine

134

Engine block heaters

Engines are more difficult to start when the

ambient temperature is very low. In

geographical areas where temperatures below

-10°C (14°F) are experienced frequently, it is

advisable to fit an engine block heater. The

block heater will have an insulated connector at

the front of the vehicle, which is connected to a

mains supply using a suitable extension cable.

The heater can remain in use overnight if

required. Typically, an engine block heater will

use between 400W and 1000W per hour.

For further information consult your Jaguar

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

If the engine fails to start

When pressing the engine START/STOP button

to start the engine, if the security status

indicator lamp on the top surface of the

instrument panel remains flashing, a fault

condition is indicated. Seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

Note: If the Jaguar Smart Key is placed in the

door pocket, it may be outside the range of the

sensors when the door is opened.

Note: If the fuel system inertia switch has

tripped, the ignition circuit will be isolated.

See FUEL CUT-OFF (page 177).

Petrol engines

If the engine persistently fails to start, press the

START/STOP button (without applying the

brake pedal) to return the ignition to

convenience mode. Slowly depress the

accelerator pedal fully, hold it in this position

and press the START/STOP button with the

brake pedal applied, the engine will start to

crank. Release the accelerator pedal when the

engine starts.

If the engine still fails to start, consult your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Diesel engines

If the engine persistently fails to start, press

and hold the START/STOP button (with the

brake pedal applied). Keep the START/STOP

button and the brake pedal pressed until the

engine starts, then release.

If the engine still fails to start, consult your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE

With the gear selector in position P, press the

engine START/STOP button. The engine will

stop and the ignition system will return to

convenience mode. The audio, telephone and

touch-screen systems will revert to stand-by

mode and the JaguarDrive selector will retract

into the centre console. Pressing the

START/STOP button again (without pressing

the brake pedal) will activate the systems.

CAUTION

The fitting of an engine block heater

does not eliminate the need for

antifreeze.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine when the

vehicle is in motion.

135

Starting the engine

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) forms part of

the emissions reduction system fitted to your

vehicle. The DPF will remove a high proportion

of the harmful carbon microspheres (soot)

before they leave the exhaust. It achieves this

by filtering out the particles, which are then

stored until they are burnt away and the filter is

emptied.

Regeneration

Unlike a normal filter which requires periodic

replacement, the DPF has been designed to

regenerate, or clean itself, to maintain

operating efficiency. This regeneration process

takes place automatically in most cases.

However, some unfavourable driving

conditions may mean that the regeneration

process must be initiated deliberately by the

driver.

Warning indicators and messages

If regeneration cannot be achieved

automatically by the system, due to short

journeys for example, the driver will be notified

via a warning indicator or message.

DPF FULL

If this message appears in the message centre

(with a red backlight), the vehicle should be

taken to your Dealer/Authorised Repairer as

soon as possible.

DPF FULL SEE HANDBOOK

If this message appears in the message centre

(with an amber backlight), the driver should

carry out the DPF regeneration procedure that

follows, as soon as possible.

CAUTION

The regeneration procedure produces

high temperatures in the DPF. Heat can

be felt radiating from beneath the vehicle,

which is normal and not a cause for concern.

However, the vehicle should not be parked

over combustible material, particularly during

dry weather. The heat generated could be

sufficient to start a fire when in close proximity

to combustible material such as long dry

grass, paper etc.

CAUTION

Failure to take the appropriate action

when a warning message appears, may

result in damage to the engine and DPF

system, increased vehicle emissions and

costly repairs.

Starting the engine

136

Regeneration procedure

If the warning DPF FULL SEE HANDBOOK

appears in the message centre, carry out the

following procedure as soon as possible.

Note: At all times during this procedure you

should observe all relevant speed limits, laws

and regulations. Always take account of traffic

and weather conditions and drive with

consideration for other road users.

1. Drive the vehicle until the engine reaches

normal operating temperature. The engine

should not be left idling to achieve working

temperature.

2. Drive the vehicle for a further twenty

minutes, keeping the vehicle at a steady

speed between 75 km/h (45 mph) and

120 km/h (75 mph).

Keeping a constant speed enables the DPF

to regenerate more efficiently. It is

therefore recommended that Cruise

control is used to achieve this, if possible.

3. If regeneration is successful, the warning

message will extinguish. If the message

remains, repeat the process.

If the warning message fails to extinguish after

60 minutes of driving, contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer for assistance.

137

Transmission

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The transmission system is designed to

operate in two distinct modes, conventional

automatic and Jaguar Sequential Shift.

The automatic modes are accessed by the gear

selector:

•D - Drive - automatic shifting.

•S - Sport - sport automatic shifting.

The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode enables

sequential manual gear selection in D

(temporary) and S (permanent) modes, via the

steering wheel mounted paddles.

Note: In addition to the standard shift patterns

available in D and S, the transmission will

adapt to differing conditions by modifying shift

points, based upon vehicle sensor information

for road gradient, cornering, braking pressure

and driving style.

JaguarDrive selector

The JaguarDrive selector elevates out of the

centre console when the engine is started, in

readiness for gear selection. Press the brake

pedal, then rotate the control to select the

chosen gear (P, R, N or D) or, from D, press

down on the control and rotate to select S

(Sport).

CAUTIONS

Never select the Park (P) position whilst

the vehicle is in motion. Doing so may

cause serious damage to the transmission.

Never select the Reverse (R) position

whilst the vehicle is in forward motion.

Doing so may cause serious damage to the

transmission.

Never select a forward gear whilst the

vehicle is in rearward motion. Doing so

may cause serious damage to the

transmission.

Do not rev the engine or allow it to run

above normal idle speed while selecting

D or R, or while the vehicle is stationary with

any gear selected.

Do not allow the vehicle to remain

stationary for any length of time, with a

gear selected and the engine running. Always

select P or N if the engine is to idle for a

prolonged period.

E94119

Transmission

138

P should be selected before switching off the

engine. However, it is possible to switch the

engine off with R, D or S selected - the selector

will automatically select P, while retracting into

the centre console.

Note: If the engine is switched off with N

selected, the system will wait for 10 minutes

before selecting P. This procedure is to allow

the vehicle to be conveyed through a car wash

only and should not be used for vehicle

recovery purposes.

To prevent the transmission from

automatically selecting P (e.g. for vehicle

recovery purposes), it is necessary to activate

the Emergency Park Release.

See TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

(page 254).

Selector positions

P - Park: Use when parked. In this position the

transmission is locked, do not attempt to select

P if the vehicle is moving.

Note: P will be selected automatically when the

engine is switched off.

R - Reverse: Do not select if the vehicle is

moving forward.

N - Neutral: Disconnects drive to the wheels.

Use the parking brake when stopping

temporarily with N selected.

D - Drive: Gear changing is automatic for all six

forward gears. The shift points are determined

by accelerator pedal position and road speed,

to provide the best balance of performance,

refinement and fuel economy, for the large

majority of driving conditions.

S - Sport: Gear changing is automatic for all six

forward gears, with modified gear shift points

to maximise the vehicle response in

demanding driving conditions. This mode is

not suitable for town or highway cruising.

Note: Both D and S positions also offer

additional features, which are listed under

Automatic mode and Sport mode, later in this

section.

Stationary vehicle

When the vehicle is stationary, the selector

may be left in D or S, unless the vehicle is to be

parked. When stopping for extended periods,

either select P or apply the parking brake and

select N.

Selector interlock

The transmission is equipped with an interlock,

to prevent inadvertent selection of a drive gear

(D, S or R) from the P or N positions. To

release the interlock to select a drive gear,

press the brake pedal while making the

selection.

Ensure the required driving range has selected

prior to releasing the brake pedal. The range

indicator (R, D or S) on the selector and

message centre displays, will illuminate

continuously to confirm selection.

Note: If the brake pedal is released too early

during selector rotation from P or N to a driving

range (R, D or S), then the selected range will

not be engaged. The selected range will flash

on the selector and message centre displays.

To obtain the selected range, press the brake

pedal, select P or N and reselect the required

range, ensuring the brake pedal is depressed.

If N is selected for less than 2 seconds (e.g.

when moving the selector between R and D),

the interlock will not activate and the brake

pedal will not need to be pressed.

Note: The interlock is deactivated when the

vehicle is travelling at more than 5 km/h

(3 mph).

139

Transmission

If the selector fails to elevate

If the JaguarDrive selector is obstructed when

the engine is started, it may be prevented from

elevating out of the centre console. If this

occurs, turn off the ignition, ensure that the

selector is not obstructed and then start the

engine. The selector should elevate as normal.

If the selector still fails to elevate, even if there

is no obstruction, a fault in the system is

indicated. The selector can still be used in the

lowered position, but be aware that it will not

automatically select P when the engine is

switched off, so P should be selected manually.

The fault should be rectified by a Dealer/

Authorised Repairer at the earliest opportunity.

Starting

In the unlikely event that the selector did not

rotate back to P when the vehicle was

previously switched off, and the selector has

remained in R, D or S, it will not be possible to

start the engine. The vehicle will go to ignition

on. The selected range will flash and the

selector will now be unlocked, to allow the

driver to select P and start the engine.

Automatic mode

To select Drive (D) when the vehicle is

stationary:-

1. Apply the foot brake.

2. Rotate the gear selector to D.

When in D the transmission will automatically

select the most appropriate gear for the current

driving conditions.

Note: When a gear is selected the vehicle may

begin to move as soon as the foot brake is

released.

Kick-down

When D is selected and the accelerator pedal is

depressed fully, the transmission will

downshift to the lowest appropriate gear. Once

the accelerator pedal is returned to a normal

driving position, the transmission will up-shift

to the highest appropriate gear.

Note: Kick-down operation will vary according

to road speed, current gear in use and

accelerator movement.

E94120

Transmission

140

Fast off

Activated when rapidly lifting off the

accelerator pedal and takes account of road

gradient. This feature inhibits up-shifts,

enhancing performance.

Note: If Sport mode is selected, driver type

recognition will vary the activation of this

feature according to driving style.

Shift adapt under braking

Under braking, the transmission will vary the

down-shift point in proportion to braking effort

and road gradient. This feature works in

conjunction with the positive torque function,

resulting in a smoother down-shift.

Note: If Sport mode is selected, driver type

recognition will vary the activation of this

feature according to driving style.

Corner recognition

Inhibits up-shifts during cornering, to provide

improved vehicle balance.

Note: If Sport mode is selected, driver type

recognition will vary the activation of this

feature according to driving style.

Road gradient recognition

When the vehicle is being driven on an uphill

gradient, the transmission adapts the shift

pattern to make better use of engine power.

When driving on a long downhill gradient, the

transmission may automatically select a lower

gear, to increase engine braking. Selecting

Sport mode (S) will increase the tendency of

the transmission to select a lower gear in these

conditions, further increasing engine braking.

Note: It is also possible to manually select a

lower gear to increase engine braking via use of

the shift paddles.

Sport mode

To select Sport mode:

1. With the selector in D, push down on the

selector.

2. Rotate from D to S.

Note: When Sport mode is selected SPORT will

be displayed in the message centre, and the

selector indicator will illuminate.

Sport mode enhances the responsiveness of

the transmission, to provide a sporting feel to

driving the vehicle. Sport mode is

recommended for overtaking manoeuvres and

for when rapid progress is desired.

To return to automatic mode move the selector

lever back to the D position. The D on the

selector display will illuminate to confirm that

automatic mode has been selected.

E94121

141

Transmission

Driver type recognition

In Sport mode, the transmission monitors

driving style and in combination with sensors

in the vehicle, varies the shift schedule,

fast-off, corner recognition and shift adapt

under braking functions, according to the

driving style.

Manual mode - Jaguar Sequential Shift

Shifts in the Jaguar Sequential Shift manual

mode are made using the steering wheel

mounted shift paddles and are optimised to

provide a rapid response to gear shift requests.

Up-shift requests (+) are optimised for

performance via the short shift function,

resulting in firmer feeling shifts than in

automatic mode. Down-shift requests (-)

utilise a throttle blip during the shift, resulting

in improved shift feel.

The Jaguar Sequential Shift manual mode can

be accessed either temporarily, or

permanently.

Temporary manual gear selection: When the

gear selector is in the D position, manual mode

may be directly accessed by the single action of

operating the steering wheel mounted shift

paddles.

This convenience feature allows immediate but

temporary use of the shift paddles when the

gear selector is in D.

If continued use of manual mode is required,

the gear selector may be subsequently moved

to the S position to enter permanent manual

mode in the currently selected gear.

If the gear selector remains in the D position,

temporary manual mode will be held whilst the

driver is accelerating, decelerating, cornering

or continuing to request shifts via the paddles.

The transmission will revert to automatic

operation after a short period of driving at

steady speed; alternatively the shift-up (+)

paddle may be held for a short period

(approximately one second) to return directly

to automatic operation in D.

Permanent manual gear selection: Select the

S position, permanent manual mode is then

accessed by the operation of the steering wheel

mounted shift paddles.

The message centre will highlight the currently

selected gear.

E94122

Transmission

142

Note: When the transmission is set to

permanent manual mode (i.e. using the

paddles to change gear while in Sport mode)

and Dynamic mode is selected, transmission

up-shifts are fully controlled by the driver. This

means that the transmission will not change up

a gear automatically, even when the vehicle's

rev limit is reached. When the rev limit is

reached, the gear position indicator in the

message centre will glow amber, to indicate

that the next gear should be selected.

To exit from the Jaguar Sequential Shift

permanent manual mode, either pull and hold

the shift-up paddle for approximately one

second (to return directly to automatic

operation in S), or rotate the gear selector to

the D position. The transmission will revert to

the D automatic shift mode.

Manual operation

To shift-up, briefly pull the shift-up (+) paddle

on the right-hand side of the steering wheel

towards you.

To shift-down, briefly pull the shift-down

paddle (-) on the left-hand side of the steering

wheel towards you.

The message centre display will change to

highlight the requested gear.

Note: The transmission will inhibit up-shifts

and down-shifts if the requested shift would

result in an engine speed outside the normal

operating range of the engine. If this occurs,

the message centre will briefly display the

requested gear selection, but will return to

displaying the current gear.

The Jaguar Sequential Shift mode also has the

following features:

Kick-down: Operation of kick-down in Jaguar

Sequential Shift mode will override the

currently selected gear. The lowest available

gear will be selected for maximum acceleration

and will be highlighted in the message centre

display. Subsequent manual shifts may then be

selected as usual.

Positive torque: Provides throttle blips on

down-shifts, improving shift feel and response.

Shift assist: The transmission will

automatically up-shift at the engine speed

redline in Jaguar Sequential Shift mode, as if

commanded manually.

The transmission will automatically

down-shift, when the engine speed drops too

low for the currently selected gear.

When the vehicle approaches, or comes to

rest, second gear is automatically selected.

Subsequent pull-aways will occur in second

gear, unless the accelerator pedal demand is

high or a down-shift is manually selected, in

which case, first gear will be selected.

In all cases the message centre will display the

current gear.

Note: During sustained braking, if a down-shift

is selected at a speed which would result in the

engine speed exceeding its normal operating

range, the gear change will be indicated in the

message centre, but the down-shift will be

delayed until the vehicle speed has reduced

sufficiently for the gear selection to be made,

without causing the engine speed to exceed its

normal operating range.

143

Transmission

Limp-home mode

Note: The driver should be aware that the

vehicle’s performance will be reduced and

must take this into account when driving. Also

the use of the Jaguar Sequential Shift paddles

will be disabled. In this event, seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

In the unlikely event of an electrical or

mechanical failure, transmission operation will

be limited. The vehicle gear selector ranges P,

R, N, D and S may still be used to enable the

vehicle to be driven to a safe area.

Some faults will cause the selector to be locked

in position until the ignition is switched off. If

the selected range flashes, it signifies that the

driver request cannot be engaged. Re-select N

and repeat the attempt.

If the transmission is still unable to select the

requested gear, contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

Message centre display

The message centre will confirm the

JaguarDrive selector position (selected gear).

Selector position is shown highlighted at the

top of the message centre and confirmed by

the dot on the circular representation of the

selector.

If manual mode is selected, the numbers 1 to 6

appear at the top of the display, with the

currently selected gear highlighted.

Note: With the transmission set to permanent

manual mode and Dynamic mode selected,

when the rev limit is reached, the gear position

indicator in the message centre will glow

amber, to indicate that the next gear should be

selected.

The message centre may also display the

following messages with associated warning

indicators:

ENGINE SYSTEMS FAULT (Red)

RESTRICTED PERFORMANCE (Red or Amber)

GEARBOX FAULT (Amber)

If any of these messages are displayed it is

likely that loss of power or driveability will be

experienced. Seek qualified assistance as soon

as possible.

l/100km

JAG1629

Brakes

144

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Brake pads

Brake pads require a period of bedding in when

new. Drive with extra caution for the first

500 km (300 miles) to avoid the need for heavy

braking.

Brake pad wear warning

When the brake pads are wearing low, the

warning message BRAKE PADS LOW is

displayed in the message centre. Arrange for

your vehicle to be seen by your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer at the earliest opportunity.

Wet conditions

Driving through heavy rain or water can have

an adverse effect on braking efficiency. Under

such circumstances, it is recommended that

you lightly apply the brakes intermittently to

dry the brakes.

ABS warning indicator

If this amber warning indicator

illuminates while driving and/or

ABS FAULT is displayed in the

message centre, drive with extra caution, avoid

heavy braking where possible, and seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

If this red warning indicator

illuminates while driving and/or the

message LOW BRAKE FLUID is

displayed in the message centre, check the

brake fluid level at the earliest opportunity and

top-up as required. See BRAKE FLUID CHECK

(page 206).

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS

ABS (Anti-Lock Braking System) allows

maximum brake pressure, and thus maximum

braking efficiency, to be applied, and prevents

the road wheels locking. This allows the driver

to retain steering control during heavy braking

under most road conditions.

ABS optimises tyre to road adhesion under

maximum braking conditions, though it cannot

provide increased cornering ability.

WARNINGS

Do not rest your foot on the brake

pedal whilst the vehicle is in motion.

This may cause a light application of

the brakes, which can result in overheating,

reduced brake performance, and excessive

brake wear.

Never allow the vehicle to coast

(freewheel) with the engine turned

off. The engine must be running to

provide full braking assistance. The brakes will

still function with the engine off, but far more

pressure will be required to operate them.

If the red brake warning indicator

illuminates, safely bring the vehicle to

a stop, as quickly as possible. Seek

qualified assistance before proceeding.

Never place non-approved floor

matting or any other obstructions

under the brake pedal. This restricts

pedal travel and braking efficiency.

WARNINGS

ABS cannot overcome the physical

limitations of braking distance. Nor

can it overcome the lack of grip on a

road surface (e.g. aquaplaning on water).

Braking distance is increased on a

slippery surface. This applies to all

vehicles, even those fitted with ABS.

The driver should not be tempted to

take risks when driving, in the hope

that ABS will correct errors of

judgement. In all cases it remains the driver's

responsibility to drive with due care and

attention, paying particular attention to the

effects of speed, weather, road conditions etc.

145

Brakes

During emergency braking conditions ABS

constantly monitors the speed of each wheel.

ABS varies the brake pressure to individual

wheels, according to the grip available. The

constant alteration of brake pressure can be

felt as a pulsing sensation through the brake

pedal. This is not a cause for concern, as it is

designed to demonstrate to the driver that ABS

is operating.

ABS braking techniques

For optimum ABS performance, these

instructions on braking techniques during ABS

operation should be followed:

•Do not release the brake pressure when

the pulsating effect is felt. Maintain a

constant pressure until the manoeuvre is

completed.

•To familiarise yourself with the feel of the

brake pedal during ABS braking, practise

an emergency stop procedure, always

making sure it is safe to do so. With the

seat belts fitted to all occupants, drive the

vehicle at 32 km/h (20 mph) and brake

sharply.

•ABS enables the driver to steer around

obstacles during emergency braking.

However, the consequences of turning

sharply at high speed cannot be overcome

by the ABS.

•Do not attempt to pump the brakes to

avoid skidding, as this can interfere with

ABS operation. The ABS will not allow the

wheels to skid under normal road

conditions.

•The ABS will tend to keep the vehicle

straight during braking. Because braking

distances may increase under certain road

conditions, it is necessary to plan and

make turning manoeuvres as early as

possible.

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD)

EBD balances the distribution of braking forces

between the wheels on the front and rear axles,

to maintain maximum braking under all vehicle

loading conditions.

For example; Under light loads, EBD applies

less braking effort to the rear wheels, to

maintain stability. Conversely, it allows full

braking effort to the rear wheels when the

vehicle is towing or is heavily laden.

A fault with the EBD system is

indicated by illumination of the red

brake warning indicator and the

message EBD FAULT is displayed in the

message centre. Gently stop the vehicle, as

soon as safety permits, and seek qualified

assistance.

Brakes

146

Emergency Brake Assist (EBA)

The EBA system measures the rate at which the

brake pressure increases. If the system detects

an emergency braking situation, EBA

automatically initiates full braking effect. This

can reduce stopping distances in critical

situations.

EBA stops operating as soon as the brake pedal

is released.

EBA is part of the Dynamic Stability

Control (DSC) system and a fault

with the EBA system is indicated by

the amber DSC warning indicator illuminating

and DSC NOT AVAILABLE (with amber

backlight) displaying in the message centre.

Seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Brake vacuum assist

(V6 petrol models only)

When the engine is cold and/or engine vacuum

is low, Brake vacuum assist provides additional

brake pedal assistance. When the function is

operating, a pulsation may be felt through the

brake pedal - this is not a cause for concern.

A fault is indicated by the message BRAKE

ASSIST FAULT (with amber backlight)

appearing in the message centre. Increased

brake pedal effort may be required to slow the

vehicle when the engine is cold and/or engine

vacuum is low. Seek qualified assistance.

ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB)

The switch which operates the parking brake is

mounted on the centre console to the rear of

the gear selector.

To engage the parking brake (1): Pull the

parking brake switch upwards and release. The

switch will return to the neutral position. The

Parking brake warning and Brake fluid low

warning indicator on the instrument panel will

illuminate.

The Drive Away Release feature allows the

parking brake to release automatically as the

vehicle is driven away.

To disengage the parking brake (2): With the

ignition system on or with the engine running,

apply the foot brake and press the parking

brake switch down.

If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle

is stationary and D or R is selected, applying

the throttle will automatically release the

parking brake.

The parking brake is also automatically

released when the gear selector is moved from

the P position.

WARNING

The EBA system is an additional

safety system; it is not intended to

relieve the driver of his or her

responsibility for exercising due care and

attention when driving.

1 2

E95148

147

Brakes

If the parking brake is inadvertently applied

when the vehicle is moving at above 3 km/h

(1.8 mph), PARK BRAKE APPLIED is displayed

in the message centre, the warning indicator in

the instrument panel will illuminate and a

warning chime will sound.

If the parking brake is applied whilst the vehicle

is moving, releasing the switch will disengage

the parking brake. The parking brake cannot be

applied when the vehicle is moving, if the

accelerator pedal is pressed.

Note: If the vehicle is in motion, the parking

brake should only be used as an emergency

brake.

The warning indicator in the instrument panel

will remain on for a short time, if the parking

brake is applied when the ignition system is

reverted to the convenience mode.

If a fault in the system is detected,

the amber brake warning indicator

will illuminate and PARK BRAKE

FAULT or CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE will

be displayed in the message centre. Seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, APPLY FOOT AND PARK BRAKE

will be displayed in the message centre when

the ignition is next switched on. Depress the

foot brake and pull the parking brake switch up

to apply the parking brake. This is required to

reset the parking brake system. The parking

brake will now function correctly.

CAUTION

Always apply the parking brake when

the vehicle is parked.

Parking aid

148

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Note: Once the system has been activated by

selecting reverse or using the switch, the front

and rear sensors are active when the gear

selector is in neutral. Therefore, if an obstacle

is detected an audible warning tone will sound.

The parking aid is automatically in standby

when the ignition is on and provides the driver

with information on most obstructions, and

their distance from the vehicle, when

manoeuvring. This is achieved by using four

ultrasonic sensors on each bumper.

When objects are detected the Park aid will

emit a warning tone which increases in

frequency and then becomes constant, as the

vehicle gets closer to the object.

USING THE PARKING AID

Touch-screen

To set the volume of the parking aid warning

tones:

•Select Vehicle from the touch-screen

Home menu, then select Veh. settings.

•Select Parking, then select Vol. presets.

Touch the Parking aid + or - button to increase

or decrease the warning tone volume.

Note: This adjusts both front and rear speaker

volume.

WARNINGS

It remains the driver’s responsibility

to be vigilant when reversing. Small

children or animals may not be

detected by the system.

It remains the driver’s responsibility

to detect obstacles and estimate the

vehicle’s distance from them. Some

overhanging objects, barriers, thin

obstructions or painted surfaces which could

possibly cause damage to the vehicle may not

be detected by the system. Always be vigilant

when reversing.

CAUTIONS

Objects moving away from the vehicle

will be reported. However, whilst driving

away, object warning may be temporarily

reported due to ground reflection.

Systems using the same frequency

band as the front parking sensors, may

cause irregular tones to be emitted.

mirror dip

Vol. presets

Off On

Vehicle

Security

Parking

Reverse

12 : 26 pm

Navigat

Phone

Vehicle

Display set.

Preferences

Button audio

Parking aid

Vol. presets

AVC Low Medium High

12 : 26 pm

Valet mode

E94137

149

Parking aid

When the parking aid is active, a pop-up screen

is initiated displaying a plan view of the vehicle

and the immediate surrounding area. This can

be cancelled by touching the screen within the

pop-up area.

Note: If a rear-view camera is fitted, when

reverse gear (R) is selected, the camera display

is selected automatically. To view the parking

aid display, touch the screen. The rear view

camera will indicate when a rear parking aid

sensor has been activated, by showing a red

panel over the relevant area of the camera

display. See Rear view camera (page 152).

Rear parking aid

The rear parking aid operates only with the

ignition is on and reverse gear selected. If

obstacles are detected within operating range

(shown in next illustration), the parking aid

automatically provides an audible proximity

warning.

1. Approximately 600 mm (24 inches).

2. Approximately 1800mm (71 inches).

Note: The outer rear sensors (1) will show

visual detection on the touch-screen, before

the audible warning is given.

Hom

Audi

Clim

Phon

Navi

Vehi

Valet

12:26 pm

Parking aid alert

E94138

E94139

E94140

Parking aid

150

Front and rear parking aid

When both front and rear parking aids are

fitted, a switch is located in the overhead

console.

Pressing the switch turns both the front and

rear parking aids on or off. The switch warning

indicator will come on when the system is

turned on. A switch is not provided when only

a rear parking aid is fitted.

Note: The front parking aid will also operate

when reverse gear is selected.

The front parking aid provides an audible

proximity warning when driving forwards or

reversing.

The front and rear sensors only operate within

a fixed speed range in forward gears and are

not effective when moving forwards above

15 km/h (9 mph).

Objects are detected within the approximate

operating range from the front of the vehicle,

as shown in the illustration above:

1. 600 mm (24 inches).

2. 1800 mm (71 inches).

3. 800 mm (31 inches).

If an obstacle is detected at the front or rear of

the vehicle, a warning tone will be heard from

the front or rear speaker respectively.

Note: The outer rear sensors (1) will show

visual detection on the touch-screen, before

the audible warning is given.

The warning tone increases in rate as the

vehicle approaches the obstacle.

CAUTION

The parking aid system automatically

switches off when the vehicle is moving

above 15 km/h (9 mph) in D, and will need to

be reselected when moving below 15 km/h

(9 mph).

E94141

E94142

151

Parking aid

The front or rear warning tone will become

continuous when the obstacle is detected at or

within 300 mm (12 inches) from the vehicle.

Note: The outer front and rear sensors will

switch off if the distance to an object increases

or remains constant for 3 seconds. The

sensors will reactivate automatically if a new

object is detected within the operating range,

or if the distance to the original object reduces.

Rear fitted accessories

Particular care must be taken when reversing

with rear fitted accessories e.g. bicycle carrier,

as the rear park assist will only indicate the

distance from the bumper to the obstacle.

Cleaning the sensors

Do not clean the sensors with abrasive or sharp

objects or materials.

For reliable operation, the sensors in the front

and rear bumpers should be kept free from ice,

frost and grime.

When using a high pressure spray the sensors

should only be sprayed briefly and not from a

distance of less than 200 mm (8 inches).

System fault

If the system has a fault when engaging reverse

gear or turning on the ignition, then a single,

three second tone will be heard (only once per

ignition cycle) and a pop-up warning will

appear on the touch-screen. If both front and

rear parking aids are fitted, the warning

indicator in the parking aid switch will flash for

three seconds and then switch off, if a fault is

detected.

If a fault is detected, the system is

automatically disabled.

The parking aid may sound spurious tones if it

detects a frequency tone using the same band

as the sensors (e.g. air brakes).

Rear view camera

152

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The system provides a rear view image to

assist in reversing the vehicle.

The camera is positioned centrally and

unobtrusively, just above the rear license plate.

When reverse gear (R) is selected, the rear

view camera displays a wide-angle, colour view

from the rear of the vehicle, displayed on the

touch-screen.

The camera display also incorporates graphic

overlays to aid the driver in assessing vehicle

direction, width and proximity to surrounding

objects. These are detailed under Camera

overlays later in this section.

The camera display on the touch-screen has

priority over the parking aid display. To view

the parking aid display instead, touch the

touch-screen.

If a parking aid sensor is activated with the

camera in use, a corresponding red shaded

area will appear on the camera display to

identify which sensor has been activated.

To cancel the rear view camera display at any

time, touch the touch-screen.

The camera image will not be displayed when

any of the following apply:

•D is selected and the vehicle speed is

greater than 16 km/h (10 mph).

•D is selected for longer than 2 seconds and

the vehicle speed is less than 16 km/h

(10 mph).

WARNINGS

It remains the driver's responsibility

to detect obstacles and estimate the

vehicle's distance from them when

reversing. Some overhanging objects or

barriers, which could possibly cause damage

to the vehicle, may not be detected by the

camera.

Always be vigilant when reversing.

E96469

153

Rear view camera

Camera overlays

A. Solid line: This is the projected wheel

trajectory.

B. Dotted line: This is the safe working width

of the vehicle (including standard exterior

mirrors).

C. Boot access guideline: Do not reverse the

vehicle beyond this point if access to the

boot is required.

D. Rear bumper.

E. Parking sensor activation: A red area will

appear on the camera image, to indicate

which rear parking sensor(s) has been

activated.

JAG1651

JAG1652

CAUTIONS

If, after the ignition has been switched

off, the steering wheel is turned, the

projected wheel trajectory graphics (A) will

display as being straight (as in the second

illustration), until the vehicle is driven for

approximately 10 seconds.

Driving hints

154

RUNNING-IN

Apart from a few precautionary

recommendations, there are no strict

running-in procedures for this vehicle.

By observing the following advisory

precautions you will ensure maximum engine,

transmission and brake life for your vehicle:

Engine

•Allow the engine to reach operating

temperature before operating at engine

speeds over 3 500 rev/min.

•Vary the speed frequently.

•From 1 500 kilometres (940 miles)

onwards, gradually increase performance

of the vehicle up to the permitted

maximum speed.

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of oil consumption is normal.

The rate of consumption will depend on the

following:

•The quality and viscosity of the oil.

•Climatic conditions.

•The speed at which the engine is being

operated.

•Road conditions.

Drivers should expect above normal

consumption when the engine is new, and after

running-in if high speeds are sustained.

Brakes

To ensure that brake pads reach their optimum

wear and performance condition, usually

within 500 kilometres (300 miles), it is

recommended that the following points are

observed.

•Where possible, avoid heavy or harsh

braking, as this can result in damage to the

brake pads and discs.

•Avoid prolonged use of the brakes

(e.g. when descending severe gradients).

•Frequent light application of the brakes is

desirable. This helps to fully bed-in the

brake pads.

These running-in guidelines also apply when

new brake discs or pads have been fitted.

Final drive unit

During the first 1 500 kilometers (940 miles):

•Avoid full throttle applications and do not

exceed 190 km/h (120 mph). Observe the

national speed limits in the country in

which you are travelling.

•Do not participate in motor racing events,

test track days, sports driving schools or

similar for the first 8 000 kilometers

(4 975 miles).

155

Driving hints

ECONOMICAL DRIVING

There are two main factors which influence fuel

economy, the way the vehicle is driven and

maintenance.

Driving tips for economy

•Avoid unnecessary journeys, especially

short stop-start trips.

•Accelerate smoothly and gently from a

stand still.

•Allow time to brake gently and smoothly.

•Be aware of traffic and road conditions

ahead, and take action in time to avoid

hard braking or acceleration.

•When stationary apply the park brake, and

select neutral.

•Turn off the air conditioning when not

needed.

Maintenance and fuel economy

Regular servicing by a Dealer/Authorised

Repairer, along with regular checks by the

driver are essential for vehicle longevity and

fuel economy.

The condition of the engine (oils, filters, spark

plugs, settings etc.) tyre pressures, and wheel

alignment, will all have a bearing on fuel

economy. For this reason it is essential that the

vehicle is checked regularly by the driver and

serviced by an approved Dealer/Authorised

Repairer at the correct intervals.

Note: If you are in any doubt about the

maintenance requirements, intervals, or

checks required, contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer for advice.

Cruise control

156

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Cruise control enables the driver to maintain a

constant road speed without using the

accelerator pedal. This is particularly useful for

motorway cruising, or for any journey where a

constant speed can be maintained for a lengthy

period.

The cruise (speed) control system can be used

by the driver to maintain a selected vehicle

speed above 30 km/h (18 mph).

Adjustment controls on the steering wheel

allow the driver manual control of the system.

Brake operations also influence the cruise

control system.

1. SET - The speed adjustment control thumb

wheel is used to engage cruise control

initially by rolling it upwards. It is also used

to increase (+) or decrease (-) the set

speed until the desired speed is obtained.

2. CANCEL - Cancels cruise control but

retains the set speed in memory.

3. RESUME - Resumes the cruise control set

speed after it has been cancelled.

USING CRUISE CONTROL

Setting vehicle speed

When you are travelling at the speed you

require, roll the speed adjustment control (1)

upwards or downwards to increase or decrease

speed.

Cruise control will engage and maintain the set

speed and you can remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal.

Note: Cruise control will automatically

disengage when the brake pedal is pressed or

when the vehicle speed falls below 30 km/h

(18 mph).

E97088 2

WARNING

Only use cruise control when

conditions are favourable, for

example, straight, dry, open roads

with light traffic.

In certain conditions, such as a steep

downhill gradient, the vehicle speed

may exceed the set cruising speed.

This is because engine braking is unable to

maintain or reduce the vehicle speed. Driver

intervention may be required.

157

Cruise control

Changing the speed

There are two ways to change the set speed:

•Accelerate or decelerate to the desired

speed then roll the speed adjustment

control upwards (+).

•Increase or decrease the speed by rolling

the speed adjustment control upwards (+)

or downwards (-) until the desired speed is

obtained.

Note: The set speed can be increased or

decreased in steps of 2 km/h (1 mph), by

rolling the speed adjustment control upwards

(+) or downwards (-) briefly until the desired

speed is obtained.

Resuming the speed

If the vehicle is accelerated above the set

speed, then the set speed will be resumed

when the accelerator pedal is released.

If CANCEL is pressed, or the brake pedal is

pressed, the cruise control will disengage but

the set speed memory will be retained. Press

RESUME and the vehicle will return to the set

speed.

Note: Cruise control will not resume at speeds

below 30 km/h (18 mph).

RESUME will not operate if the ignition has

been turned off.

Cruise control will switch off and clear the

memory when:

•The ignition system is switched off.

•A fault occurs. The cruise control system

will switch off and cannot be used until the

fault is cleared.

Automatic switch off

Cruise control will switch off but the set speed

will remain in the memory when:

•The CANCEL button is pressed.

•The brake pedal is pressed.

•Speed falls below 30 km/h (18 mph).

•Neutral, Park or Reverse gear positions are

selected.

•Dynamic Stability Control is operating.

•The difference between the actual and set

speed is too great.

•When the vehicle reaches a maximum

speed of 192 km/h (120 mph).

•The accelerator pedal is used to accelerate

beyond the set speed for too long a period.

E97089

CAUTIONS

RESUME should only be used if the

driver is aware of the set speed and

intends to return to it.

It is not recommended to resume set

speed when a low gear is selected as

excessive engine speeds will occur.

Cruise control

158

Message centre information displays

Message Warning

Indicator

Priority

Indicator

Meaning

CRUISE OVERRIDE None None Driver is pressing the accelerator pedal,

overriding Cruise Control function.

Message will disappear when accelerator

pedal is released and Cruise Control

speed is resumed.

CRUISE CANCELLED None None Driver has cancelled cruise control or is

braking.

CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE None None Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control

malfunction.

159

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is

designed to aid the driver to maintain a gap

from the vehicle ahead or a set road speed if

there is no slower vehicle ahead. The system is

intended to provide enhanced operation of the

vehicle when following other vehicles which

are in the same lane and travelling in the same

direction.

The ACC system uses a radar sensor, which

projects a beam directly forward of the vehicle

to detect objects ahead.

The radar sensor is mounted centrally behind

the bumper cover above the cooling aperture,

to provide a clear view forward for the radar

beam.

USING ACC

The system is operated by adjustment controls

mounted on the steering wheel. The driver can

also intervene at any time by use of the brake

or accelerator pedals. The steering wheel

adjustment controls operate as follows:

1. SET - Rotate the thumbwheel upwards (+)

or downwards (-), to increase or decrease

speed, until the desired speed is achieved.

2. Gap increase or decrease. Four settings

available by adjusting the thumb wheel.

3. CANCEL - Cancels but retains the set

speed in memory.

4. RESUME - Resumes the set speed after it

has been cancelled.

WARNING

ACC is not a collision warning or

avoidance system. Additionally, ACC

will not react to:

•Stationary or slow moving vehicles below

10 km/h (6 mph).

•Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.

•Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.

CAUTION

Only use ACC when conditions are

favourable (i.e. main roads with free

flowing traffic).

Do not use in poor visibility, specifically

fog, heavy rain, spray or snow.

E94163

Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

It is the drivers responsibility to stay

alert, drive safely and be in control of the

vehicle at all times.

Keep the front of the vehicle free from

dirt, metal badges or objects, including

vehicle front protectors, which may

prevent the sensor from operating.

Do not use ACC when entering or

leaving a motorway.

CAUTION

E97090

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

160

Setting the speed

Accelerate as normal until the required speed is

reached.

Rotate the speed adjustment control upwards

(+) to store the vehicle speed in the memory

and engage the system.

The set speed will be displayed on the message

centre (e.g. SETSPEED 80 KM/H (50 MPH)).

Changing the speed

There are three ways to change the set speed:

•Accelerate or brake to the desired speed

then rotate the speed adjustment control

upwards (+).

•Increase or decrease the speed by rotating

the speed adjustment control upwards (+)

or downwards (-), until the required set

speed is shown on the message centre.

The vehicle speed will gradually adjust to

the selected speed.

•Increase or decrease the speed in steps of

2 km/h (1 mph) by rotating the speed

adjustment control upwards (+) or

downwards (-) briefly until the desired

speed is obtained.

ACC operates between approximately 30 km/h

and 180 km/h (18 mph and 112 mph)

dependent on the country specification.

Set speeds outside this range will not be

captured.

The ACC may apply the brakes to slow down

the vehicle to the new set speed. The new set

speed will be displayed on the message centre

until ACC is cancelled.

Follow mode gap settings

Once a set speed has been selected, the driver

can release the accelerator and the set road

speed will be maintained.

When a vehicle ahead enters the same lane or

a slower vehicle is ahead in the same lane, the

vehicle speed will be adjusted automatically

until the gap to the vehicle ahead corresponds

to the default gap setting (gap level 3). The

vehicle is now in follow mode.

The amber warning indicator in the

instrument panel will be

illuminated.

The message centre will display the gap set.

E97091

WARNING

When in follow mode, the vehicle will

not decelerate automatically to a stop,

nor will the vehicle always decelerate

quickly enough to avoid a collision, without

driver intervention.

E91497

161

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

The vehicle will then maintain the constant time

gap to the vehicle ahead until:

•The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed

above the set speed.

•The vehicle ahead moves out of lane or out

of view.

•A new gap distance is set.

If necessary, the vehicle brakes will be

automatically applied to slow the vehicle to

maintain the gap to the vehicle in front.

The maximum braking which is applied by the

ACC system is limited and can be overridden by

the driver applying the brakes, if required.

Note: Driver braking will cancel ACC.

If the ACC system predicts that its maximum

braking level will not be sufficient, then an

audible warning will sound while the ACC

continues to brake. DRIVER INTERVENE will be

displayed on the message centre. The driver

should take immediate action.

When in follow mode, the vehicle will

automatically return to the set speed when the

road ahead is clear, for instance when:

•The vehicle in front accelerates or changes

lane.

•The driver changes lane to either side or

enters an exit lane.

The driver should intervene if appropriate.

Changing the follow mode set gap

The gap from the vehicle ahead can be

decreased or increased by rolling the

thumbwheel on the steering wheel. Four gap

settings are available and the selected gap

setting will be displayed on the message centre

when either ACC button is pressed.

Each gap level is indicated by an additional

chevron in front of the vehicle icon in the

message centre (one chevron (gap level 1)

being the shortest, four chevrons (gap level 4)

being the longest). After the ignition is

switched on, the default gap (gap level 3) will

be automatically selected ready for ACC

operation.

Note: When the ignition is switched off, the

gap setting will revert to the default setting

(gap level 3) when switched on again.

Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to select a

gap appropriate to the driving conditions.

Overriding the speed and follow mode

The set speed and gap can be overridden by

pressing the accelerator pedal when cruising at

constant speed or in follow mode. If the vehicle

is in follow mode, the instrument warning

indicator will go out when the ACC is

overridden by the driver using the accelerator

and CRUISE OVERRIDE will be displayed on

the message centre. When the accelerator is

released the ACC function will operate again

and vehicle speed will decrease to the set

speed, or a lower speed if follow mode is

active.

WARNING

Whenever the driver is overriding the

ACC by depressing the accelerator

pedal, the ACC will not automatically

apply the brakes to maintain separation from

any vehicle ahead.

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

162

Automatic low speed switch off

If the speed of the vehicle decreases below

30 km/h (18 mph), the ACC system will be

automatically switched off and the instrument

warning indicator will go out.

If the brakes were being applied by the ACC

system, they will be slowly released.

This will be accompanied by an audible

warning, and DRIVER INTERVENE will be

displayed on the message centre. The driver

must take control.

Automatic switch off

ACC will disengage, but not clear the memory

when;

•the CANCEL button (3) is pressed

•the brake pedal is pressed

•Neutral (N), Park (P) or Reverse (R) gear

positions are selected

•Dynamic Stability Control activates.

ACC will disengage, and clear the memory

when;

•the ignition system is switched off

•maximum vehicle speed is reached

•a fault occurs in the ACC system.

Resuming the speed and follow mode

By pressing the RESUME button (4) after ACC

has been cancelled, for example, after braking,

the ACC will become active again provided that

the set speed memory has not been erased.

The original set speed will be resumed (unless

a vehicle ahead causes the follow mode to

become active) and the set speed will be

displayed in the message centre for four

seconds.

Hints on driving with ACC

The system acts by regulating the speed of the

vehicle using engine control and the brakes.

Gear changes may occur in response to

deceleration or acceleration whilst in ACC.

ACC is not a collision avoidance system.

However, during some situations the system

may provide the driver with an indication that

intervention is required.

An audible alarm will sound, accompanied by

the message DRIVER INTERVENE if the ACC

detects:

•A failure has occurred whilst the system is

active

•That using maximum ACC braking only is

not sufficient.

Note: ACC operates when the gear selector

lever is in position S or D.

Note: When engaged, the accelerator pedal

rests in the raised position. Fully release the

pedal to allow normal ACC operation.

Note: When braking is applied by the ACC, the

vehicle brake lamps will be switched on

although the brake pedal will not move.

CAUTION

RESUME should only be used if the

driver is aware of the set speed and

intends to return to it.

163

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Detection beam issues

Detection issues can occur:

1. When driving on a different line to the

vehicle in front.

2. When a vehicle edges into your lane. The

vehicle will only be detected once it has

moved fully into your lane.

3. There may be issues with the detection of

vehicles in front when going into and

coming out of a bend.

In these cases ACC may brake late or

unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert and

intervene if necessary.

ACC malfunction

If a malfunction occurs during operation of the

system in cruise or follow modes, the ACC

system will switch off and cannot be used until

the fault is cleared. The message DRIVER

INTERVENE appears briefly and is then

replaced by the message CRUISE NOT

AVAILABLE. If malfunction of the ACC or any

related system occurs at any other time, the

message CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE will be

displayed. It will not be possible to activate the

ACC system in any mode.

Accumulations of dirt, snow or ice on the

sensor or cover may inhibit ACC operation.

Fitting of a vehicle front protector or metallised

badges may also affect ACC operation.

The ACC system relies on its radar to detect

objects and constantly scans ahead. If the

radar detects no objects ahead in ACC or follow

mode, then the ACC will be deactivated, the

audible alarm sounds and the message

DRIVER INTERVENE displays briefly. The

message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will then be

displayed.

The same messages may also be displayed

while driving on open roads with few objects

for the radar to detect.

Clearing the obstruction allows the system to

return to normal operation. If the obstruction is

present when ACC is inactive, e.g. on initial

starting or with the ACC system switched off,

the message ACC SENSOR BLOCKED will be

displayed.

Tyres other than those recommended may

have different sizes. This can affect the correct

operation of the ACC.

E91498

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

164

Adverse weather conditions

During adverse weather conditions such as

heavy rain or snowfall, the sensitivity of radar

blockage detection is increased, so that it can

correctly detect any reduced performance

caused by a blocked sensor.

During these conditions, the warning message

ACC SENSOR BLOCKED may be displayed

more frequently, especially in areas where

there are few roadside objects for the radar to

detect.

FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION

Limited detection and warning of objects

ahead, is provided during ACC operation by the

ACC FORWARD ALERT warning. The enhanced

forward alert feature additionally provides

warnings when ACC is not engaged; if an object

is detected close ahead, then the warning tone

and message will be issued. The brakes will not

be applied.

The forward alert system does not initiate any

action. The driver must take appropriate action

when the FORWARD ALERT message is

displayed. However, the system monitors

driver actions (e.g. braking, steering or

indicating) and may not initiate the warning

display if the appropriate action has been taken

early enough.

The Forward alert function may be switched on

or off using the forward alert switch, located

where shown.

When the indicator in the

instrument panel is on, Forward

alert is active.

The sensitivity of the warning may be changed:

•Press the gap decrease button when ACC

is disengaged to display and then decrease

the sensitivity of the alert.

•Press the gap increase button to display

and then increase the sensitivity of the

alert.

FORWARD ALERT is

displayed in the

message centre.

WARNING

Do not use in poor visibility,

specifically fog, heavy rain, spray or

snow.

Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

JAG1303

165

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

ADVANCED EMERGENCY BRAKE

ASSIST

On vehicles fitted with Advanced Emergency

Brake Assist, brake response is improved

during emergency braking when a moving

vehicle is detected close ahead.

Advanced Emergency Brake Assist activates If

the risk of collision increases after the

FORWARD ALERT warning is displayed.

See FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION (page 164).

The brakes are automatically applied gently in

preparation for rapid braking (which may be

noticeable). If the brake pedal is then pressed

quickly, then braking is implemented fully,

even if the pressure on the pedal is light.

See HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ABS

(page 144).

Advanced Emergency Brake Assist is available

at speeds above approximately 7 km/h (5 mph)

and will function even if Forward Alert and

Adaptive Cruise Control are switched off. A

fault with the system will be indicated by the

warning FORWARD ALERT UNAVAILABLE

appearing in the message centre. Advanced

Emergency Brake Assist will not be available

until the fault is rectified.

WARNING

Advanced Emergency Brake Assist, is

an additional safety system and is not

intended to relieve the driver of the

responsibility for exercising due care and

attention when driving.

CAUTION

The system may not react to slow

moving vehicles and will not react to

stationary vehicles or vehicles not

travelling in the same direction as your vehicle.

Advanced Emergency Brake Assist can

only improve braking performance if the

driver applies the brakes.

Warnings may not appear if the distance

to the vehicle ahead is very small or if

steering wheel and pedal movements

are large (e.g. to avoid a collision).

Advanced Emergency Brake Assist

utilises the same radar sensor as

Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward

Alert - the same limitations of performance

apply.

See PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION (page 159).

See USING ACC (page 159).

See FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION

(page 164).

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

166

MESSAGE CENTRE INFORMATION MESSAGES

Message Meaning

CRUISE OVERRIDE Driver is pressing the accelerator pedal overriding cruise control

function. Message will disappear when accelerator pedal is released

and cruise control speed is resumed.

CRUISE CANCELLED Driver has cancelled cruise control or is braking.

CRUISE NOT

AVAILABLE

Cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control malfunction.

DRIVER INTERVENE Action by the driver to apply the brakes is required.

SETSPEED XXX KM/H Speed set for Adaptive Cruise Control.

GAP Set the distance (time gap).

RADAR SENSOR

BLOCKED

Clean the front of the vehicle in the area of the sensor unit (the sensor

is mounted centrally behind the bumper cover above the cooling

aperture).

This message may also appear under the following conditions:

If stone chip protection has been applied.

On rural roads with few roadside objects.

In heavy rain.

FORWARD ALERT

OFF

Forward alert feature has been switched off.

WARNING: A warning will not be given for objects detected in

the vehicle’s path of travel.

FORWARD ALERT Forward Alert feature has been switched on or the setting changed. A

warning will be given for objects detected in the vehicle path of travel.

A longer gap indicates that the system will warn when detected objects

are further away than the previous setting.

Action by the driver to apply the brakes is required.

FORWARD ALERT

UNAVAILABLE

Advanced emergency brake assist and Forward Alert functions are

unavailable.

167

Automatic speed limiter (ASL)

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

ASL can be used in a situation where varying

vehicle speed is likely but a maximum speed

must not be exceeded. For example, where a

local speed limit is 80 km/h (50 mph), the set

speed could be at that limit or just under.

If ASL is not selected, cruise control is always

available by simply rotating the thumb wheel

on the right-hand side of the steering wheel to

set a cruising speed. The ASL button allows the

driver to select between cruise control and the

automatic speed limiter. The ASL can be set to

any speed between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 240

km/h (150 mph).

Note: Although ASL only operates at speeds

between 30 km/h (18 mph) and 240 km/h (150

mph), the maximum speed can be set when the

vehicle is stationary.

When ASL is selected, the warning indicator in

the instrument panel will illuminate. When the

ASL button is pressed again, the light will

extinguish, ASL will be cancelled and cruise

control will be available again.

USING THE ASL

Setting a speed limit

•Press the ASL button.

•Use the thumb wheel (1) to set the

required speed. The message centre

display in the instrument panel will show

the selected speed.

•The set speed can be adjusted at any time

by rotating the thumb wheel (1).

WARNINGS

Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) set

speeds must be within local speed

restriction limits. The driver must

always ensure that a safe speed is set, taking

into account the prevailing traffic and road

conditions.

In certain conditions, such as a steep

downhill gradient, the vehicle speed

may exceed the set speed limit. This

is because engine braking is unable to

maintain or reduce the vehicle speed. Driver

intervention may be required.

E94156

E97092 23

Automatic speed limiter (ASL)

168

Note: The message is also displayed at other

times as an information display.

When ASL is selected and a set speed inserted,

the engine will respond normally up to the set

speed. Further accelerator pedal pressure will

not increase the vehicle speed beyond your set

speed, unless kickdown is initiated, in which

case ASL will be suspended.

Suspending ASL

ASL can be suspended by pressing the

CANCEL button (3). Applying sudden, rapid

acceleration (kickdown) will also suspend ASL.

Resuming ASL

If ASL has been suspended, it can be reinstated

with a single press of the RESUME button (2),

however, ASL will only reinstate if the vehicle

speed is less than the current speed set in

memory and greater than 30 km/h (18 mph).

The message centre will display an appropriate

message if the vehicle speed is too fast to

resume ASL.

Exceeding the set speed

If the set speed is exceeded, e.g. on a steep

downhill section, the message centre will

display an appropriate message along with an

amber warning indicator.

There are three categories of over limit

displays:

•If the set speed is exceeded by up to 3

km/h (1.8 mph), the message centre will

display the message along with an amber

warning indicator.

•If the set speed is exceeded by more than

7 km/h (4 mph), the message centre will

display the message along with a flashing

red warning indicator.

•If the set speed is exceeded by more than

7 km/h (4 mph) for a duration of four

seconds, the message centre will display

the message along with a flashing red

warning indicator and an audible warning

tone.

Use your brakes to rectify the situation.

ASL unavailable

If ASL is not available due to a fault, the

message centre will display an appropriate

message along with an amber warning

indicator.

The message and warning indicator will display

when the driver attempts to use ASL.

When the ignition is switched off, ASL is

deactivated and any set speed is deleted from

memory.

LIMITER SET

XXX km/h (MPH)

LIMITER CANCELLED

TOO FAST TO RESUME

OVER LIMIT XXX km/h (MPH)

LIMITER NOT AVAILABLE

169

Driving dynamics

GENERAL INFORMATION

JaguarDrive Control

JaguarDrive Control is a selectable vehicle

optimisation system, designed to fine-tune the

driving characteristics of the vehicle by

accommodating different driving conditions or

driving styles.

The system allows the performance envelope

of the vehicle to be stretched and prevents the

necessity for a single, compromised

configuration for all conditions, thereby

increasing the vehicle's abilities.

The vehicle systems optimised by JaguarDrive

Control are:

•Engine management.

•Transmission management.

•Dynamic Stability Control and traction

control.

•Adaptive dynamics.

•Active Differential Control (E-diff) -

Supercharged vehicles only.

Note: Changing from one special mode to

another, will introduce noticeably different

vehicle responses. For example, the engine

revs produced by the accelerator position when

a special mode is not selected, may increase or

decrease when a mode is selected.

To familiarise yourself with, and get the best

from, the JaguarDrive Control modes, you

should try out the modes in circumstances

which are safe for you and other road users.

1. Dynamic mode switch.

2. Winter mode switch.

3. DSC mode switch.

WINTER MODE

Press to operate. Designed for use

in slippery conditions, when active,

Winter mode selects 2nd gear for

driving away on level ground (no incline),

softens the responsiveness of the engine and

modifies the gear change strategy. This

ensures that optimum traction is maintained.

Winter mode optimises stability of the vehicle

to suit slippery conditions, when grip is

reduced. The vehicle performs in a more gentle

and controlled manner, to avoid skidding,

allowing more confident progress under

adverse conditions.

Note: Winter mode cannot be active at the

same time as Dynamic mode. Winter mode will

remain selected indefinitely after the ignition is

switched off, until deselected by the driver.

WARNING

It remains the driver's responsibility

to drive safely, according to the

prevailing conditions and within the

law.

JAG1654

Driving dynamics

170

DYNAMIC MODE

(V8 petrol and diesel vehicles only)

Press to operate. Dynamic mode

co-ordinates the vehicle's control

systems to deliver a high

performance driving experience. This setting

enhances key vehicle systems so that the

vehicle's full potential can be exploited. The

vehicle's responses are aimed at involving the

driver more in focused and purposeful driving,

helping swift progress.

Note: When the transmission is set to

permanent manual mode (i.e. using the

paddles to change gear while in Sport mode)

and Dynamic mode is selected, transmission

upshifts are fully controlled by the driver. This

means that the transmission will not change up

a gear automatically, even when the vehicle's

rev limit is reached. When the rev limit is

reached, the gear position indicator in the

message centre will glow amber, to indicate

that the next gear should be selected.

Note: Dynamic mode cannot be active at the

same time as Winter mode. Dynamic mode will

remain selected for approximately six hours

after the ignition is switched off, after which

point it will need to be reselected if required.

STABILITY CONTROL

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is operational

whenever the engine is running, unless it has

been manually switched off. When the system

is operating, the warning indicator in the

instrument panel will flash.

The DSC system controls the Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS), traction control and yaw control

of the vehicle.

The DSC system assists the driver in retaining

directional control of the vehicle in situations

where the vehicle is sliding (understeer or

oversteer). It must not encourage the driver to

drive beyond the limit of adhesion or at speeds

higher than those suitable for the prevailing

road and traffic conditions.

DSC applies braking pressure to individual

wheels if excessive variation is detected. This

ensures that the vehicle follows the driver’s

intended direction of travel as closely as

possible.

Traction control will intervene to control wheel

spin by automatically reducing the power

output from the engine and applying braking to

individual wheels. This improves acceleration,

particularly on surfaces with uneven friction

(e.g. one wheel on ice with another on tarmac).

Note: For recommended DSC mode selection,

refer to the JaguarDrive Control scenarios

section in this handbook.

WARNING

The fact that the vehicle is fitted with

DSC, must never allow the driver to

be tempted into taking risks which

could affect his or her safety or that of other

road users. In all cases, it remains the driver’s

responsibility to drive safely according to the

prevailing conditions.

171

Driving dynamics

TracDSC

TracDSC is an alternative setting of DSC with

reduced system interventions. With TracDSC

engaged, traction may be somewhat increased,

although stability may be reduced compared to

normal DSC. TracDSC is intended for use only

on dry tarmac, by suitably experienced drivers

and should not be selected for other surfaces

or by drivers with insufficient skill and training

to operate the vehicle safely with the TracDSC

function engaged.

The less restrictive TracDSC setting may be

preferred, for example, by expert drivers

engaged in high performance driving on dry

Tarmac surfaces such as tracks and circuits.

Switching between DSC and Trac DSC

•Press and hold the DSC switch for less

than 10 seconds.

•The message centre will temporarily

display either Trac DSC or DSC ON.

•The warning indicator in the instrument

panel will illuminate while Trac DSC is

selected.

•The warning indicator will flash when DSC

or Trac DSC is active.

Note: If cruise control is engaged, it will

automatically disengage if stability control

activates.

Switching between DSC OFF and ON

Switching DSC OFF

•Press and hold the DSC switch for more

than 10 seconds.

•The message centre will display DSC OFF

and a short warning chime will sound.

•The warning indicator in the instrument

panel will illuminate.

Switching DSC ON

If DSC is OFF:

•Press and release the DSC switch.

•The DSC system will switch on, the

message centre will temporarily display

DSC ON.

•The warning indicator in the instrument

panel will be extinguished.

Note: Switching the engine off and then on

again, will always revert DSC status to DSC ON,

regardless of which JaguarDrive Control mode

is selected.

WARNING

Vehicle safety may be reduced by

inappropriate use of TracDSC.

TracDSC should only be used in

suitable conditions.

E95149

Driving dynamics

172

Note: In rare circumstances, when TracDSC is

selected or DSC is off, high acceleration on

rough roads may cause DSC to switch back on.

This prevents high loads on the vehicle

driveline. DSC will subsequently remain on,

unless TracDSC is selected or DSC is switched

off manually.

Stability control indicator

If there is a fault, the warning

indicator will illuminate in the

instrument panel and the message

centre will display DSC NOT AVAILABLE with

an amber backlight.

It is safe to drive the vehicle, but the DSC

system will not activate under wheel spin or

slide conditions. You should seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

Adaptive dynamics

(Supercharged vehicles only)

Jaguar Adaptive dynamics continuously

monitors the road and driver inputs and

optimises the vehicle suspension settings for

ride comfort and control.

The adaptive dynamics system is linked to

Dynamic mode, modifying the suspension

settings for a more sporting character.

If the message centre displays the message

ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT, a fault has been

detected in the adaptive dynamics system.

Seek qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Active Differential Control (E-diff)

(Supercharged vehicles only)

The E-diff improves traction when one driven

wheel has more grip than the other. This

improves progress out of corners and on

patchy or uneven surfaces. The E-diff can also

increase stability in oversteer situations,

depending on road conditions and driver

inputs.

Settings for the E-diff are made automatically,

without the need for driver selection.

If there is a fault with the E-diff system, the

message centre will display EDIFF SYSTEM

FAULT. If DSC is off, then TracDSC will be

selected automatically. The driver can still

switch between DSC modes, as normal and the

vehicle is safe to drive, but seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

Note: If the E-diff is active continuously for an

extended period (e.g. on a patchy surface with

DSC off) then the E-diff may be temporarily

deactivated to prevent overheating. If DSC is

off, then TracDSC will be selected

automatically. The message centre will display

EDIFF NOT AVAILABLE. The driver can still

switch between DSC modes as normal and the

E-diff will become available again automatically

when it has cooled sufficiently.

173

Driving dynamics

JaguarDrive Control scenarios

The table below gives examples of the drive control settings suggested for different driving

scenarios.

Scenario Suggested driver selection

Tyre fitment JaguarDrive

Control

Dynamic

Stability Control

(DSC)

Transmission

Wet grass Standard Winter mode DSC On

(default)

Drive (D)

Very wet tarmac

Slippery boat launch

ramp

Hill descents while

towing on slippery

surfaces

Sport (S) +

Manual

Ice/light snow Standard or All

Season tyres

Drive (D)

Snow ploughed

hard-topped roads

(including black ice)

All Season tyres

Packed snow roads Winter tyres

Deep fresh snow Snow chains Sport (S)

Normal driving

conditions (e.g. dry

tarmac, town driving,

motorway cruising

etc.)

Standard

No driver

selection

required.

Special modes

off.

Drive (D)

Overtaking on a dry

road

Drive (D) or

Sport (S)

Pulling out onto a

busy road in dry

conditions

Favourite country

lane (public road)

Dynamic mode Sport (S)

Sport (S) +

Manual

Private track/race

day

TracDSC

(where conditions

permit)

Fuel and refuelling

174

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

FUEL QUALITY

Water in fuel

Petrol engined vehicles

WARNINGS

Petroleum gasses are highly

flammable, have a low flash point,

and are explosive, especially in

confined spaces. Avoid exposing the gasses to

any potential sources of ignition as the

resulting fire and explosion may cause serious

injuries and/or death.

Only use containers specifically

designed for carrying fuel and always

remove them from the vehicle to fill

them. Failure to do so may result in spillage,

and cause a fire.

Switch off the engine when refuelling,

as it is both a source of extreme

temperatures, and electrical sparks.

The resulting fire and explosion may cause

serious injury and death.

Switch off any personal electronic

devices such as mobile phones, or

music players. They have the

potential to cause electrical sparks. The

resulting fire and explosion may cause serious

injury and death.

Do not smoke, use a naked flame, or

cause sparks. The resulting fire and

explosion may cause serious injury

and death.

Do not overfill the fuel tank.

Overfilling may cause spillage when

the vehicle is driven. Spillage may

also occur if the fuel expands in high ambient

temperatures.

Any modifications to the fuel system

not specifically designed for this

Jaguar are prohibited. Such

modifications in some circumstances, could

result in a fire. All service actions should be

entrusted to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

The presence of any unusual fumes

(e.g. petrol or exhaust fumes) in the

passenger compartment and/or

luggage compartment, should be corrected

immediately by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

If you must drive under these conditions, do

so only with all windows fully open.

CAUTIONS

If the warning WATER IN FUEL is

displayed in the message centre, an

excessive amount of water has collected in the

fuel filter bowl. Seek assistance from a Jaguar

Dealer/Authorised Repairer to have the filter

drained, as soon as possible.

CAUTIONS

Do not use leaded fuels, lead substitutes

or fuel additives. Doing so can cause

damage to the engine, fuel and emission

control systems.

Only use high quality petrol, as using

lower quality fuels can cause damage to

the engine, fuel and emission control systems.

Fuel system cleaning agents should not

be used, unless approved by Jaguar.

Unapproved products may be harmful to fuel

system components on your vehicle.

It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the

vehicle with the correct fuel. If the

vehicle is filled with the wrong type of fuel, do

not start the engine. Call for Roadside

Assistance.

WARNINGS

175

Fuel and refuelling

Unleaded fuel

Unleaded fuel must be used for the emission

control system to operate properly. Its use will

also reduce spark plug fouling, exhaust system

corrosion and engine oil deterioration.

Octane rating

The recommended unleaded fuel should have

an octane rating of 95 RON (Research Octane

Number) or higher. However, you may also use

unleaded fuel with a lower RON, but

performance will be reduced. The minimum

octane rating for fuel to be used is 91 RON.

Note: Using unleaded fuel with a lower octane

rating than recommended, can cause

persistent heavy engine knock (a metallic

rapping noise). If severe, this can lead to

engine damage.

If a heavy knock is detected, even when using

fuel to the recommended octane rating, or if

you hear knock while holding a steady speed

on level roads, consult your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer to have the problem corrected. Failure

to do so is misuse of the vehicle, for which

Jaguar Cars is not responsible. However,

occasional, light knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hill, may occur.

ALTERNATIVE FUELS FOR PETROL

ENGINES

Fuels containing alcohol

Some fuel suppliers sell fuel containing alcohol

without advertising its presence. Where

uncertainty exists, check with the service

centre operator.

Note: Some difficulty in starting may be

encountered when using alcohol blended fuel.

Ethanol

Fuels containing up to 10% Ethanol (grain

alcohol) may be used. Ensure that the fuel has

octane ratings no lower than those

recommended for unleaded fuel. Most drivers

will not notice any operating difference with

fuel containing Ethanol. If a difference is

detected, the use of conventional unleaded fuel

should be resumed.

Methanol

Some fuels contain Methanol (Methyl or wood

alcohol). If you use fuels containing Methanol

the fuels must also contain co-solvents and

corrosion inhibitors for Methanol. Also, do not

use fuels which contain more than 10%

Methanol even if they contain co-solvents and

corrosion inhibitors. Fuel system damage or

vehicle performance problems resulting from

the use of such fuels is not the responsibility of

Jaguar, and may not be covered under the

warranty.

CAUTIONS

Fuel containing alcohol can cause paint

damage, which may not be covered

under the warranty.

CAUTIONS

This vehicle is not suitable for use with

fuels containing more than 10%

Ethanol.

Do not use E85 fuels (85% Ethanol

content). Equipment necessary for the

use of fuels containing more than 10% Ethanol

is not fitted to this vehicle. If E85 fuels are

used, serious engine and fuels system damage

will occur.

CAUTION

Wherever possible avoid using fuel

containing Methanol.

Fuel and refuelling

176

Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether (MTBE)

Unleaded fuel containing an oxygenate known

as MTBE can be used provided that the ratio of

MTBE to conventional fuel does not exceed

15%. MTBE is an Ether based compound

derived from Petroleum, which has been

specified by several refiners as the substance

to enhance the Octane rating of fuel.

Reformulated gasoline

Several petroleum companies have announced

the availability of reformulated fuels. These

fuels are specially formulated to further reduce

vehicle emissions. Jaguar fully supports all

efforts to protect and maintain ambient air

quality and encourages the use of reformulated

gasoline, where available.

DIESEL ENGINED VEHICLES

Use only high quality diesel fuel according to

EN590 or equivalent.

The quality of diesel fuel is variable, depending

on geographic location. Always use premium

or the highest quality fuel available in your

locality. High quality fuel ensures a longer life

for your engine components. Lower grade fuel

contains higher levels of sulphur, which is

detrimental to engine components. If low

quality fuel is used, light coloured smoke may

be evident at the exhaust.

Note: Jaguar vehicles are capable of running

with up to a 5% blend of bio-diesel, in

accordance with European Standard EN590.

Prolonged use of additives is not

recommended. Do not add paraffin or petrol to

diesel fuels.

Winter grade diesel fuel

To make sure of reliable diesel engine

operation during cold seasonal periods, Winter

grade fuel must be used. This fuel is normally

available from fuel retailers during these

periods and the fuel companies adjust the fuel

quality to suit climatic conditions.

If the vehicle is not filled with Winter grade

diesel fuel, it is recommended that the engine

is idled for a period of over two minutes after

starting, to prevent fuel solidification during

operation.

CAUTION

Do not use RME (bio-diesel) except in

the case of those proprietary diesel fuels

which contain a mix of up to 5%. Jaguar can

accept no responsibility for damage caused by

using RME in concentrations greater than 5%.

CAUTIONS

If you inadvertently fill your vehicle with

petrol instead of diesel, do not attempt

to start the engine. Contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer immediately. Attempting

to start the engine with petrol in the fuel tank,

will cause extensive damage to the engine and

fuel system, which will not be covered by your

Jaguar warranty.

Jaguar cars can accept no responsibility

for any damage caused by running your

vehicle with petrol or vegetable oil in the fuel

tank.

177

Fuel and refuelling

Sulphur content

In some countries diesel may contain higher

levers of Sulphur, which could cause damage

to the vehicle, if in doubt contact a local

Dealer/Authorised Repairer for advice.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL

Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel, a

minimum of 4 litres (0.9 gallons) will be

required to restart the engine. The vehicle will

need to be driven 1.6-5 km (1-3 miles) in order

to reset the engine management and

monitoring systems.

Note: If the vehicle does run out of fuel,

seeking qualified assistance is advisable.

Diesel engines

Vehicles with diesel engines are equipped with

a system to prevent the fuel tank from

emptying completely. When the fuel reaches a

minimum level, the system will activate a

reduced power mode (i.e. the engine will not

run properly). This will be followed by the

engine stopping in approximately 1.6 km

(1 mile).

This feature prevents the fuel system from

running dry, which could cause damage to the

vehicle. If the gauge indicates low fuel or the

warning indicator illuminates, the fuel tank

should be refuelled as soon as possible at the

next filling station, with at least 4 litres (0.9

gallons) of fuel.

If the system protection function has activated,

the vehicle must firstly be refuelled, then

restarted using the following procedure:

1. With the brake pedal pressed, press and

hold the engine START/STOP button and

crank the engine for five seconds.

2. Release the START/STOP button.

3. With the brake pedal pressed, press and

release the START/STOP button to crank

the engine. The engine should start within

approximately five seconds.

Note: If the engine does not start, pause for ten

seconds with the ignition in convenience

mode, before repeating the procedure from the

beginning.

FUEL CUT-OFF

The fuel system cut-off forms part of the

Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) fitted

to your vehicle. Following an impact, and

depending on the severity, the fuel pump may

be switched off.

CAUTION

Your vehicle is fitted with a Diesel

Particulate Filter (DPF), the maximum

Sulphur content must not exceed 0.005%.

Using an incorrect fuel will cause serious

damage to the DPF. See DIESEL

PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) (page 135).

CAUTION

Avoid running out of fuel. Doing so can

cause damage to the vehicle's engine,

fuel and emission control systems.

CAUTION

Do not crank the engine for longer than

30 seconds, or damage to the fuel pump

may occur.

Fuel and refuelling

178

Resetting the fuel cut-off

1. Switch the ignition off and wait for one

minute.

2. Turn the ignition on for 30 seconds.

3. Check the vehicle thoroughly for fuel leaks.

If a leak is detected switch the ignition off

immediately.

•Do not start the vehicle if a leak is

present. Seek qualified advice and have

the vehicle recovered.

4. If no leaks are detected, start the vehicle.

FUEL FILLER FLAP

Note: The fuel filler flap cannot be opened

when the alarm system is armed.

The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand

side of the vehicle, at the rear.

1. Ensure that the vehicle is fully unlocked.

Push and release the rear of the flap (in the

area indicated in the illustration) to

unlatch.

2. Pull the fuel filler flap open. The label on

the inside of the flap indicates the correct

fuel for the vehicle.

3. Twist the cap counter-clockwise to undo.

4. Stow the cap on the lip provided on the top

of the hinge arm, as shown.

When replacing the cap, turn it clockwise until

the ratchet clicks. Failure to do so could cause

the Engine malfunction warning indicator to

illuminate.

To close the filler flap, push the flap closed until

it latches.

WARNING

The fuel cut-off should never be reset

if you can smell fuel, or a leak can be

seen. Doing so can lead to a fire

which may cause personal injury or death.

WARNINGS

Open the fuel filler cap slowly and

allow the pressure to release before

fully removing the cap to avoid fuel

spillage due to rapid expansion.

Take note of all warnings and

instructions given on the label affixed

to the inside of the filler flap. Failure to

do so may result in injury or death.

E95150

179

Fuel and refuelling

REFUELLING

Fuel filler

Filling station pumps used for diesel

commercial vehicles deliver fuel at a higher

rate than normal. The higher fill rate can cause

premature cut-off and may cause fuel spillage.

Therefore, it is recommended that only

standard light vehicle pumps are used.

If the fuel cuts off as soon as the trigger on the

pump is operated, check that the correct fuel

has been selected. Immediate cut-off may have

been caused by the fuel guard system.

See DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION

DEVICE (page 180).

Fuel tank capacity

Avoid the risk of running out of fuel and never

intentionally drive the vehicle when the fuel

gauge indicates that the tank is empty. When

refuelling your vehicle after the fuel gauge

reads empty, you may not be able to add the

fuel quantity shown below, as there will be a

small reserve remaining in the tank.

All engines

WARNINGS

When refuelling ensure that all

windows, doors, and sunroof are fully

closed, particularly if young children

or animals are in the vehicle. Fuel vapour

contains harmful chemical compounds, some

of which may cause cancer.

Do not attempt to fill the tank to its

maximum capacity. If the vehicle is to

be parked on a slope, in direct

sunlight or high ambient temperature,

expansion of the fuel could cause spillage.

Filling station pumps are equipped with

automatic cut-off sensing, to avoid fuel

spillage. Fill the tank until the filler nozzle

automatically cuts off supply. Do not attempt

to fill the tank beyond this point.

CAUTIONS

Check the fuel pump information

carefully, to ensure that you are putting

the correct fuel into the vehicle. Filling a

vehicle with the incorrect fuel can cause

serious engine and fuel system damage.

It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the

vehicle with the correct fuel. If the

vehicle is filled with the wrong type of fuel, do

not start the engine. Call for Roadside

Assistance.

Fuel specification:

Petrol 95-98 RON

Diesel EN 590

Total tank capacity:

Petrol 69.5 litres

(15.3 gallons)

Diesel 68.1 litres

(15 gallons)

Fill capacity (when fuel gauge

indicates empty)

64 litres

(14.1 gallons)

Reserve capacity (when fuel

gauge indicates empty)

5.5 litres

(1.2 gallons)

E95151

Fuel and refuelling

180

DIESEL MISFUELLING PROTECTION

DEVICE

Diesel engine vehicles in some markets are

equipped with a misfuelling protection device,

incorporated into the fuel filler neck, designed

to alert that the wrong fuel type has been

selected. If the narrow filler nozzle fitted to

pumps delivering unleaded petrol is correctly

inserted (i.e. fully inserted) into the filler neck,

the misfuel protection device will activate.

The protection device continually interrupts the

fuel flow from the pump, until the protector

mechanism in the filler neck is reset.

When activated, the yellow protection device

will be visible in the filler neck. The device will

need to be reset before the tank can be

correctly filled with diesel fuel. This is achieved

using the reset tool, located in the luggage

compartment, clipped onto the battery

restraining bar.

Note: It is the driver’s responsibility to fill the

vehicle with the correct fuel. The diesel

misfuelling protection device only reduces the

risk of filling the vehicle with the incorrect fuel.

Note: When refuelling the vehicle using a

disposable fuel canister, use a canister

designed for diesel fuel where possible. The

spout on petrol canisters may activate the

protection device. The device may also be

activated by fuel pumps with a smaller nozzle

than those fitted to standard diesel pumps.

Resetting the protection device

To reset the misfuelling protection device:

1. Insert the reset tool (with the teeth

uppermost) into the filler neck opening, as

far as it will go. The triangular section on

the reset tool stops on the protection

device at the required insertion depth.

2. Pivot the reset tool handle downwards to

engage the teeth into the protection device.

3. Keeping the reset tool handle held down,

slowly pull the reset tool out of the filler

neck to reset the misfuelling protection

device.

Note: To ensure that the protection device is

correctly reset, check that the yellow protector

is no longer visible in the filler neck.

After resetting the misfuelling protection

device, remove the tool from the filler neck and

secure it to the battery restraining bar. If

subsequent driveability difficulties are

encountered, seek assistance from your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

WARNINGS

When the misfuelling protection

device is activated, it could cause fuel

to be discharged from the filler neck.

CAUTIONS

Using the incorrect fuel can result in

major damage to your vehicle’s engine

and fuel system.

JAG1618

181

Fuel and refuelling

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures shown below have been calculated using a standard testing

procedure (the new EC test procedure from Directive 99/100/EC), and produced in accordance with

The Passenger Car Fuel Consumption (Amendment) Order 1996.

Under normal use, a vehicle's actual fuel consumption figures may differ from those achieved

through the test procedure, depending on driving technique, road and traffic conditions,

environmental factors, vehicle load and condition.

Urban cycle

The urban test cycle is carried out from a cold start and consists of a series of accelerations,

decelerations and periods of steady speed driving and engine idling. The maximum speed attained

during the test is 50 km/h (30 mph) with an average speed of 19 km/h (12 mph).

Extra-urban cycle

The extra-urban test cycle is carried out immediately after the urban test. Approximately half of the

test comprises steady-speed driving, while the remainder consists of a series of accelerations,

decelerations and engine idling. The maximum test speed is 120 km/h (75 mph) and the average

speed 63 km/h (39 mph). The test is carried out over a distance of 7 km (4.3 miles).

Combined

The combined figure is an average of the urban and extra-urban test cycle results, which has been

weighted to take account of the different distances covered during the two tests.

For additional information on fuel consumption figures and exhaust emissions, visit the Vehicle

Certification Agency (VCA) website at http://www.vcacarfueldata.org.uk/.

Variant Urban Extra-urban Combined CO² emissions

g/km

3.0 V6 Diesel 9.5 l/100 km

(30.0 mpg)

5.5 l/100 km

(51.3 mpg)

6.8 l/100 km

(42.0 mpg)

179

3.0 V6 Petrol 15.8 l/100 km

(17.8 mpg)

7.5 l/100 km

(37.8 mpg)

10.5 l/100 km

(26.8 mpg)

249

5.0 V8 Petrol -

Normally aspirated

17.3 l/100 km

(46.3 mpg)

7.8 l/100 km

(36.4 mpg)

11.1 l/100 km

(25.4 mpg)

264

5.0 V8 Petrol -

Supercharged

18.7 l/100 km

(15.1 mpg)

8.7 l/100 km

(32.4 mpg)

12.5 l/100 km

(22.5 mpg)

292

Load carrying

182

GENERAL INFORMATION

Weights and load capacities

Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure

that the maximum weights are not exceeded,

and that the load is distributed correctly within

the vehicle.

Information and values for the maximum

weights can be found in the Weights section.

See WEIGHTS (page 259).

Roof racks

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTS

Four load securing rings are provided in the

rear luggage area to assist in safely securing

items carried.

Note: A range of approved luggage retention

accessories are available from your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE

On vehicles not fitted with a spare wheel, there

is a storage compartment beneath the luggage

compartment floor. Lift the hatch for access

and hook the strap over the upper boot seal to

keep the hatch open.

CAUTION

Your vehicle is not designed for use with

a roof rack. Do not fit a roof rack to the

vehicle, as damage may result.

WARNINGS

All items carried in the luggage area

should be properly secured. Loose

items can cause serious injury or

death in the event of an accident or sudden

manoeuvre.

E95152

183

Towing

TOWING A TRAILER (V6 petrol and

diesel vehicles only)

Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure

that the towing vehicle, and the trailer are being

used correctly, and in accordance with

manufacturers recommendations and any

applicable legislation.

Your Dealer/Authorised Repairer and main

motoring and caravanning organisation can

advise you on towing, towing weight capacities

and about regulations that apply in other

countries.

The following are important points of safety,

stability and comfort, upon which further

advice should be sought:

•Maximum braked towing weight is

permissible, provided that long periods of

uphill driving on gradients over 8% are not

undertaken.

•In high altitude mountainous regions, the

thinner atmosphere can reduce engine

performance. Above 1000 metres (3250

feet), the stipulated maximum permitted

gross train weight must be reduced by

10% for every 1000 metres (3250 feet) in

altitude.

E95507

WARNINGS

Never exceed the maximum weights

for either the vehicle, or the trailer.

Doing so can cause accelerated wear

and damage to the vehicle. It can also

adversely affect vehicle stability and braking,

which in turn can lead to loss of control and

increased braking distance resulting in a

rollover or crash.

To preserve handling and stability,

only fit Jaguar approved towing

accessories.

Never use towing eyes or lashing

points to tow a trailer. They have not

been designed for this purpose and

doing so may cause them to fail resulting in

injury or death.

When towing, do not exceed 100

km/h (60 mph) or 80 km/h (50 mph)

if a temporary spare wheel is in use.

Towing

184

Diesel engine vehicles

The diesel engine management system

incorporates sensors to determine optimum

performance. It is also designed to protect the

engine when arduous conditions are

encountered during towing. When ambient

temperature exceeds 40°C (104°F), the engine

coolant temperature may increase above

normal operating level. If this occurs, the

management system will initiate a series of

actions to restore normal operating conditions.

The actions may include:

•A message centre message.

•Engine performance reduction.

•Air conditioning system cycling. The

system temperature output will fluctuate

between hot and cold, in order to dissipate

engine heat. If engine overheat persists,

the air conditioning will move to

continuous heat output.

It is advisable to bring the vehicle and trailer to

a convenient stop and allow the engine to idle

until normal temperature is restored. Do not

turn off the engine.

Trailer electrical connection

Note: The rear parking sensors are

automatically disabled when the trailer

electrical connection is made using Jaguar

approved towing equipment.

The vehicle's electrical system has been

designed to support all towing requirements,

and comply with legal requirements for the

specific territory in which the vehicle is first

sold.

LEVELLING

To maintain vehicle stability, it is essential that

the trailer is loaded so that it remains parallel to

the ground. This is particularly important when

towing twin axled trailers.

CAUTION

Only connect approved electrical

circuits, which are in good condition to

the trailer socket. Connecting incorrect, or

faulty circuits may seriously damage the

vehicle's electrical circuits.

E95506

185

Towing

RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS

Nose/tongue weight must be the greater of

50 kg (110 lbs) or 7% of the actual trailer

weight, up to the maximum tow hitch load.

Nose/tongue weight can be measured using a

proprietary brand of nose weight indicator.

If it is necessary to increase the nose/tongue

weight up to the maximum allowed, the vehicle

load should be reduced accordingly. This

ensures that the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW),

and maximum rear axle load, are not exceeded.

Note: When towing the maximum permissible

gross vehicle weight can be increased by a

maximum of 100 kg (220 lb.) provided that the

road speed is limited to 100 km/h (60 mph).

Note: When calculating rear axle loading,

remember that the trailer nose/tongue weight,

the load in the vehicle's luggage area and the

weight of rear seat passengers must all be

added together.

Towing weights - Australia only

The weight of a trailer must not exceed 1.5

times the towing vehicle’s weight. The

nose/tongue weight must be a minimum of 7%

of gross caravan/trailer weight, up to a

maximum of 350 kg (722 lbs).

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS

•The trailer should be parallel to the ground

when loaded and connected to the vehicle.

•When calculating the laden weight of the

trailer remember to include the weight of

the trailer, plus the weight of the load.

•If the load can be divided between the

vehicle and trailer, loading more weight

into the vehicle will generally improve

stability. Do not exceed the vehicle's

weight limits. See WEIGHTS (page 259).

•Ensure that all applicable regulations and

legislation are complied with when loading

and towing a trailer.

•Increase rear tyre pressures of the towing

vehicle to those for maximum vehicle

loading conditions.

•Ensure trailer tyre pressures are set to

trailer manufacturer's recommendations.

•If the vehicle is loaded to maximum Gross

Vehicle Weight (GVW) the nose weight is

limited (see Towing weights table).

•Ensure that a suitable breakaway cable or

secondary coupling is used. Refer to the

trailer manufacturer's instructions for

guidance.

•Ensure that the tow ball is secure.

•Check the operation of all trailer lights.

Maximum permissible

towing weights

Unbraked trailers 750 kg (1653 lb.)

Trailers with

overrun brakes

1850 kg (4080 lb.)

Nose/Tongue

weight

75 kg (165 lb.)

WARNING

Do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight (GVW), maximum rear axle

weight, maximum trailer weight, or

nose/tongue weight. Exceeding any of these

limits could cause instability and loss of

control. See WEIGHTS (page 259).

WARNING

Do not loop the breakaway cable over

the tow ball as it may slide off.

Towing

186

TOW BAR

Tow bar dimensions and mounting points

Note: Dimensions given are in millimetres.

E95505

479

677 509 509

1222

506

507

187

Vehicle care

CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels with soap and water, this

should be done more frequently when the

wheels are exposed to heavy dirt deposits, salt,

clay etc. If you are unsure how often to clean

the wheels in particular conditions, seek advice

from your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Jaguar approved wheel cleaner should be used

to remove heavy soiling.

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

Washing the vehicle paintwork

Remove heavy deposits of mud and dirt with a

hose before washing the vehicle.

When salt is used on the roads, wash the

vehicle immediately after encountering such

conditions. Clean undersides and wheel arches

using a high pressure jet.

Wash the vehicle frequently using a sponge

and generous quantities of cold or luke warm

water containing a suitable car shampoo. Rinse

thoroughly and dry with a chamois leather or

synthetic substitute.

For best results, do not wash the vehicle under

strong sunlight. Always allow the vehicle to

cool down before washing.

Do not use a dry cloth to wipe dirty paintwork.

Dust and gritty substances are abrasive and

will scratch the paintwork. Remove dirt using a

cellulose sponge and plenty of warm (never

hot) water. Rinse off with clean water and dry

using a clean, damp chamois leather. Wash the

vehicle frequently.

CAUTION

Do not use non-approved, or acid based

wheel cleaners. These can damage the

wheel coating which may lead to corrosion of

the wheel rims.

CAUTIONS

Some high pressure cleaning systems

are sufficiently powerful to penetrate

door and window seals, and damage trim and

door locks. Never aim the water jet directly at

the engine air intake, heater air intakes, body

seals (doors, sunroof, windows etc.) or at any

components which may be damaged (lamps,

mirrors, exterior trim etc.).

Ensure that you read and comply with all

warnings and instructions supplied with

any cleaning products.

Never use cleaning products which are

not approved for use on vehicles.

CAUTION

Substances which are corrosive, such

as bird droppings, tree resin, dead

insects, tar spots, road salt and industrial fall

out, can damage the vehicle's paintwork. Any

such deposits should be removed as soon as

possible to prevent damage.

E94168

Vehicle care

188

Do not use household soaps or detergents. The

use of Jaguar Vehicle Shampoo is

recommended.

Note: The vehicle's brightwork should be

cleaned using a sponge and generous

quantities of cold or lukewarm water only.

Rinse thoroughly and dry with a chamois

leather or synthetic substitute.

Using an automatic wash

Note: Regular use of automatic car washes

tends to dull the lustre of the paintwork.

1. Drive up to the entry of the car wash and

onto the conveyor.

2. Select N (Neutral) using the JaguarDrive

selector.

3. Press and release the engine START/STOP

button to stop the engine. The JaguarDrive

selector should remain raised and the

selector and message centre should

indicate that N is selected.

4. The vehicle should remain in this condition

while it is conveyed through the car wash.

5. At the end of the wash cycle, when directed

to start the engine by the car wash

instructions, press the brake pedal and

press and release the engine START/STOP

button to start the engine.

6. Select D (Drive) using the JaguarDrive

selector and drive away.

Do not start the engine or change the

JaguarDrive selector position during the car

wash.

After leaving the car wash, switch on the

windscreen wiper immediately to remove water

and prevent a build up of wax.

Underbonnet cleaning

CAUTIONS

Commercially operated automatic car

washes, jet washes and power-operated

mops, are not recommended. The detergents

used can contain certain chemicals which

may, over time, be detrimental to some

exterior parts of the vehicle. Prolonged usage

of automatic car washes and power-operated

mops will also cause fine scratches in the paint

surface.

Ensure that Auto wipe is not selected

when entering a car wash, or damage to

the wiper blades and arms can occur if they

operate during the wash cycle.

Ensure that when using an automatic

drive through car wash, N (Neutral) is

selected and that the ignition is left in

convenience mode for the duration of the

wash.

CAUTIONS

Do not use a high pressure washer or

steam cleaner in the engine

compartment. Damage to components could

occur.

Ensure that the brake fluid reservoir is

kept dry at all times. Only use a clean,

dry cloth to clean the brake fluid cap and

reservoir.

189

Vehicle care

Glass surfaces

Clean the rear window with a soft cloth to avoid

damaging the heating element. Do not scrape

the glass or use any abrasive cleaning fluid.

Mirror glass is particularly susceptible to

damage. Wash with soapy water. Do not use

abrasive cleaning compounds or metal

scrapers to remove ice.

The following products will ensure glass

surfaces and windscreen wipers are kept in

good condition:

•Jaguar Screen Clean Paste - Apply only to

the windscreen exterior to ensure effective

operation of the windscreen wiper.

•Jaguar Glass Cleaner - Interior and exterior

of all other glass surfaces.

•Jaguar Screen Wash - Washer reservoir

additive.

•Jaguar Winter Care Kit comprising de-icer,

ice scraper, anti-mist wipe cloth and aerial

cleaner - for use in adverse weather

conditions.

Cleaning the rear screen

To avoid damaging the heating elements when

cleaning the inside of the rear screen, use only

a soft damp cloth/chamois leather. Do not use

solvents or sharp objects to clean the glass.

Removing grease and tar

Remove grease or tar with Jaguar Tar Remover

or methylated spirit (alcohol). White spirit is

also effective, but must not be applied to

rubber, particularly the windscreen wiper

blades.

Bird droppings

Do not allow bird droppings or tree sap to

harden. Remove from paintwork immediately

with a lukewarm soap and water solution.

Polishing

For maximum protection against road dust,

salts, industrial fall-out etc., it is recommended

that the vehicle is polished regularly using

Jaguar polish and a polishing cloth.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

CAUTION

Ensure that after using methylated or

white spirit, the area is washed

immediately with soapy water, to remove all

traces of spirit.

CAUTION

Chrome polish, or other abrasive

cleaners, must not be used on the

vehicle's brightwork. The vehicle's brightwork

should be cleaned using a sponge and

generous quantities of cold or lukewarm water

only. Rinse thoroughly and dry with a chamois

leather or synthetic substitute.

WARNING

Ensure that you read all of the

information and instructions for use

provided with cleaning products.

Some products contain substances that are

harmful and can cause health problems if used

incorrectly.

CAUTIONS

Some products, if used incorrectly can

cause damage to the interior surfaces of

the vehicle.

To prevent airbag damage, the steering

wheel centre pad and other areas

containing airbags should only be cleaned

sparingly with a damp cloth, warm water and a

non-detergent soap. Do not allow these areas

to be flooded with chemical solvents, liquids,

furniture cream or polishes.

Vehicle care

190

Leather

Leather is an easy to maintain natural product.

However, dust and substances can penetrate

the pores and crease the leather, causing

surface wear and brittleness.

To prevent ingrained dirt and staining, inspect

the seat upholstery regularly and clean every

one to two months, as follows:

•Wipe off fine dust from the seat surfaces

using a clean, damp, non-coloured cloth.

Change frequently to a clean area of cloth,

to avoid abrasive action on the leather

surface. Avoid over-wetting.

•If this is not sufficient, use a cloth which

has been dampened with warm soapy

water and then wrung out. Use only mild

non-caustic soap.

•Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner for heavily

soiled areas. Dry off and rub with a clean

soft cloth, changing surfaces regularly.

When staining (e.g. from clothing) or spillage

occurs, clean the affected area immediately as

described above.

Use Jaguar Leather Cleaner several times a

year to maintain its appearance and

suppleness. The cleaner will nourish and

moisturise and help to improve the surface

protective film against dust and substances.

•Do not use solvents. Do not use

detergents, furniture polish or household

cleaners. While these products may

initially give impressive results, their use

will lead to rapid deterioration of the

leather and will invalidate the warranty.

Jaguar recommend a basic set of products

that have been specially selected for the

type of leather in your vehicle.

•Dark clothing may stain leather seats just

like other upholstery products.

•Sharp objects such as belts, zip fasteners,

rivets, etc., can leave permanent scratches

and scratch marks on the leather surface.

•Unless spillages such as tea, coffee or ink

are washed away immediately, permanent

staining may have to be accepted.

If a valet service is used, ensure that the

specialist concerned is aware of, and follows,

these instructions precisely.

Cloth and fabric

Use Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, following the

instructions. Avoid over-wetting.

Removing stains

Most stains on woollen fabric can be removed

if treatment is carried out immediately, before

the stain has a chance to dry-in.

Most stains can be treated with one of three

cleaning fluids: Jaguar Upholstery Cleaner, dry

cleaning fluid or clean water. Follow the

instructions on the package.

Instrument pack, clock, and audio

equipment

Only use a soft dry cloth to clean the

instrument pack, clock and audio equipment.

Do not use cleaning fluids or sprays.

CAUTIONS

Never use soap, ammonia, bleach or

other cleaners intended for use on hard

surfaces.

Do not use upholstery cleaner on

electrical equipment such as fascia

switches.

When cleaning around electrical

equipment such as switches, ensure

that fluids do not leak into any gaps around the

components or between panels or trim.

191

Vehicle care

Carpet and mats

Marks or stains can be removed by gentle

scrubbing with a weak solution of soap and

warm water.

For more stubborn stains a commercially

available carpet cleaner should be used.

Seat belts

Extend the seat belts fully, then use warm

water and a non-detergent soap to clean. Allow

the seat belts to dry naturally whilst fully

extended and do not allow the belts to retract

until fully dry.

Note: Whilst cleaning the seat belt, take the

opportunity to examine the webbing for

damage and wear. Any wear or damage should

be reported to, and rectified by, a Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

Airbag module covers

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE

Regularly inspect the paintwork for damage.

Any stone chips, fractures, or deep scratches,

in the paint/bodywork should be repaired

promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly, and

if left untreated can result in expensive repairs.

Minor chips and scratches can be touched up

using materials and advice available from a

Dealer/Authorised Repairer. Larger areas of

damage will require professional repair, and

you should consult a Dealer/Authorised

Repairer.

WARNING

Do not allow any water, cleaning

products, or fabric from cloths to

enter the seat belt mechanism. Any

substance which enters the mechanism may

affect the performance of the seat belt in an

impact.

WARNINGS

Airbag covers should only be cleaned

using a slightly dampened cloth, and

a small amount of upholstery cleaner.

Do not allow the airbag covers, or

surrounding areas, to become

contaminated with liquids. Any

substance which enters the mechanism, can

prevent correct deployment of an airbag

during an impact.

Maintenance

192

GENERAL INFORMATION

Regular systematic maintenance is the key to

ensuring the continued reliability and efficiency

of your vehicle.

Maintenance is the owner's responsibility and

you must ensure that owner maintenance

operations, oil services, inspections and brake

fluid and coolant changes are carried out when

required and according to the manufacturer's

recommendations.

The routine maintenance requirements for your

vehicle are shown in the Service Portfolio book.

Most of this necessary workshop maintenance

requires specialised knowledge and

equipment, and should preferably be entrusted

to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Service Portfolio

The Service Portfolio book includes a Service

Record section, which enables a record to be

kept of all the servicing and inspections that are

carried out on the vehicle. This section of the

book also has an area for brake fluid changes

to be recorded.

Ensure your service provider signs and stamps

the book after each service and inspection.

Owner maintenance

In addition to the routine services and

inspections, a number of simple checks must

be carried out more frequently. These checks

can be carried out by the owner and advice is

given on the pages that follow.

Daily checks

•Operation of lamps, horn, direction

indicators, wipers, washers and warning

indicators.

•Operation of seat belts and brakes.

•Look for fluid deposits underneath the

vehicle that might indicate a leak.

Condensation drips from the air

conditioning is normal.

CAUTION

Severe damage to the electrical system

and electronic components can occur, if

any attempt is made to diagnose faults in the

electrical system using conventional

diagnostic equipment (e.g. the use of test

lamps or low impedance voltmeters). The

fitting of any electrical accessory should only

be entrusted to a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

CAUTION

Any significant or sudden drop in fluid

levels, or uneven tyre wear, should be

reported to a qualified technician without

delay.

193

Maintenance

Weekly checks

•Engine oil level (non-electronic dipstick

vehicles). See ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6

Petrol engines (page 197).

•Engine coolant check. See ENGINE

COOLANT CHECK (page 204).

•Brake fluid level. See BRAKE FLUID

CHECK (page 206).

•Power steering fluid level. See POWER

STEERING FLUID CHECK (page 208).

•Screen washer fluid level. See WASHER

FLUID CHECK (page 209).

•Tyre pressures and condition. See TYRE

CARE (page 217).

•Operate air conditioning. See AUTOMATIC

CLIMATE CONTROL (page 116).

Note: The engine oil level on V6 petrol engines,

should be checked more frequently if the

vehicle is driven for prolonged periods at high

speeds. The engine oil level on diesel and V8

petrol engines is checked automatically at all

times by the electronic dipstick.

Severe driving conditions

When a vehicle is operated in severe

conditions, more frequent attention must be

paid to servicing requirements.

Severe driving conditions include:

•Driving in dusty and/or sandy conditions.

•Driving on rough and/or muddy roads

and/or wading.

•Driving in extremely hot or cold

conditions.

•Driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials.

•Towing a trailer or driving in mountainous

conditions.

Contact your Dealer/Authorised Repairer for

advice.

Emission control

Your vehicle is fitted with various items of

emission and evaporative control equipment,

designed to meet specific territorial

requirements. You should be aware that

unauthorised replacement, modification or

tampering with this equipment by an owner or

repair shop, may be unlawful and subject to

legal penalties.

In addition, engine settings must not be

tampered with. These have been established to

ensure that your vehicle complies with

stringent exhaust emission regulations.

Incorrect engine settings may adversely affect

exhaust emissions, engine performance and

fuel consumption. They may also cause high

temperatures, which will result in damage to

the catalytic converter and the vehicle.

Road testing dynamometers (rolling

roads)

Because your vehicle is equipped with anti-lock

brakes, it is essential that any dynamometer

testing is carried out only by a qualified person,

familiar with the dynamometer testing and

safety procedures practised by

Dealers/Authorised Repairers.

CAUTION

Ensure that you take notice of any

message centre information and

warnings relating to engine oil level (V8 petrol

and diesel engines only). Top-up the level

when advised to do so. See ENGINE OIL

CHECK - V8 Petrol engines (page 199).

Maintenance

194

Safety in the garage Fuel system

Poisonous fluids

Fluids used in motor vehicles are poisonous

and should not be consumed or brought into

contact with open wounds. These include;

battery acid, antifreeze, brake, clutch and

power steering fluid, petrol, diesel, engine oil

and windscreen washer additives.

For your own safety, always read and obey all

instructions printed on labels and containers.

Used engine oil

Prolonged contact with engine oil may cause

serious skin disorders, including dermatitis

and cancer of the skin. Always wash

thoroughly after contact.

It is illegal to pollute drains, water

courses or soil. Use authorised

waste disposal sites to dispose of

used oil and toxic chemicals.

WARNINGS

If the vehicle has been driven

recently, do not touch exhaust and

cooling system components until the

engine has cooled.

Never leave the engine running in an

unventilated area - exhaust gases are

poisonous and extremely dangerous.

Do not work beneath the vehicle with

the wheel changing jack as the only

means of support.

Keep your hands and clothing away

from drive belts, pulleys and fans.

Some fans may continue to operate

after the engine has stopped.

Remove metal wrist bands and

jewellery, before working in the

engine compartment.

Do not touch electrical leads or

components while the engine is

running, or with the starter switch

turned on.

Do not allow tools or metal parts of

the vehicle to make contact with the

battery leads or terminals.

WARNINGS

Under no circumstances should any

part of the fuel system be dismantled

or replaced by anyone other than a

suitably qualified vehicle technician. Failure to

comply with this instruction, may result in fuel

spillage with a consequent serious risk of fire.

Ensure sparks and naked lights are

kept away from the engine

compartment.

Wear protective clothing, including,

where practicable, gloves made from

an impervious material.

195

Maintenance

OPENING AND CLOSING THE

BONNET

Opening the bonnet

1. Pull the bonnet release handle located in

the left-hand front footwell.

2. Lift the bonnet safety catch lever located

below the centre point of the bonnet, and

raise the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet

1. Lower the bonnet until the safety catch

engages. Using both hands, press the

bonnet down until the catches click.

2. Check that both catches are fully engaged

by attempting to lift both sides of the front

edge of the bonnet. This should be free

from all movement.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to open the bonnet if the

pedestrian protection system has

deployed. See PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

(page 66).

E95157

WARNING

Do not drive with the bonnet retained

by the safety catch alone.

Maintenance

196

ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW

1. Washer fluid

2. Brake fluid (right-hand drive)

3. Brake fluid (left-hand drive)

4. Engine oil - V8 petrol engines

5. Engine oil - Diesel engines

6. Engine oil - V6 petrol engines

7. Engine oil dipstick - V6 petrol engines

8. Power steering

9. Coolant - V8 petrol engines

10. Coolant - Diesel and V6 petrol engines

Washer fluid reservoir cap (Blue)

Brake fluid reservoir cap (Yellow)

Engine oil filler caps (Black)

JAG1649

WARNINGS

While working in the engine

compartment, always observe the

safety precautions listed under Safety

in the garage. See GENERAL INFORMATION

(page 192).

Do not drive the vehicle if there is a

possibility that leaked fluid will come

into contact with a hot surface, such

as the exhaust. A resulting fire may cause

death or serious injury.

E96100

E96101

JAG1635

197

Maintenance

Engine oil dipsticks (Red/yellow) - V6

Petrol only

Power steering fluid reservoir cap

(Black)

Coolant reservoir cap (Black)

ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Petrol

engines

The oil consumption of an engine is influenced

by many factors. Under high loads an engine

will consume more oil than usual. Diesel

engines consume slightly more oil than petrol

engines.

Above normal oil consumption should be

expected when the engine is new.

Check the oil level weekly, when the engine is

cold and with the vehicle resting on level

ground.

E95160

E95161

E96102

CAUTIONS

If the message ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

LOW is displayed, stop the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so and seek qualified

assistance. Do not start the engine until the

cause has been identified and rectified.

Your vehicle’s warranty may be

invalidated if damage is caused by the

use of improper engine oil. Low quality or

obsolete oils do not provide the protection

required by modern, high performance

engines. Failure to use an oil that meets the

required specification could cause excessive

engine wear, a build up of sludge and deposits

and increased pollution. It could also lead to

engine failure.

Do not use oil additives of any type as

engine damage could occur. Use only

specified lubricants.

Maintenance

198

Checking the oil level

Note: If it is necessary to check the oil level

when the engine is hot, switch off the engine

and let stand for five minutes to allow the oil to

drain into the sump. Do not start the engine.

1. Withdraw the dipstick (1) and wipe the

blade clean with a lint free cloth.

2. Fully re-insert the dipstick and withdraw

again to check the oil level. Never allow the

oil level to fall below the lower mark or

notch on the dipstick.

As a general guide, if the level on the dipstick:

•Is nearer to the upper mark or notch than

the lower, add no oil.

•Is nearer to the lower mark or notch than

the upper, add half a litre (one pint) of oil.

•Is below the lower mark or notch, add one

litre (two pints) of oil and re-check the level

after a further five minutes.

Topping up the oil

1. Unscrew the oil filler cap (2).

2. Add oil to maintain the level between the

MIN and MAX marks or notches on the

dipstick. Clean up any oil spilled during

topping-up.

3. Check the oil level again after 5 minutes.

It is essential to use the correct specification

oil, and to ensure it is suitable for the climatic

conditions in which the vehicle is to be

operated.

Note: The approximate quantity of oil required

to raise the level from MIN to MAX on the

dipstick is 1.0 litre (1.76 pints).

JAG1524

CAUTIONS

Your vehicle warranty may be

invalidated if damage is caused by using

oil that does not meet the required

specification.

Failure to use an oil that meets the

required specification could cause

excessive engine wear, a build up of sludge

and deposits, and increase pollution. It could

also lead to engine failure.

Overfilling with oil could result in severe

engine damage. Oil should be added in

small quantities and the level re-checked to

ensure that the engine is not overfilled.

199

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL CHECK - V8 Petrol

engines

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of oil consumption is normal.

The rate of consumption will depend on the

following:

•The quality and viscosity of the oil.

•Climatic conditions.

•The speed at which the engine is being

operated.

•Road conditions.

Drivers should expect above normal

consumption when the engine is new.

Checking the oil level

For an accurate oil level reading to be taken, the

following conditions must be met:

•The vehicle needs to be parked on level

ground.

•The oil level should be checked when the

oil is hot. It is therefore recommended that

a reading is taken after a journey.

•The vehicle needs to stand for

approximately 10 minutes after the engine

is switched off, to allow the oil to drain

back into the sump.

Note: The system will not give a reading until

the oil level has stabilised.

Once the above conditions are met, check the

oil level as follows:

1. Switch on the ignition - do not start the

engine.

2. Set the transmission to Park (P).

3. Press the TRIP button on the end of the

left-hand column stalk repeatedly, until the

oil can icon is displayed at the bottom of

the message centre.

4. The oil level and topping-up advice will be

shown in the message centre. Top-up as

instructed.

CAUTIONS

It is recommended that the oil level is

checked weekly. If any significant or

sudden drop in oil level is noted you should

seek qualified assistance immediately.

Your vehicle’s warranty may be

invalidated if damage is caused by the

use of improper engine oil. Low quality or

obsolete oils do not provide the protection

required by modern, high performance

engines. Failure to use an oil that meets the

required specification could cause excessive

engine wear, a build up of sludge and deposits

and increased pollution. It could also lead to

engine failure.

Do not use oil additives of any type as

engine damage could occur. Use only

specified lubricants.

Maintenance

200

A. Oil at recommended level. No top-up

required.

B. Add 0.5 litres (0.9 pint) of oil.

C. Add 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.

D. Oil level above maximum for safe

operation. Do not drive the vehicle. Seek

qualified assistance.

E. Oil level below minimum for safe

operation. Add 1.5 litre (2.6 pints) of oil,

then recheck level.

F1. Oil level stabilising, oil level not available.

Wait ten minutes and then recheck the oil

level display.

F2. If this display is accompanied by the

warning message ENGINE OIL LEVEL

MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with

the oil level monitor is indicated. Seek

qualified assistance.

Topping up the oil

ADD 0.5L

ADD 1.0L

LEVEL OK

JAG1412

SEE HANDBOOK

NOT AVAILABLE

SEE HANDBOOK

CAUTIONS

Your vehicle warranty may be

invalidated if damage is caused by using

oil that does not meet the required

specification.

Failure to use an oil that meets the

required specification, could cause

excessive engine wear, a build-up of sludge

and deposits and increase pollution. It could

also lead to engine failure.

Overfilling with oil could result in severe

engine damage.

201

Maintenance

1. Unscrew the oil filler cap (arrowed).

2. Add the appropriate quantity of oil (as

indicated by the message centre oil level

display). Wait 5 minutes to let the oil level

stabilise and re-check the level.

Clean up any oil spilled during topping up.

3. Once the correct level is achieved, refit the

filler cap and hand tighten securely.

Note: The approximate quantity of oil required

to raise the level from the minimum level of

safe operation to the maximum, is 1.5 litres

(2.6 pints).

ENGINE OIL CHECK - V6 Diesel

engines

Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of oil consumption is normal.

The rate of consumption will depend on the

following:

•The quality and viscosity of the oil.

•Climatic conditions.

•The speed at which the engine is being

operated.

•Road conditions.

Drivers should expect above normal

consumption when the engine is new.

JAG1383

CAUTIONS

If the warning ENGINE OIL CRITICALLY

LOW is displayed in the message centre,

stop the engine as soon as it is safe to do so

and seek qualified assistance. Do not start the

engine until the cause has been identified and

rectified.

Your vehicle’s warranty may be

invalidated if damage is caused by the

use of improper engine oil. Low quality or

obsolete oils do not provide the protection

required by modern, high performance

engines. Failure to use an oil that meets the

required specification could cause excessive

engine wear, a build up of sludge and deposits

and increased pollution. It could also lead to

engine failure.

Do not use oil additives of any type as

engine damage could occur. Use only

specified lubricants.

Maintenance

202

Oil level warnings

Warnings will be displayed in the message

centre if the oil level is not maintained within

the safe operating levels (minimum and

maximum). A warning will also be displayed if

there is a fault with the oil level monitoring

system.

•ENGINE OIL LOW (amber): The oil is at the

minimum level for safe operation. Top-up

with 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.

•ENGINE OIL HIGH (amber): This warning

is displayed when the engine is started, if

the oil is above the maximum level for safe

operation. Seek qualified assistance to

have the engine oil drained, before driving

the vehicle.

•ENGINE OIL CRITICALLY LOW (red): The

oil is below the minimum level for safe

operation. Stop the vehicle as soon as

safety permits and top-up with 1.5 litres

(2.6 pints) of oil. Wait for 5 minutes,

recheck the oil level reading and top-up

again if necessary.

•ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM

FAULT (amber): A fault with the oil level

monitoring system is indicated. Seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

Checking the oil level

The engine oil level is automatically monitored

and is displayed in the trip computer area of the

message centre.

The current oil level can be viewed with the

ignition on, with the engine stopped and the

transmission in Park (P).

To view the current oil level, allow 5 minutes

after stopping the engine (to allow the oil level

to stabilise), then press the TRIP button on the

end of the left column stalk repeatedly, until the

oil can icon is displayed at the bottom of the

message centre.

A. Oil at recommended level. No top-up

required.

B. Add 0.5 litres (0.9 pint) of oil.

C. Add 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.

D. Oil level above maximum for safe

operation. Do not drive the vehicle. Seek

qualified assistance.

E. Oil level below minimum for safe

operation. Add 1.5 litre (2.6 pints) of oil,

then recheck level.

F1. Oil level stabilising, oil level not available.

Wait ten minutes and then recheck the oil

level display.

F2. If this display is accompanied by the

warning message ENGINE OIL LEVEL

MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT, a fault with

the oil level monitor is indicated. Seek

qualified assistance.

ADD 0.5L

ADD 1.0L

LEVEL OK

JAG1412

SEE HANDBOOK

NOT AVAILABLE

SEE HANDBOOK

203

Maintenance

Topping up the oil

1. With the ignition on, but the engine not

running, unscrew the oil filler cap

(arrowed).

2. Add the appropriate quantity of oil (as

indicated by the message centre oil level

display). Wait 5 minutes to let the oil level

stabilise and re-check the level.

Clean up any oil spilled during topping up.

3. Once the correct level is achieved, refit the

filler cap and hand tighten securely until

one click is heard.

Note: The approximate quantity of oil required

to raise the level from the minimum level of

safe operation to the maximum, is 1.5 litres

(2.6 pints).

Note: The ignition must be left on during the

top-up, so that the electronic dipstick can

enables an accurate level re-check.

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION

It is essential to use the correct specification of

engine oil, and to ensure it is suitable for the

climatic conditions in which the vehicle is to be

operated.

Jaguar recommends:

CAUTIONS

Your vehicle warranty may be

invalidated if damage is caused by using

oil that does not meet the required

specification.

Failure to use an oil that meets the

required specification, could cause

excessive engine wear, a build-up of sludge

and deposits and increase pollution. It could

also lead to engine failure.

Overfilling with oil could result in severe

engine damage.

JAG1383

Model Specification

V6 Petrol

engines

5W-30 engine oil, meeting

Jaguar specification WSS

M2C913-B is preferred.

Where this is not possible, oil

meeting ACEA A1/B1 or ACEA

A3/B3 specification may be

used.

V8 Petrol

engines

5W-20 engine oil, meeting

Jaguar specification WSS

M2C925-A only.

Diesel engines 5W-30 engine oil, meeting

Jaguar specification WSS

M2C934-B only.

Japan V6

Petrol engines

5W-30 engine oil, meeting

specification ILSAC GF-4

with API SM is preferred.

Where this is not possible, oil

meeting ILSAC GF-3 API SL

specification may be used.

Japan V8

Petrol engines

5W-20 engine oil, meeting

Jaguar specification WSS

M2C925-A only.

Maintenance

204

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK

Checking the coolant level

The coolant level in the expansion tank should

be checked at least weekly (more frequently in

high mileage or severe operating conditions).

Always check the level when the system is

cold.

Ensure the coolant level is maintained between

the level indicator marks located on the inside

of the expansion tank filler neck.

If the level has fallen appreciably, suspect

leakage or overheating and arrange for the

vehicle to be examined by a qualified

technician.

Diesel and V6 petrol engines

V8 petrol engines

If the message LOW COOLANT LEVEL is

displayed in the message centre, stop the

vehicle as soon as safety permits and top-up

the coolant reservoir with the recommended

antifreeze/water mix.

If the message centre displays the message

ENGINE OVERHEATING, pull off the

carriageway and allow the engine to idle for five

minutes and then switch off the ignition for ten

minutes. Switch on the engine and, provided

that the warning does not occur, continue your

journey, avoiding harsh acceleration. Seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

CAUTIONS

Running the engine without coolant will

cause serious engine damage.

If persistent coolant loss is noticed,

seek qualified assistance immediately.

E95163

E96105

205

Maintenance

Topping up the coolant

Top-up to the upper level indicator mark

located on the side of the expansion tank. Use

only a 50% mix of water and antifreeze to

specification WSS M97B44 (coloured orange)

Extended Life Coolant.

Note: In an emergency - and only if the

approved antifreeze is unavailable - top-up the

cooling system with clean water, but be aware

of the resultant reduction in frost protection.

Do not top-up or refill with conventional

antifreeze formulations. If in doubt consult a

qualified technician.

Ensure the cap is tightened fully after top-up is

completed by turning the cap until the ratchet

cap clicks.

Antifreeze

Antifreeze contains important corrosion

inhibitors. The antifreeze content of the coolant

must be maintained at 50% ± 5% all year round

(not just in cold conditions). To ensure that the

anti-corrosion properties of the coolant are

retained, the antifreeze content should be

checked once a year and completely renewed

every ten years, regardless of distance

travelled. Failure to do so may cause corrosion

of the radiator and engine components.

The specific gravity of a 50% antifreeze

solution at 20°C (68°F) is 1.068 and protects

against frost down to -40°C (-40°F).

Use antifreeze to specification WSS M97B44

(coloured orange) Extended Life Coolant.

WARNINGS

Never remove the filler cap when the

engine is hot - escaping steam or

scalding water could cause serious

personal injury.

Antifreeze is highly inflammable. Do

not allow antifreeze to come into

contact with naked flames or other

sources of ignition (e.g. a hot engine) - a fire

may result.

Unscrew the filler cap slowly,

allowing the pressure to escape

before removing completely.

CAUTION

When travelling in territories where the

water supply contains salt, always

ensure you carry a supply of fresh (rain or

distilled) water. Topping up with salt water will

cause serious engine damage.

WARNINGS

Antifreeze is poisonous and can be

fatal if swallowed - keep containers

sealed and out of the reach of

children. If accidental consumption is

suspected, seek medical attention

immediately.

If the fluid comes into contact with

the skin or eyes, rinse immediately

with plenty of water.

CAUTIONS

The use of non-approved antifreeze will

have an adverse effect on the engine

cooling system and therefore engine

durability.

Antifreeze will damage painted surfaces;

soak up any spillage with an absorbent

cloth immediately and wash the area with a

mixture of car shampoo and water.

Maintenance

206

BRAKE FLUID CHECK

If the quantity of fluid in the brake

reservoir drops below the

recommended level, a red warning

indicator in the instrument pack will illuminate

and the message BRAKE FLUID LOW will be

displayed in the message centre.

Note: If the warning indicator illuminates or the

message is displayed, while the vehicle is being

driven, stop the vehicle as soon as safety

permits by gently applying the brakes. Check

and top-up the fluid level if necessary.

Checking the fluid level

With the vehicle on level ground, check the

fluid level at least every week (more frequently

in high mileage or arduous operating

conditions).

The brake fluid reservoir is located beneath a

cover on the raised platform to the rear of the

main underbonnet area. See ENGINE

COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW (page 196).

1. Release the catch.

2. Lift the cover forwards, then pull

rearwards, to release the hinges.

3. Clean the filler cap with a clean, dry cloth

before removing, to prevent dirt or

moisture from entering the reservoir.

WARNING

Seek qualified assistance immediately

if brake pedal travel is unusually long,

unusually short or if there is any

significant loss of brake fluid. Driving under

such conditions could result in extended

stopping distances or complete brake failure.

WARNINGS

Brake fluid is highly toxic - keep

containers sealed and out of reach of

children. If accidental consumption is

suspected, seek medical attention

immediately.

If the fluid comes into contact with

the skin or eyes, rinse immediately

with plenty of water.

Brake fluid is highly inflammable. Do

not allow brake fluid to come into

contact with naked flames or other

sources of ignition (e.g. a hot engine) - a fire

may result.

Do not drive the vehicle with the fluid

level below the MIN mark.

E95164

207

Maintenance

4. Remove the filler cap.

5. The brake fluid level should be between the

MIN and the MAX marks on the side of the

reservoir.

The fluid level may drop slightly during normal

use, as a result of brake pad wear, but should

not be allowed to drop below the MIN mark.

Topping up the fluid

1. Top up the reservoir to the MAX mark

using Shell DOT4 ESL brake fluid. If

unavailable, a low viscosity brake fluid that

meets ISO 4925 class 6 specification. Only

fluid of this type and standard may be

used.

2. Replace the cap.

3. Refit the reservoir cover.

E95165

CAUTIONS

Brake fluid will damage painted

surfaces. Soak up any spillage with an

absorbent cloth immediately and wash the

area with a mixture of car shampoo and water.

Only use new fluid from an airtight

container (fluid from open containers or

fluid previously bled from the system, will

have absorbed moisture, which will adversely

affect performance, and must not be used).

Maintenance

208

POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK

Checking the fluid level

Check and top-up the fluid with the vehicle on

level ground, with the engine switched off and

the system cold. Ensure that the steering wheel

is not turned after stopping the engine.

The level of fluid can be seen through the

translucent body of the reservoir.

The fluid level should be between the MIN and

the MAX marks.

Topping up the fluid

1. Clean the filler cap before removing to

prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.

2. Remove filler cap.

3. Using Mobil ATF320, top-up the reservoir

until the fluid level is between the MIN and

MAX marks.

4. Replace filler cap.

WARNINGS

Power steering fluid is highly toxic.

Keep containers sealed and out of

reach of children. If accidental

consumption of fluid is suspected, seek

medical attention immediately.

If the fluid comes into contact with

the skin or eyes, rinse immediately

with plenty of water.

Power steering fluid is highly

inflammable. Do not allow power

steering fluid to come into contact

with naked flames or other sources of ignition

(e.g. a hot engine) - a fire may result.

CAUTIONS

The engine must not be started if the

fluid level has dropped below the MIN

mark. Severe damage to the steering pump

could result.

Seek qualified assistance immediately if

there is a noticeable drop in the fluid

level. Severe damage to the steering pump

could result.

If fluid loss is slow, the reservoir may be

topped-up to the upper level mark to

enable the vehicle to be driven to a repair

facility for examination. However, it is

recommended that you seek qualified

assistance before driving the vehicle.

CAUTIONS

It is imperative that the power steering

system does not become contaminated

in any way. Always use new fluid and clean the

area around the filler neck both before

removing the filler cap and after topping up.

Never return drained fluid to the system.

Power steering fluid will damage

painted surfaces. Soak up any spillage

with an absorbent cloth immediately and wash

the area with a mixture of car shampoo and

water.

Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX

mark.

E95166

209

Maintenance

WASHER FLUID CHECK

The washer reservoir supplies the windscreen

and headlamp washer jets.

Check and top-up the reservoir level at least

every week.

Fill with Jaguar Windscreen Washer Fluid,

diluted with clean water, as specified in the

instructions on the bottle. Using a

non-approved fluid may adversely affect the

wiper blade rubber, resulting in ineffectual and

noisy wiping.

Operate the washer switches periodically to

check that the nozzles are clear and properly

directed.

Topping up the fluid

1. Clean the filler cap before removing to

prevent dirt from entering the reservoir.

2. Open filler cap.

3. Top-up the reservoir until the fluid is

visible in the filler neck.

4. Close filler cap.

WARNINGS

Some screen washer products are

inflammable, particularly if high or

undiluted concentrations are exposed

to sparking. Do not allow screen washer fluid

to come into contact with naked flames or

sources of ignition.

If the vehicle is operated in

temperatures below 4°C (40°F), use a

washer fluid with frost protection. In

cold weather, failure to use a washer fluid with

frost protection, could result in impaired

vision and increase the risk of a vehicle crash.

CAUTIONS

Do not use an antifreeze or

vinegar/water solution in the washer

reservoir - antifreeze will damage painted

surfaces, while vinegar can damage the

windscreen washer pump.

Body panels may suffer discolouration

as a result of screen washer fluid

spillage. Take care to avoid spillage,

particularly if an undiluted or high

concentration is being used. If spillage occurs,

wash the affected area immediately with water.

E95174

Maintenance

210

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lubricants and fluids

If in doubt about the required specification of a lubricant or fluid for your vehicle, seek advice from

your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Part Variant Specification

Engine oil V6 Petrol

engines

SAE 5W-30 meeting Jaguar specification WSS M2C913-B

is preferred. Oil meeting ACEA A1/B1 or ACEA A3/B3

specification may be used.

V8 Petrol

engines

Use only Castrol 5W-20 engine oil meeting specification

WSS M2C925-A.

Diesel engines SAE 5W-30 meeting Jaguar specification WSS M2C934-B

only.

V6 engines

Japan only

SAE 5W-30 meeting specification ILSAC GF-4 with API SM

is preferred. Oil meeting ILSAC GF-3 API SL specification

may be used.

Power steering fluid All vehicles Mobil ATF320 power steering fluid.

Brake fluid All vehicles Shell DOT4 ESL is preferred. If unavailable, a low viscosity

brake fluid that meets ISO 4925 specification may be used.

Screen washer All vehicles Screen wash with frost protection.

Coolant All vehicles 50% mixture antifreeze of water and specification WSS

M97B44 (coloured orange) Extended Life Coolant.

211

Maintenance

Capacities

The quoted capacities are approximate and provided as a guide only. All levels must be checked

using the dipstick or level marks as applicable.

Item Variant Capacity

Fuel tank Diesel vehicles 68.1 litres (15 gallons)

Petrol vehicles 69.5 litres (15.3 gallons)

Fuel capacity (when the fuel gauge

indicates empty)

Diesel vehicles 64 litres (14.1 gallons)

Petrol vehicles 64 litres (14.1 gallons)

Reserve capacity (when the fuel

gauge indicates empty)

Diesel vehicles 5.5 litres (1.2 gallons)

Petrol vehicles 5.5 litres (1.2 gallons)

Engine oil refill and filter change Diesel vehicles 6.4 litres (11.3 pints)

V6 Petrol vehicles 6.5 litres (11.4 pints)

V8 Petrol vehicles 7.25 litres (12.8 pints)

Engine oil MIN to MAX on dipstick Diesel vehicles 1.0 litres (1.8 pints)

Petrol vehicles 1.0 litres (1.8 pints)

Washer reservoir With headlamp wash 5.5 litres (9.7 pints)

Washer reservoir Without headlamp wash 4.4 litres (7.7 pints)

Cooling system (fill from dry) Diesel vehicles 12.5 litres (22 pints)

V6 Petrol vehicles 9.25 litres (16.3 pints)

V8 Normally Aspirated Petrol

vehicles

12.5 litres (22 pints)

V8 Supercharged Petrol vehicles 12.3 litres (21.6 pints)

Cooling system (service fill) Diesel vehicles 9.7 litres (17.1 pints)

V6 Petrol vehicles 7.42 litres (13.1 pints)

V8 Normally Aspirated Petrol

vehicles

7.5 litres (13.2 pints)

V8 Supercharged Petrol vehicles

- both drain points used

8.6 litres (15.1 pints)

Vehicle battery

212

BATTERY WARNING SYMBOLS

BATTERY CARE

Do not allow any naked flames,

or other sources of ignition near

the battery as the battery may

emit explosive gasses.

Ensure that when working near,

or handling the battery, suitable

eye protection is worn. This will

reduce the risk of eye damage

caused by acid splashes.

To prevent risk of injury, do not

allow children near the battery.

Be aware that the battery may

emit explosive gasses.

The battery contains acid which

is extremely corrosive, and toxic.

WARNINGS

Do not allow the battery electrolyte

(fluid) to come into contact with your

skin or eyes. It is both corrosive and

toxic, and the resulting injuries can be severe.

If any electrolyte does come into contact with

your skin or eyes, immediately rinse the

affected area with clean, cold water.

Immediate medical advice will be required.

If battery electrolyte comes into

contact with your skin and/or clothes

you should remove the affected

clothing and flush the skin with copious

amounts of water. Seek medical assistance

immediately.

If battery electrolyte comes into

contact with your eyes, flush with

copious amounts of clean cold water.

Seek medical assistance immediately, and

continue to flush with water.

If swallowed, battery electrolyte can

be fatal. If electrolyte is swallowed,

seek medical assistance immediately.

Do not connect any 12 volt equipment

directly to the battery terminals.

Doing so may cause a spark, which

can result in an explosion.

The cell plugs and vent pipe must be

in place at all times when the battery

is connected to the vehicle. Ensure

that the vent pipe is clear of obstructions and

not kinked. Failure to do so may cause a

pressure build up in the battery, resulting in an

explosion.

Do not expose the battery to a naked

flame or spark as the battery

produces explosive, flammable gas.

Never jump start (boost) or charge, a

frozen battery. Doing so can result in

an explosion.

Remove all metal jewellery before

working on, or near, the battery, and

never allow metal tools or vehicle

components to come into contact with the

battery terminals. Metal objects can cause

sparks and/or short circuits, resulting in an

explosion.

Do not allow the battery posts or

terminals to come into contact with

your skin. They contain lead and lead

compounds, which are toxic. Always wash

your hands thoroughly after handling the

battery.

WARNINGS

213

Vehicle battery

Your vehicle is fitted with a low maintenance

battery, which is located under the floor of the

luggage compartment.

In hot climates more frequent checks of the

battery electrolyte level and condition are

required. If necessary, the battery cells can be

topped up using distilled water.

When the ignition is switched on, but without

the engine running, BATTERY NOT CHARGING

is displayed in the message centre. The battery

will only charge when the engine is running.

Note: Do not connect any 12 volt equipment

(e.g. a 12 volt inspection lamp), directly to the

battery terminals. Use the accessory socket

located in the cubby box, for connecting Jaguar

approved accessories.

Battery Monitoring System (BMS)

Your vehicle is equipped with a Battery

Monitoring System (BMS) which manages the

battery charging system and, if excessive

battery discharge is occurring when the engine

isn't running, shuts down non-essential

electrical systems to protect battery power.

In the event that too many electrical systems

are operational when the engine is not running,

and the battery charge is insufficient, the audio

and entertainment systems (if active) and

climate control system will be switched off.

This will be confirmed by a low battery warning

message displayed on the touch-screen. If this

occurs, switch on and run the engine for at

least five minutes, preferably with all auxiliary

electrical systems switched off (e.g. lights,

wipers, climate control, seat heaters etc.).

Note: The audio system can be operated

during this five minute period when the engine

is running.

If the engine is switched off before the five

minute period ends and the audio system is

switched on, the warning message will

re-appear on the touch-screen and the audio,

entertainment and climate control systems will

switch off again. For this reason, it is important

that the engine is left running for the full five

minute period.

Charging faults

If there is a fault in the battery charging system,

CHARGING FAULT is displayed with red

backlighting in the message centre. If this

occurs, switch off all non-essential electrical

systems and seek qualified assistance at the

earliest opportunity.

CAUTION

Do not allow battery electrolyte to come

into contact with fabrics or painted

surfaces. If battery electrolyte comes into

contact with any surface, the surface should

be washed down immediately with copious

amounts of clean water. Battery electrolyte is

both corrosive and toxic, and can damage a

wide range of materials if left.

Vehicle battery

214

USING BOOSTER CABLES

Note: Before connecting booster cables,

ensure that the battery connections on the

disabled vehicle are correct and that all

electrical equipment has been switched off.

1. Connect one end of the positive booster

cable to the positive terminal on the donor

vehicle's battery.

2. Connect the other end of the positive

booster cable to the positive terminal on

the disabled vehicle's battery.

3. Connect one end of the negative booster

cable to the earth point of the donor vehicle

that is recommended for jump starting by

the manufacturer.

4. Connect the other end of the negative

booster cable to a suitable earth point on

the disabled vehicle. The earth point

should be at least 0.5 metres (20 inches)

away from the battery and as far as

possible from any fuel or brake pipes.

•Check that all cables are clear of any

moving components and that all four

connections are secure.

5. Start the engine of the donor vehicle, and

allow it to idle for a few minutes.

6. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

7. Allow both vehicles to idle for two minutes.

8. Switch off the donor vehicle.

Disconnecting the cables

Note: Do not switch on any electrical

equipment until after the cables have been

disconnected.

The engine should be running on the

previously disabled vehicle and the engine

switched off on the donor vehicle. Disconnect

the booster cables in the exact reverse order of

that used for connection.

WARNINGS

Always wear appropriate eye

protection when working with

batteries.

During normal use, batteries emit

explosive hydrogen gas - ensure

sparks and naked lights are kept away

from the luggage compartment.

Do not attempt to start the vehicle if

the electrolyte in the battery is

suspected of being frozen.

Make sure both batteries are of the 12

volt type and that the booster cables

have insulated clamps and are

approved for use with 12 volt batteries.

Do not disconnect the discharged

battery.

Do not connect positive (+) terminals

to negative (-) terminals and ensure

booster cables are kept away from

any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not connect a booster cable to the

negative (-) terminal of the battery.

Always connect to the recommended

earthing point.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury use extreme

caution when removing the booster

cables as the engine will be running

on the previously disabled vehicle. This means

that you may be working close to components

which are moving at high speed, carry high

voltage, or may be hot.

215

Vehicle battery

CHARGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY

CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY

Battery disposal

Used batteries must be disposed of

correctly as they contain a number of

harmful substances. Seek advice on

disposal from your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer, and/or your local

authority.

WARNING

Ensure that the correct type of battery

charger is used. Using an unsuitable

charger may damage the battery and

could cause the battery to explode.

Always charge the battery in a well

ventilated area, away from any naked

flames, sparks or other ignition

sources. During charging, the battery can

produce a highly explosive and flammable gas.

CAUTIONS

Battery disconnection, removal and

replacement, should only be carried out

by qualified personnel. Consult your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

If the battery has been removed from

the vehicle to be charged, the Battery

Monitoring System will automatically

recalibrate. During this time, Low Battery

warning messages may appear.

Always follow the instructions supplied

with the battery charger. Failure to do so

may result in damage to the battery.

WARNING

Use caution when lifting the battery

our of, or into, the vehicle. It is heavy

and may cause injury when lifting or if

dropped.

Do not tilt the battery more than 45°,

as it may cause damage and may

cause the electrolyte to leak out.

Battery electrolyte is highly corrosive and

toxic.

CAUTIONS

Battery disconnection, removal and

replacement, should only be carried out

by qualified personnel. Consult your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

If the vehicle battery is replaced by a

new battery, the vehicle electrical

system must be reset to the new battery by

qualified personnel. Failure to reset the

electrical system, may result in Low Battery

warning messages. Consult your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

Only a replacement battery of the same

type and specification as the original

should be fitted. Other batteries may vary in

size or have different terminal positions, which

could cause a fire hazard when connected to

the vehicle's electrical system.

Do not rest the battery on any part of the

vehicle, as it may cause damage due to

its weight.

Do not run the engine with the battery

disconnected. Doing so may damage

the charging system.

Wheels and tyres

216

GENERAL INFORMATION

Tyre markings

1. P indicates that the tyre is for passenger

vehicle use.

2. The width of the tyre from sidewall edge to

sidewall edge in millimetres.

3. The aspect ratio, also known as the profile,

gives the sidewall height as a percentage

of the tread width. So, if the tread width is

205 mm, and the aspect ratio is 50, the

sidewall height will be 102 mm.

4. R indicates that the tyre is of Radial ply

construction.

5. The diameter of the wheel rim given in

inches.

6. The load index for the tyre. This index is

not always shown.

7. The speed rating denotes the maximum

speed at which the tyre should be used for

extended periods. †

8. Tyre manufacturing standard information,

which can be used for tyre recalls and

other checking processes. Most of this

information relates to the manufacturer,

place of manufacture etc. The last four

numbers are the date of manufacture. For

example, if the number was 3106, the tyre

was made in the 31st week of 2006.

9. M+S or M/S indicates that the tyre has

been designed with some capability for

mud and snow.

10. The number of plies in both the tread area,

and the sidewall area, indicates how many

layers of rubber coated material make up

the structure of the tyre. Information is

also provided on the type of materials

used.

JAG1525

12345678

217

Wheels and tyres

11. Wear rate indicator. A tyre rated at 400 for

example, will last twice as long as a tyre

rated at 200.

12. The traction rating grades a tyres

performance when stopping on a wet road

surface. The higher the grade the better the

braking performance. The grades from

highest to lowest are, AA, A, B, and C.

13. The maximum load which can be carried

by the tyre.

14. Heat resistance grading. The tyre's

resistance to heat is grade A, B, or C, with

A indicating the greatest resistance to heat.

This grading is provided for a correctly

inflated tyre, which is being used within its

speed and loading limits.

15. The maximum inflation pressure for the

tyre. This pressure should not be used for

normal driving.

† Speed ratings

TYRE CARE

Tyre pressures

Rating Speed km/h (mph)

Q 160 (99)

R 170 (106)

S 180 (112)

T 190 (118)

U 200 (124)

H 210 (130)

V 240 (149)

W 270 (168)

Y 300 (186)

WARNINGS

Defective tyres are dangerous. Do not

drive the vehicle if a tyre is damaged,

excessively worn, or incorrectly

inflated. Doing so may lead to premature tyre

failure.

Avoid contaminating the tyres with

vehicle fluids as they may cause

damage to the tyre.

Avoid spinning the wheels. The forces

released can damage the structure of

the tyre and cause it to fail. Doing so

may lead to premature tyre failure.

If wheel spin is unavoidable due to a

loss of traction (in deep snow, for

example), do not exceed the 50 km/h

(30 mph) point on the speedometer. Doing so

may lead to premature tyre failure.

Do not exceed the maximum pressure

stated on the sidewall of the tyre.

Over-inflation could cause the tyre to

fail suddenly.

WARNINGS

Never drive your vehicle if the tyre

pressures are incorrect.

Under-inflation causes excessive

flexing and uneven tyre wear. This can lead to

sudden tyre failure. Over-inflation causes a

harsh ride, uneven tyre wear and poor

handling.

Pressure checks should only be

carried out when the tyres are cold,

and the vehicle has been stationary

for more than three hours. A hot tyre at or

below recommended cold inflation pressure is

dangerously under-inflated.

Wheels and tyres

218

All of the vehicle's tyres (including the spare)

should be checked regularly for damage, wear

and distortion. If you are in any doubt about the

condition of a tyre, have it checked immediately

by a tyre repair centre or your

Dealer/Authorised repairer.

Checking the tyre pressures

The recommended tyre pressures are listed on

a placard label fixed to the end of the left-hand

side door. These pressures provide optimum

ride and handling characteristics for all normal

operating conditions.

If winter tyres are fitted, please refer to the

winter tyre pressure information. See USING

WINTER TYRES (page 223).

In the interest of safety, reliability and fuel

efficiency, check the tyres, including the spare,

for condition and pressure on a weekly basis

and before long journeys.

Do not check tyre pressures immediately after

the vehicle has travelled in excess of 1.6 km

(1.0 mile). Tyre temperatures and pressures

increase when running. Deflating a warm tyre

to the recommended pressure will result in

under-inflation.

If tyre pressures are checked while the vehicle

is inside a protected covered area, e.g. a

garage, and subsequently driven in lower

outdoor temperatures, tyre under-inflation

could occur.

A slight pressure loss occurs naturally with

time. If this exceeds 0.14 bar (2 lbf/in², 14 kPa,)

per week, have the cause investigated and

rectified by qualified assistance.

Tyre pressures (including the spare) should be

checked at least once a week with normal

on-road use, but should be checked daily if the

vehicle is used off-road. Always check the tyre

pressures before setting off on a long journey.

If it is necessary to check tyre pressures when

the tyres are warm, you should expect the

pressures to have increased by up to

0.3-0.4 bar (4-6 lbf/in², 30-40 kpa). Do not

reduce the tyre pressures to the cold inflation

pressure under these circumstances. Allow the

tyres to cool fully before adjusting the

pressures.

If the vehicle has been parked in

strong sunlight, or used in high

ambient temperatures do not reduce

the tyre pressures. move the vehicle into the

shade and allow the tyres to cool before

re-checking the pressures.

WARNING

Tyre pressures should be checked

regularly using an accurate pressure

gauge, when the tyres are cold.

Failure to properly maintain your tyre

pressures could increase the risk of tyre failure

resulting in loss of vehicle control and

personal injury.

WARNINGS

E95180

219

Wheels and tyres

The following procedure should be used to

check and adjust the tyres pressures.

1. Remove the valve cap.

2. Firmly attach a tyre pressure gauge/inflator

to the valve.

3. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge,

and add air if required.

4. If air is added to the tyre, remove the gauge

and re-attach it before reading the

pressure. Failure to do so may result in an

inaccurate reading.

5. If the tyre pressure is too high, remove the

gauge and allow air out of the tyre by

pressing the centre of the valve. Refit the

gauge to the valve and check the pressure.

6. Repeat the process adding or removing air

as required until the correct tyre pressure

is reached.

7. Refit the valve cap.

Note: It is an offence in certain countries to

drive a vehicle with incorrect tyre pressures.

Note: It is the driver's responsibility to ensure

that the tyre pressures are correct.

Tyre valves

Keep the valve caps screwed down firmly to

prevent water or dirt entering the valve. Check

the valves for leaks when checking the tyre

pressures.

Pressure compensation for ambient

temperature changes

If the intended journey will take the vehicle into

an area where the ambient local temperature is

known to be lower than the journey start point,

tyre pressure under-inflation could occur.

A colder ambient local temperature will reduce

pressure within the tyre. An effect is to

decrease sidewall height and to increase tyre

shoulder wear with the potential for tyre failure.

Vehicle dynamics could also be adversely

affected.

In order to minimise this effect, tyre pressures

can be adjusted to compensate before the start

of the journey. Alternatively, tyre pressures can

be adjusted when the area of lower ambient

temperature is reached.

In this situation, the vehicle must be left in the

ambient local temperature for a least one hour

before tyre pressure is adjusted.

To compensate for colder ambient

temperatures, tyre pressures should be

increased by 0.14 bar (2lbf/in², 14 kPa) for

each 10°C (20°F) decrease.

Note: Ensure that correct tyre pressures are

maintained when moving to areas of differing

ambient temperature.

The Tyre Pressure Monitoring system (TPM

system) may issue a warning if the

under-inflation becomes significant. When

driving through variable climatic conditions the

TPM system warnings may be intermittent.

E95181

Wheels and tyres

220

Tyre pressure compensation chart - high

ambient temperatures

Tyre pressures during long term vehicle

storage

To minimise the possibility and effects of flat

spots during storage, the tyres may be inflated

to the maximum pressure indicated on the tyre

wall.

Note: Before using the stored vehicle on the

road again, ensure that correct tyre pressures

are restored.

Flat spots

If the vehicle is stationary for a long period,

when the ambient temperature is high, the

tyres may form flat spots. When the vehicle is

driven, these flat spots will cause a vibration

which will steadily disappear as the tyres warm

up and regain their original shape.

In order to minimise flat spotting, the tyre

pressures can be increased. Tyre pressures

should be increased by 0.14 bar/14 kPa (2

lbf/in²) for each 10°C (20°F) temperature

increase above 20°C (68°F)

Long term storage

Flat spotting can be minimised during long

term storage, by increasing the tyre pressures

to the maximum indicated on the tyre sidewall.

Note: The tyre pressures should be reduced to

the correct pressure before the vehicle is

driven.

Tyre wear

Good driving practise will improve the mileage

you obtain from your tyres, and avoid

unnecessary damage.

•Always ensure that the tyre pressures are

correctly adjusted.

•Always observe the posted speed limits,

and advisory speeds for bends.

•Avoid pulling away quickly, or hard

acceleration.

•Avoid making fast turns or braking

sharply.

•Wherever possible, avoid potholes, or

obstacles on the road.

•Do not drive up kerbs, or rub the tyres

against them when parking.

Tyre pressure temperature compensation

Ambient

temperature -

°C (°F)

Pressure

compensation -

bar (lbf/in², kPa)

20 (68) use placard label

30 (86) + 0.14 (2, 14)

40 (104) + 0.28 (4, 28)

50 (122) + 0.41 (6, 41)

E80322

221

Wheels and tyres

Wear indicators

When the tread has worn down to

approximately 2 mm, wear indicators start to

appear at the surface of the tread pattern. This

produces a continuous band of rubber across

the tread as a visual indicator.

To maintain performance and grip the tyre

must be replaced as soon as the wear indicator

becomes visible. Sooner, if legislation requires

replacement at a greater tread depth.

Note: Tread depth should be checked

regularly, in some case more frequently than

the service intervals. For advice on checking

tyres contact your Dealer/Authorised repairer

or a tyre dealer.

Age degradation

Tyres degrade over time due to the effects of

ultraviolet light, extreme temperatures, high

loads, and environmental conditions. It is

recommended that tyres are replaced at least

every six years, but they may require

replacement more frequently.

Jaguar recommends that even if unused, the

spare tyre be replaced at the same time as the

four road tyres.

Punctured tyres

Tyre checks

Not all punctures result in the tyre deflating

immediately. Therefore, it is important to check

the tyres for damage and foreign objects,

regularly.

When driving, if a sudden vibration, or change

to the vehicle's handling is noticed, reduce

speed immediately. Do not brake hard, or make

any sudden manoeuvres or direction changes.

Drive slowly to an area off the main highway

and stop the vehicle.

Note: Driving the vehicle to a safe area may

cause damage to the punctured tyre, but

occupant safety is far more important.

Inspect the tyres for signs of punctures,

damage or under inflation. If any damage or

deformity is detected, the tyre should be

replaced. If a spare tyre is not available, then

the vehicle should be recovered to a tyre repair

centre, or Dealer/Approved repairer.

WARNING

Wear indicators show the minimum

tread depth recommended by the

manufacturers. Tyres which have

worn to this point will have reduced grip and

poor water displacement characteristics.

CAUTION

If tread wear is uneven across a tyre, or

the tyre wears excessively, the vehicle

should be checked by your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer as soon as possible.

E91698

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with a

punctured tyre. Even if the punctured

tyre has not deflated, it is unsafe to

use, as the tyre may deflate suddenly at any

time. See TYRE REPAIR KIT (page 229).

Wheels and tyres

222

Replacement tyres

Ideally, tyres should be replaced in sets of four.

If this is not possible, replace the tyres in pairs

(front and rear). When tyres are replaced, the

wheels should always be re-balanced and

alignment checked.

The correct tyre specification for your vehicle

can be found on the tyre information label.

Directional tyres

Directional tyres are designed to operate

correctly when rotating forwards (when the

vehicle is travelling forwards).

Typical direction indicators

WARNINGS

Do not fit cross-ply tyres.

Do not fit tubed tyres.

Do not swap tyres around the vehicle.

Tyres bed in to the specific

characteristics of each wheel

position. Swapping them around may affect

the vehicle's handling and traction.

Always fit replacement tyres of the

same type, and wherever possible of

the same make and tread pattern.

Replacement wheels should be

genuine Jaguar parts. This will

maintain the designed driving

characteristics.

If the use of tyres not recommended

by Jaguar is unavoidable, ensure that

you read, and fully comply with, the

tyre manufacturers instructions. Failure to do

so, may lead to tyre failure due to incorrect

fitment or use.

E95182

223

Wheels and tyres

USING WINTER TYRES

Winter tyres are more suitable during extremes

of low temperatures, snow and ice and will

considerably improve the vehicle’s handling

during these conditions.

Do not exceed 240 km/h (150 mph) when

using Jaguar approved winter tyres.

Winter tyres must be fitted to all four wheels.

Approved winter tyre sizes

Front:

•Dunlop Wintersport M3 - 235/55R17 99H,

245/45R18 96V, 245/45R18 100V,

245/40R19 98V.

•W240 Pirelli Sotto Zero - 245/45R18 100V,

245/40R19 98V, 255/35R20 97V

Rear:

•Dunlop Wintersport M3 - 235/55R17 99H,

245/45R18 96V, 245/45R18 100V,

245/40R19 98V.

•W240 Pirelli Sotto Zero - 245/45R18 100V,

245/40R19 98V, 285/30R20 99V

Winter tyre pressures

USING SNOW CHAINS

Snow chains, of the recommended type, can

only be fitted to rear wheels. They should not

be used on temporary use spare wheels.

You should contact your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer for details and availability of approved

snow chains.

The maximum speed when using snow chains

is 50 km/h (30 mph).

Remove the snow chains immediately the

roads are clear of snow.

Ensure the fitting instructions supplied with the

snow chains are kept in a safe place, for

example, with this literature pack.

Note: When using snow chains, select

JaguarDrive Control Winter mode with DSC

switched on.

CAUTION

Tyres with an all season icon or M+S

have a level of winter performance and

need not be replaced.

Up to 240 km/h (150 mph)

Front 2.0 bar (30 lbf/in², 207 kPa)

Rear 2.3 bar (33 lbf/in², 230 kPa)

CAUTION

It is essential that only snow chains of

the recommended type are fitted, other

snow chains may cause damage to the vehicle.

Wheels and tyres

224

RUN FLAT TYRES

Run-flat tyres can be identified by the lettering

RSC on the sidewall. The tyre construction

utilises a specially reinforced sidewall, which

allows the vehicle to be driven at restricted

speeds, even when the tyre is depressurised.

Run-flat tyres can only be fitted to special rims,

constructed for run-flat tyre use.

A tyre pressure monitoring system is

mandatory when the vehicle is fitted with

run-flat tyres. See TYRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (page 234).

If the tyre has deflated, the vehicle should be

driven with caution, as handling characteristics

will be different compared to a fully inflated

tyre.

If the vehicle is fully laden with passengers and

luggage, the maximum distance that can be

completed on a fully deflated tyre, is

approximately 80 kilometres (50 miles).

Stop immediately if the tyre construction

begins to break down or if the tyre dislodges

from the wheel rim. Typically, this will be

accompanied by excessive vibration.

A tyre driven in a deflated condition must be

replaced as soon as possible.

Vehicles fitted with run-flat tyres are not fitted

with a spare wheel or jacking equipment.

Therefore, run-flat tyres should be replaced

with the same type of tyre.

TOOL KIT

Tool kit contents

1. Jack.

2. Wheel brace.

3. Chock.

4. Locking wheel nut adaptor.

5. Towing eye.

Note: When returning the tool kit to its stowage

position, hook the T-bar of the clamp over the

jack handle, to secure in position.

Note: The jack requires occasional

maintenance. Examine the jack for wear,

damage or corrosion and lubricate the moving

parts.

WARNING

If a run-flat tyre is deflated, maximum

vehicle speed must not exceed

80 km/h (50 mph).

E91708

WARNING

After use, the tool kit should be

returned to the under floor storage

area and correctly stowed. Do not

leave the tool kit or its components loose in the

storage area, as they can prove hazardous

during an impact or sudden manoeuvre.

E95183

225

Wheels and tyres

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL

If a wheel change is required, pull off the road

completely. Park on ground which is as level

and solid as possible. Ensure that the vehicle is

clear of any objects that will obstruct the safe

removal of the wheel. Switch on hazard

warning lamps and, where legally required,

display the warning triangle.

Regular maintenance of tyres contributes not

only to safety, but to the designed function of

the vehicle. Road-holding, steering and braking

are especially vulnerable to incorrectly

pressurised, badly fitted or worn tyres.

Tyres of the correct size and type, but of

different make can have widely varying

characteristics. It is therefore recommended

that Jaguar approved tyres are fitted to all

wheels.

Temporary use spare wheel

Observe the following warnings before using

the wheel:

WARNINGS

Always ensure replacement tyres

have the correct rating and

specifications (e.g. load index, size,

speed rating) for your vehicle.

When using tyres other than those

recommended by Jaguar, do not

exceed the speed capacity

recommended by the manufacturer.

Wheels are extremely heavy. Take

care when lifting and particularly

when removing and replacing a wheel

in its storage position in the luggage

compartment.

CAUTION

Ultra high performance tyres. This

vehicle is equipped with an Ultra High

Performance (UHP) tyre and wheel

combination designed to give maximum dry

road performance with consideration for

aquaplaning resistance. UHP tyres have

performance enhancing soft rubber tread

compound. If driven aggressively they may

suffer rapid tread wear and a shorter life than

can be expected from other tyre types. This

wheel and tyre combination is more

susceptible to damage from road hazards.

Do not use this combination for driving on

snow or ice. High performance tyres must be

replaced with winter tyres when weather

conditions dictate.

WARNINGS

Note the temporary use spare wheel

warning label. Adhere to instructions

on the label. Failure to comply can be

dangerous.

When a temporary use spare wheel is

fitted, drive with caution and replace

with the specified wheel and tyre as

soon as possible.

Do not fit more than one temporary

use spare wheel and tyre assembly at

one time.

The temporary use spare wheel must

be inflated to 4.2 bar (60 lbf/in²,

420 kPa) and cannot be repaired.

Temporary use spare wheel,

maximum speed is 80 km/h

(50 mph).

Wheels and tyres

226

Locking wheel nuts

Vehicles may be equipped with a locking wheel

nut on each wheel. These are similar to

standard wheel nuts, and can only be removed

using the special adaptor provided with the

jacking equipment.

1. Insert the adaptor firmly onto the locking

wheel nut.

2. Using the wheel brace, unscrew the wheel

nut and adaptor.

3. Return the locking wheel nut adaptor to the

correct storage position.

Note: A code number is stamped on the side of

the locking nut. Ensure the number is recorded

on the Security Card supplied with the

literature pack. Quote this number if a

replacement is required. Do not keep the

Security Card in the vehicle.

Spare wheel location

The spare wheel and jacking tools are stored

under the luggage compartment floor panel.

To remove the spare wheel: Raise the luggage

compartment floor panel, hooking the strap

over the upper boot seal as illustrated.

Unscrew the Tee bolt, releasing the retaining

clamp and hook.

Remove the tool tray from the spare wheel and

remove the spare wheel from the luggage

compartment.

Remove the jack and wheel nut wrench from

the tray.

Note: When refitting the Tee bolt, ensure that

the retaining hook (1) fits over the jack handle,

as illustrated.

If the vehicle is fitted with Tyre

Pressure Monitoring System (TPM

System). See TYRE PRESSURE

MONITORING SYSTEM (page 234).

DSC must be on when the temporary

use spare wheel is in use.

WARNINGS

E91709

JAG1304

JAG1327 1

227

Wheels and tyres

Wheel changing safety

Before raising the vehicle, or changing a wheel

ensure that you read, and comply with the

following warnings.

WARNINGS

Always find a safe place to stop, off

the highway and away from traffic.

Ensure that the vehicle is on firm level

ground.

Disconnect trailer/caravan from

vehicle.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

Ensure that all passengers, and

animals, are out of the vehicle and in

a safe place away from the highway.

Place a warning triangle at a suitable

distance behind the vehicle, facing

towards oncoming traffic.

Ensure that the front wheels are in the

straight ahead position, and engage

the steering lock.

Apply the parking brake, and engage

Park (P).

Ensure that the jack is on firm level

ground.

Never place anything between the

jack and the ground, or the jack and

the vehicle.

When one rear wheel is lifted off the

ground the selection P (Park) position

will not prevent the vehicle from

moving and possibly slipping off the jack as

the park brake only operates on the rear

wheels.

Do not start or run the engine while

the vehicle is supported only by a

jack.

The jack is designed for use when

changing a wheel only. Never work

beneath the vehicle with the jack as

the only means of support - use vehicle

support stands.

Always chock the wheel diagonally

opposite the wheel to be changed,

using the wheel chock supplied in the

tool kit. Chock the front of a front wheel, or the

rear of a rear wheel.

If jacking the vehicle on a slight slope

is unavoidable, place chocks on the

downhill side of the two opposite

wheels. An additional chock will be

needed.

Take care when lifting the spare

wheel, and removing the punctured

wheel. The wheels are heavy, and can

cause injuries if not handled

correctly.

Remove the spare wheel prior to

jacking the vehicle. To avoid

destabilising the vehicle when raised.

Take care when loosening the wheel

nuts. The wheel brace may slip off if

not properly attached, and the wheel

nuts may give way suddenly. Either

unexpected movement may cause an injury.

WARNINGS

Wheels and tyres

228

Wheel changing procedure

1. Ensure that all passengers are in a safe

place, clear of the vehicle.

2. Apply the parking brake and select gear

position P (Park).

3. Ensure that the jack is placed on firm and

level ground.

Observe the instructions printed on the jack.

Use the jack only for lifting the vehicle during

wheel changing and only use the jack which is

stored in the vehicle.

Before raising the vehicle slacken but do not

remove the wheel nuts.

There are four jacking points on the underside

of the floor. Two indented, triangular indicators

are provided on each sill cover. These indicate

the location for the jack.

The simplest way to correctly locate the jacking

point is to feel along the sill panel to the

triangular indentation and then fit the jack to

the body, not to the sill panel.

Carefully raise the vehicle by turning the jack

handle. Stop jacking the vehicle when the tyre

just clears the ground. Minimum tyre lift gives

maximum vehicle stability.

Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.

To remove the centre badge use the plastic

tipped end of the wheel nut wrench handle,

push the centre badge from its housing from

the inside of the wheel.

Push the centre badge into the replacement

wheel. If the temporary use spare wheel is to be

fitted, keep the centre badge safely and fit it to

the repaired full size wheel when it has been

refitted.

Fit the spare wheel and loosely secure with the

wheel nuts.

WARNINGS

Do not attempt to lift the vehicle

unless the jack head is fully engaged

in the jacking point.

Ensure that the park brake is applied.

CAUTION

Ensure before raising the vehicle that

the jack is correctly positioned to avoid

any damage to the vehicle sills or sill panels.

E95185

229

Wheels and tyres

Tightening the wheel nuts

Using the wheel nut wrench, lightly tighten the

wheel nuts alternately using the sequence

shown in the illustration.

Lower the jack and tighten the wheel nuts

alternately. Do not overtighten by using foot

pressure or extension bars on the wheel nut

wrench.

At the earliest opportunity have the wheel nuts

tightened with a torque wrench to 125 Nm

(92 lb.ft).

This torque must not be exceeded.

TYRE REPAIR KIT

Your vehicle may not be equipped with a spare

tyre. If this is the case, in its place in the rear

underfloor storage compartment, you will find

a Jaguar tyre repair kit (except where run-flat

tyres are fitted). The Jaguar tyre repair kit can

be used to repair one tyre and it is essential

that you read the following guide before

attempting to repair a tyre.

The Jaguar tyre repair kit seals most punctures

caused by nails, or similar items, with a

maximum diameter of 6 mm (1/4 inch).

Note: The sealant used in the tyre repair kit has

a shelf life and the expiry date is shown on the

tyre sealant bottle. Ensure that the container is

replaced before the expiry date.

E91712

WARNINGS

To ensure vehicle safety, it is

essential that you read and

understand the following information.

Failure to follow the instructions given here,

may lead to serious tyre damage and may

result in death or serious injury.

If you are in any doubt regarding your

ability to carry out the instructions,

contact your Dealer/Approved

Repairer before attempting the repair.

Wheels and tyres

230

Jaguar tyre repair kit safety information

WARNINGS

Some tyre damage may only be

partially sealed, or may not seal at all,

depending on the amount and type of

damage. Any loss of tyre pressure can

seriously affect vehicle safety.

Do not use the tyre repair kit if the tyre

has been damaged by driving while

under-inflated.

Only use the tyre repair kit to seal

damage located within the tyre tread

area.

Do not use the tyre repair kit to seal

damage to the tyre sidewall.

Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)

when a repaired tyre is fitted to the

vehicle.

The maximum distance that should

be driven when a repaired tyre is

fitted, is 200 km (125 miles).

When a repaired tyre is fitted, drive

with caution and avoid sudden

braking or steering manoeuvres.

Only use the tyre repair kit for the

vehicle with which it was supplied.

Do not use the tyre repair kit for any

other purpose than tyre repair.

Never leave the tyre repair kit

unattended when in use.

Only use the tyre repair kit within the

-30 °C to +70 °C temperature range.

Always keep children and animals at a

safe distance from the tyre repair kit

when in use.

Do not stand directly beside the

compressor when it is operating.

Check the tyre sidewall prior to

inflation. If any cracks, damage or

deformities are apparent, do not

inflate the tyre.

Watch the tyre sidewall during

inflation. If any cracks, bumps or

similar damage, or deformities

appear, switch off the compressor and deflate

the tyre.

WARNINGS

231

Wheels and tyres

Jaguar tyre repair kit

1. Maximum speed label. 80 km/h (50 mph).

2. Tyre inflation hose.

3. Inflation hose protective cap.

4. Inflation hose connector.

5. Compressor power cable.

6. Power cable connector.

7. Sealant bottle receiver cap (orange).

8. Sealant bottle receiver.

9. Sealant bottle cap.

10. Sealant bottle.

11. Tyre pressure gauge.

12. Compressor on/off switch (I = on. 0 = off.).

E96498

Wheels and tyres

232

Using the Jaguar tyre repair kit

Note: All vehicle drivers and occupants should

be made aware that a temporary repair has

been made to a tyre fitted to the vehicle. They

should also be made aware of the special

driving conditions imposed when using a

repaired tyre.

Repair procedure

1. Open the tyre repair kit and peel off the

maximum speed label. Attach the label to

the fascia in the driver's field of vision.

Take care not to obstruct any of the

instruments or warning lights.

2. Uncoil the compressor power cable and

the inflation hose.

3. Unscrew the orange cap from the sealant

bottle receiver and the sealant bottle cap.

4. Screw the sealant bottle into the receiver

(clockwise) until tight.

•Screwing the bottle onto the receiver will

pierce the bottle's seal. Do not unscrew

a full, or partly used bottle from the

receiver. Doing so will result in sealant

leaking from the bottle.

5. Remove the valve cap from the damaged

tyre.

6. Remove the protective cap from the

inflation hose and connect the inflation

hose to the tyre valve. Ensure that the hose

is screwed on firmly.

7. Ensure that the compressor switch is in

the off (0) position.

8. Insert the power cable connector into the

auxiliary power socket. See AUXILIARY

POWER SOCKETS (page 125).

WARNINGS

Avoid skin contact with the sealant

which contains natural rubber latex.

If the tyre inflation pressure does not

reach 1.8 bar (26 lbf/in², 180 kPa)

within seven minutes, the tyre may

have suffered excessive damage. A temporary

repair will not be possible, and the vehicle

should not be driven until the tyre has been

replaced.

CAUTIONS

Before attempting a tyre repair, ensure

that the vehicle is parked safely, as far

away from passing traffic as possible.

Ensure that the parking brake is applied

and P (Park) is selected.

Do not attempt to remove foreign

objects such as nails, screws, etc. from

the tyre.

Always run the engine when using the

compressor, unless the vehicle is in an

enclosed or poorly ventilated space, as this

may cause asphyxiation.

To prevent overheating, do not operate

the compressor continuously for longer

than ten minutes.

WARNING

Check the tyre sidewall prior to

inflation. If there are any cracks,

bumps or similar damage, do not

attempt to inflate the tyre. Do not stand

directly beside the tyre while the compressor

is pumping. Watch the tyre sidewall. If any

cracks, bumps or similar damage appear, turn

off the compressor and let the air out by

means of the pressure relief valve. Do not

continue to use the tyre.

233

Wheels and tyres

9. Unless the vehicle is in an enclosed area,

start the engine.

10. Set the compressor switch to the on (I)

position.

11. Inflate the tyre to a minimum of 1.9 bar

(26 lbf/in²) and a maximum of 3.5 bar

(51 lbf/in²).

•When pumping the sealant through the

tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to 6

bar (87 lbf/in²). The pressure will drop

again after approximately 30 seconds.

12. During the inflation, switch the

compressor off briefly, to check the tyre

pressure using the gauge mounted on the

compressor.

•It should not take longer than seven

minutes to inflate the tyre. If, after seven

minutes, the tyre has not yet reached

minimum pressure, the tyre should not

be used.

13. Once the tyre has been inflated, switch off

the compressor. If desired, the engine may

be turned off after the compressor has

been turned off.

14. Remove the power connector from the

auxiliary power socket.

15. Remove the inflation hose from the tyre

valve, by unscrewing it as quickly as

possible (counter-clockwise).

16. Replace the inflation hose protective cap

and the tyre valve cap.

17. Do not remove the sealant bottle from the

receiver.

18. Ensure that the tyre repair kit (including

the bottle and receiver caps) are placed

securely in the vehicle. You will need to

use the kit to check the tyre pressure after

approximately 3 km (2 miles), so ensure

they are easily accessible.

19. Immediately drive the vehicle for

approximately 3 km (2 miles), to allow the

sealant to coat the inner surface of the tyre

and form a seal at the puncture.

Checking the tyre pressure after a repair

1. Drive the vehicle for 3 km (2 miles) then

stop in a safe place. Carry out a visual

examination of the tyres condition.

2. Make sure that the sealant container

section is in its original position.

3. Screw the inflation hose connector firmly

onto the tyre valve.

4. Read the tyre pressure from the gauge.

5. If the pressure of the sealant filled tyre is

above 1.3 bar (19 lb/in²) adjust the

pressure to the correct value. See TYRE

CARE (page 217).

6. Ensure that the compressor switch is in

the off (O) position and insert the power

cable connector into the auxiliary power

socket.

If the vehicle is in a well ventilated area,

start the engine.

WARNINGS

When driving the vehicle, if you

experience vibrations, abnormal

steering, or noises, reduce speed

immediately. Drive with extreme caution and

reduced speed, to the first safe place to stop

the vehicle. Visually examine the tyre and

check its pressure. If there are any signs of

damage or deformity to the tyre, or the tyre

pressure is below 1.3 bar (19 lb/in²), do not

continue driving.

Consult a tyre repair centre or your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for

advice concerning the replacement of

a tyre after using a tyre repair kit.

Wheels and tyres

234

7. Switch the compressor to on (I) and inflate

the tyre to the correct pressure.

8. To check the tyre pressure, turn off the

compressor then read the pressure from

the gauge.

9. When the compressor is off, if the tyre

pressure is too high, release the required

amount of pressure using the pressure

relief valve.

10. Once the tyre is inflated to the correct

pressure, switch off the compressor and

remove the power plug from the auxiliary

socket.

•The use of the tyre repair kit sealant may

lead to error prompts and incorrect

readings of the Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System. Therefore, use the

tyre repair kit pressure gauge to check

and adjust the damaged tyre's inflation

pressure.

11. Unscrew the inflation hose connector from

the tyre valve, replace the tyre valve cap

and the inflation hose connector protective

cap.

12. Ensure that the tyre repair kit is placed

securely in the vehicle.

13. Drive to the nearest tyre repair centre or

Dealer/Authorised Repairer, for a

replacement tyre to be fitted. Ensure that

you make the repair centre aware that the

tyre repair kit has been used before the tyre

is removed.

14. Both the tyre inflation hose, and the sealant

container should be replaced once a new

tyre has been fitted.

Only sealant containers which are

completely empty should be

disposed of with normal household

waste. Sealant containers which contain some

sealant, and the tyre inflation hose, should be

disposed of by a tyre specialist or your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer, in compliance with

local waste disposal regulations.

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM

Note: Non-approved accessories may interfere

with the system. If this occurs, TYRE

PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT is displayed in the

message centre.

WARNINGS

The Tyre Pressure Monitoring (TPM)

system is NOT a substitute for

manually checking tyre pressures.

The TPM system only provides a low pressure

warning and does not re-inflate your tyres.

Tyre pressures should be checked regularly

using an accurate pressure gauge when cold.

Failure to properly maintain your pressures

could increase the risk of tyre failure, with

consequential loss of vehicle control and

personal injury.

The TPM system can NOT register

damage to a tyre. Regularly check the

condition of your tyres, especially if

the vehicle is driven off-road.

CAUTION

When inflating tyres, care should be

taken to avoid bending or damaging the

TPM system valves. Always ensure correct

alignment of the inflation head to the valve

stem.

235

Wheels and tyres

Note: Different types of tyre may affect the

performance of the TPM system. Always

replace tyres in accordance with

recommendations. See TYRE

SPECIFICATIONS - ARDUOUS TERRAIN

(page 239).

Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPM

System which monitors pressure in each tyre

(temporary use spare wheels are not fitted with

sensors and are consequently not monitored).

Wheels fitted with a TPM system can be easily

visually identified by the external metal lock nut

and valve (1). All Jaguar non-TPM system

wheels have a rubber valve fitted (2).

TPM system operation

The TPM system monitors pressure of the

tyres via sensors located in each wheel and a

receiver located within the vehicle.

Communication between sensor and receiver

is via Radio Frequency (RF) signals.

The tyre pressure warning

comprises a yellow warning telltale

within the instrument panel, and

the associated messages within the message

centre.

If the telltale light illuminates, you should stop

and check your tyres as soon as possible and

inflate them to the recommended pressure as

stated on the tyre pressure placard. If low

pressure warnings occur frequently, the cause

must be determined and rectified.

When driving through variable climatic

conditions the TPM system warnings may be

intermittent.

Your vehicle will also indicate a TPM System

malfunction by initially flashing and

subsequent continuous illumination of the

warning telltale. A text message will

accompany the system malfunction and will

display TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT. The

TPM system fault sequence will be activated at

every ignition cycle until the fault is rectified.

When a malfunction occurs, the system may

not be able to detect or signal low tyre pressure

as intended.

TPM system malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons which may include other

radio frequency systems that could cause

interference or the installation of incompatible

replacement tyres on the vehicle.

E91713

Auto

Inst Fu

l/100km

E95244

Wheels and tyres

236

Tyre pressure warning with speed

If the vehicle is to be driven at speeds in excess

of 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressures

should be increased as stated in this handbook

or on the placard label. Failure to increase the

tyre pressures and driving in excess of

160 km/h (100 mph), will illuminate the yellow

warning telltale and display a text message

TYRE PRESSURES LOW FOR SPEED. In the

event of this warning being displayed, vehicle

speed should be reduced

Temporary use spare wheel and tyre

change

If the temporary use spare wheel is fitted the

system will automatically recognise the change

in wheel positions. Then after approximately

ten minutes of driving above 25 km/h

(18 mph), a message TYRE NOT MONITORED

will be displayed accompanied by illumination

of the warning telltale and the corresponding

block in the vehicle graphic.

The warning telltale will initially flash and will

subsequently revert to continuous illumination.

Extended use of the temporary use spare wheel

will produce an additional text message TYRE

PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT.

This TPM system display sequence will be

activated at every ignition cycle until the

temporary use spare wheel is replaced by a

fully operational full size wheel and tyre

assembly.

Always replace the temporary use wheel before

having TPM system faults investigated. The

fault may well be rectified with the fitment of a

fully operational full size running tyre in lieu of

the temporary use spare wheel assembly.

Tyre changing

Always have your tyres serviced or changed by

a qualified engineer.

Care must be taken to avoid contact between

the bead of the tyre and the sensor during

removal and refitting of the tyre, otherwise the

sensor may become damaged and or

inoperable.

Sensors can be removed from the wheel by the

unscrewing of the valve retention nut.

Replacement sensor

Should the sensor require replacing, it should

be carried out by a Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

A replacement sensor must be fitted to a

running wheel in order to be recognised by the

system. The vehicle needs to be stationary for

15 minutes during the sensor fitment before

the system is ready to detect the new sensor.

The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of

fifteen minutes after the sensor change, and

then remain stationary for fifteen minutes to

activate full TPM system operation.

If the TPM system warning for any wheel does

not clear, even after ensuring correct inflation

and driving for more than ten minutes above

25 km/h (18 mph), you should seek qualified

assistance as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Valve stem seal, washer, nut, valve core

and cap should be replaced at every tyre

change. Valve stem seal, washer and nut must

be replaced if valve retention nut is loosened.

Sensor units and nuts must be refitted using

correct torque figures and associated profile.

Damage to the vehicle may result if these

precautions are not taken.

237

Wheels and tyres

TPM System information messages

Message Warning

Indicator

Priority

Indicator

Meaning

CHECK TYRE PRESSURE

(Graphic indication displays

which tyre is under-inflated.)

TPM

System

Amber You should as soon as possible stop, check

your tyre and inflate them to the

recommended pressure.

CHECK ALL TYRE

PRESSURES

TPM

System

Amber May be displayed when the vehicle is learning

that a new sensor is fitted to the vehicle and

one or more tyres has low pressure. You

should as soon as possible stop, check your

tyres and inflate them to the recommended

pressure.

TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM

FAULT

TPM

System

Amber 1. The wheels do not have TPM System

sensors fitted.

2. The TPM System sensors have become

defective, an unapproved accessory is

interfering with the system or a general fault

has been detected. Seek qualified assistance

as soon as possible.

TYRE NOT MONITORED

(Graphic indication displays

which tyre is not monitored.)

TPM

System

Red 1. A temporary use spare wheel is fitted.

Vehicle speed should be limited to 80 km/h

(50 mph). 2. A TPM System sensor has

become defective, an unapproved accessory

is interfering with the system or a wheel has

been fitted that does not have a sensor. Seek

qualified assistance as soon as possible.

TYRE PRESSURES LOW FOR

SPEED

TPM

System

Amber The tyre pressures are not suitable for high

speed driving. You should reduce vehicle

speed and inflate the tyres to recommended

pressures for high speed driving.

Wheels and tyres

238

TYRE GLOSSARY

lbf/in² or psi

Pounds per square inch, an imperial unit of

measure for pressure.

kPa

Kilo Pascal, a metric unit of measure for

pressure.

Cold tyre pressure

The air pressure in a tyre which has been

standing in excess of three hours, or driven for

less than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum pressure to which the tyre

should be inflated. This pressure is given on

the tyre side wall in lbf/in² (psi) and kPa.

Note: This pressure is the maximum allowed

by the tyre manufacturer. It is not the pressure

recommended for use.

Kerb weight

The weight of a standard vehicle, including a

full tank of fuel, any optional equipment fitted,

and with the correct coolant and oil levels.

Gross vehicle weight

The maximum permissible weight of a vehicle

with driver, passengers, load, luggage,

equipment, and towbar load.

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those items

replaced) of items available as factory installed

equipment.

Production options weight

The combined weight of options installed

which weigh in excess of 1.4 kg (3 lb) more

than the standard items that they replaced, and

are not already considered in kerb or accessory

weights. Items such as heavy duty brakes, high

capacity battery, special trim etc.

Vehicle capacity weight

The number of seats multiplied by 68 kg

(150 lb) plus the rated amount of load/luggage.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of kerb weight, accessory weight,

vehicle capacity weight, plus any production

option weights.

Rim

The metal support for a tyre, or tyre and tube,

upon which the tyre beads are seated.

Bead

The inner edge of a tyre that is shaped to fit to

the rim and form an air tight seal. The bead is

constructed of steel wires which are wrapped,

or reinforced, by the ply cords.

239

Wheels and tyres

TYRE SPECIFICATIONS - ARDUOUS TERRAIN

In certain markets, due to the possibility of very uneven or unmetalled roads, it is necessary to fit

tyres suitable for the conditions. These markets and the relevant tyre specification are detailed

below.

The following chart details the tyres recommended for use in the countries listed below:

A. Australia, Bahrain, Egypt, Israel, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Malaysia, Mexico, Morocco,

Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, South Africa, Syria, Thailand, United Arab Emirates.

B. Argentina, Belarus, Brazil, Bulgaria, Chile, Dominican Republic, Estonia, Guatemala,

Indonesia, Kaxakhstan, Panama, Philippines, Russia, Sri Lanka, Ukraine, Uzbekistan.

Wheel position Tyre size Pattern A B

Front and rear 235/55R17 99W Pirelli P7 No No

Front and rear 245/45R18 100Y X/L Pirelli PZero Asymmetric Yes Yes

Front and rear 245/45R18 100W X/L Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric Yes Yes

Front and rear 245/40R19 98Y X/L Dunlop Sport 01 Asymmetric Yes Yes

Front 255/35R20 97Y X/L Pirelli PZero Asymmetric Yes Yes

Rear 285/30R20 99Y X/L Pirelli PZero Asymmetric Yes Yes

Temporary use spare wheel (front and rear):

Alloy 4J x 18 T135/80R18 Pirelli

For all other countries you should refer to your local Dealer/Authorised Repairer for specific tyre

fitment.

Wheels and tyres

240

Accessory wheels and tyres

1. Front tyre pressure.

2. Rear tyre pressure.

3. Wheel and tyre information (size, speed

rating, etc.).

Note: Use the table above to record accessory

wheel and tyre information.

WARNING

Contact your Dealer/Authorised

Repairer before fitting any accessory

wheels and tyres. Your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer will be able to

offer guidance regarding the correct

accessories. Fitting incorrect wheel/tyre

combinations can seriously affect the ride and

handling of your vehicle. In extreme cases,

this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle.

E95187

241

Fuses

CHANGING A FUSE

Note: Jaguar recommend that owners do not

remove or replace relays. It is recommended

that you seek qualified assistance in the event

of a relay failure.

Always switch off the ignition and the affected

electrical circuit, before replacing a fuse.

Fuse failure is identified by an inoperative

circuit.

A special tool for removing and replacing Mini

fuses is provided in the engine compartment

fuse box, together with spare fuses.

Two types of fuses are fitted in the fuse boxes:

1. Mini-type

2. J-Case

If a spare fuse is used, renew it (or have it

renewed) with a fuse of the same amperage

rating.

Push the tool onto the suspect fuse and

withdraw it.

If the wire in the fuse is broken, the fuse has

blown.

Fit a new fuse using the tool.

Checking or renewing a blown fuse

J-Case fuses (2) and relays should only be

replaced by a qualified technician.

Fuses are colour coded according to the

amperage and the rating is also marked on

each fuse.

CAUTIONS

Always turn off the ignition system and

the affected electrical circuit, before

replacing a fuse.

Fit Jaguar approved replacement fuses

of the same rating and type, or fuses of

matching specification. Using an incorrect

fuse may result in damage to the vehicle's

electrical system, and can result in a fire.

No attempt should be made to repair a

fuse that has blown.

If the replacement fuse blows after

installation, the system should be

checked by your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

1 2

E95262

Fuses

242

FUSE BOX LOCATIONS

There are three separate fuse boxes fitted to the

vehicle, each one containing fuses protecting a

different group of circuits.

They are located in:

1. The engine compartment

2. The passenger compartment.

3. The luggage compartment.

Engine compartment fuse box

The fuse box is located underneath a cover on

the right-hand side of the engine compartment.

Remove the engine compartment right-hand

cover by releasing the turnbuckles (1).

Remove the fuse box lid by pressing the

retaining lugs (solid arrows) and lifting.

When refitting, press the fuse box lid in the

area of the retaining lugs until the lid engages.

CAUTION

When a fuse box lid is removed, take

care to protect the box from moisture,

and refit the lid at the earliest opportunity.

E95263

E95264

243

Fuses

Passenger compartment fuse box

The passenger compartment fuse box is

located behind an access hatch in the

right-hand footwell.

Press the release catch to access the fuse box.

Luggage compartment fuse box

The fuse box is located behind an access hatch

on the right-hand side of the luggage

compartment.

Push down on the top of the hatch and pull

away from the side of the vehicle, to access the

fuse box.

E95265

E95266

Fuses

244

Fuse and relay positions

1. Engine compartment fuse box.

2. Passenger compartment fuse box.

3. Luggage compartment fuse box

F28

F29

F30

F31

F32

F33

F34

F35

F36

F19 F10 F3

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F44

F43

F42

F41

F40

F39

F38

F37

F17

F18

F16

F20

F21

F22

F23

F24

F25

F26

F27

F21

F22

F23

F24

F20

F25

F14

F13

F15

F16

F18

F17

F19

F28

F29

F30

F36

F35

F34

F33

F32

F31

F12

F11

F10

F7 F26

F27

F21

F22

F23

F24

F20

F25

F14

F13

F15

F16

F18

F17

F19

F28

F29

F30

F36

F35

F34

F33

F32

F31

F12

F11

F10

JAG1533

F26

F27

F45

245

Fuses

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART

Engine compartment fuse box

Fuse No Rating

(amps)

Fuse

Colour

Circuit

F1 - - Not used.

F2 - - Not used.

F3 20A Blue Emissions system (petrol only).

F4 20A Blue Emissions system (petrol only).

F5 40A Green Anti-lock brake pump.

F6 30A Pink Power wash pump.

F7 - - Not used.

F8 - - Not used.

F9 50A Red Engine management.

F10 - - Not used.

F11 - - Not used.

F12 50A Red Secondary air injection (petrol only).

F13 30A Pink Wipers.

F14 30A Pink Starter solenoid.

F15 40A Green Screen heater.

F16 40A Green Screen heater.

F17 80A Black Radiator fan. (V6 petrol only)

F18 60A Yellow Glow plugs (diesel only).

F19 - - Not used.

F20 15A Blue Horn.

F21 25A Clear Anti-lock brakes.

F22 15A Blue Cigar lighter.

F23 - - Not used.

F24 5A Tan Adaptive cruise control.

F25 10A Red Anti-lock brakes.

F26 10A Red Engine management. JaguarDrive selector. Transmission

control module.

F27 5A Tan Diesel - Engine management.

F27 5A Tan Petrol - Secondary air injection.

Fuses

246

F28 - - Not used.

F29 - - Not used.

F30 - - Not used.

F31 - - Not used.

F32 - - Not used.

F33 - - Not used.

F34 - - Not used.

F35 5A Tan Air conditioning compressor clutch.

F36 15A Blue Engine management system (diesel only).

20A Blue Engine management system (V8 petrol only).

F37 15A Blue Ignition system (petrol only).

F38 5A Tan Power steering.

F39 5A Tan Headlamp levelling system.

F40 15A Blue Water pump (Supercharged vehicles only).

F41 5A Tan Diesel - Emissions system.

10A Red Petrol - Engine management system.

F42 30A Green Diesel - Engine management system. Ignition supply.

10A Red Petrol - Engine management system. Ignition supply. Radiator

fan.

F43 5A Tan Diesel - Fuel system.

10A Red Petrol - Engine management system. Emission control.

F44 5A Tan Engine management system (diesel only)

15A Blue Fuel injectors (petrol only).

F45 100A Blue Radiator fan (diesel and V8 petrol only).

Fuse No Rating

(amps)

Fuse

Colour

Circuit

247

Fuses

Passenger compartment fuse box

Fuse No Rating

(amps)

Fuse

Colour

Circuit

F1 - - Not used.

F2 - - Not used.

F3 20A Blue Driver's seat adjustment.

F4 20A Blue Driver's seat adjustment.

F5 - - Not used.

F6 - - Not used.

F7 - - Not used.

F8 20A Blue Front passenger's seat adjustment.

F9 20A Blue Front passenger's seat adjustment.

F10 20A Blue Left-hand rear door controls.

F11 20A Blue Right-hand rear door controls.

F12 - - Not used.

F13 10A Red Steering column adjust.

F14 - - Not used.

F15 - - Not used.

F16 5A Tan Sunblind.

F17 - - Not used.

F18 - - Not used.

F19 - - Not used.

F20 5A Tan Remote control receiver.

F21 5A Tan Foot brake.

F22 5A Tan Electric parking brake.

F23 5A Tan Driver's seat. Audio system. Auto headlamps. Upper centre

console switches.

F24 10A Red Front passenger seat. Electric windows. Mirror adjustment.

F25 20A Yellow Driver's heated/climate seat

F26 15A Blue Trailer power connector. Road pricing system.

F27 20A Yellow Front passenger's heated/climate seat.

F28 15A Blue Auxiliary power socket.

F29 20A Yellow Keyless entry system.

F30 10A Red Air conditioning.

Fuses

248

Luggage compartment fuse box

F31 15A Blue Sunroof.

F32 5A Tan Jaguar Smart Key docking station.

F33 5A Tan Diagnostic connector.

F34 5A Tan Instrument pack.

F35 15A Blue Interior lamps.

F36 10A Red Suspension system.

Fuse No Rating

(amps)

Fuse

Colour

Circuit

Fuse No Rating

(amps)

Fuse

Colour

Circuit

F1 30A Pink Air blower.

F2 30A Pink Electric parking brake.

F3 - - Not used.

F4 - - Not used.

F5 - - Not used.

F6 - - Not used.

F7 30A Pink Heated rear screen.

F8 30A Pink Audio system (Premium audio only).

F9 50A Red RBD link.

F10 40A Green Rear electronic differential (e-Diff).

F11 - - Not used.

F12 - - Not used.

F13 - - Not used.

F14 5A Tan Telephone.

F15 10A Red TV. DVD. DAB radio.

F16 - - Not used.

F17 - - Not used.

F18 - - Not used.

F19 - - Not used.

F20 - - Not used.

F21 - - Not used.

F22 - - Not used.

249

Fuses

F23 - - Not used.

F24 - - Not used.

F25 25A Clear Fuel pump.

F26 15A Blue Audio system. Portable audio interface.

F27 10A Red Navigation. Voice recognition. Touch-screen.

F28 15A Blue Trailer power connector. Road pricing system.

F29 15A Blue Trailer power connector.

F30 25A Clear Driver’s door module.

F31 25A Clear Front passenger door module.

F32 - - Not used.

F33 5A Tan Tyre pressure monitoring system.

F34 - - Not used.

F35 10A Red Supplementary restraint system.

F36 10A Red Pedestrian protection system.

Fuse No Rating

(amps)

Fuse

Colour

Circuit

Emergency equipment

250

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

If the vehicle is stationary in an unsafe location,

or may cause a hazard to other road users,

switch on the hazard warning flashers. Press

the switch to turn the hazard warning lamps

on.

Note: Hazard warning lamps can be used when

the ignition is on or off.

WARNING TRIANGLE

The warning triangle is located in the luggage

compartment, attached to a luggage anchor

point.

FIRST AID KIT

If the vehicle is equipped with a first aid kit, it is

strapped to the side of the luggage

compartment.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER

Dependent on market, if the vehicle is equipped

with a fire extinguisher, it will either be located

in the luggage compartment, or mounted to the

front passenger seat.

E94710

251

Status after a collision

DRIVING AFTER A COLLISION

Before starting or driving

If the vehicle has been involved in an accident

it should be checked thoroughly before

attempting to start the engine or drive the

vehicle.

Check for:-

•Fuel leaks.

•Fluid leaks.

•Battery damage.

•Damage to wiring.

•Damage to lights.

•Damage to steering, suspension, wheels

or tyres.

•Sharp or protruding bodywork.

•Operation of doors and locks.

•Condition and operation of seat belts and

SRS components.

•Activation of the pedestrian protection

system.

•Condition of child seats and their

mounting/attachment points.

Note: This list is not exhaustive.

Resetting the fuel cut-off

The fuel system cut-off forms part of the Safety

and Restraint System (SRS) fitted to your

vehicle. Following an impact, and depending on

the severity, the fuel pump may be switched

off.

1. Switch the ignition off, and wait for 10

seconds.

2. Without pressing the brake pedal, press

the engine START/STOP button, to switch

the electrical circuits on. Wait for 30

seconds.

3. Check the vehicle thoroughly for fuel leaks.

If a leak is detected switch the ignition off

immediately.

•The vehicle must not be started if a leak

is present. Seek qualified advice, and

have the vehicle recovered.

4. If no leaks are detected, start the engine.

WARNING

If the vehicle is involved in a collision

it should be checked by a Dealer/

Authorised repairer, or suitably

qualified personnel, before starting or driving.

WARNING

The fuel cut-off should never be reset

if you can smell fuel, or a leak can be

seen. Doing so can lead to a fire

which may cause personal injury or death.

Status after a collision

252

When driving

When driving a vehicle which has been

involved in a collision use caution and pay extra

attention to the operation of the vehicle. If any

changes in vehicle operation after the collision

are noted when compared to it's operation

before the collision, do not continue to drive

the vehicle. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is

safe to do so, and have the vehicle recovered.

Pay particular attention to changes in:-

•Steering.

•Braking.

•Unusual noises.

•Warning lights or messages displayed.

•Problems with electrical systems.

INSPECTING SAFETY SYSTEM

COMPONENTS

Following a collision the seat belt and

Supplementary Restraint System components

should be inspected for damage and/or

deformity. The inspection and any subsequent

repair work should only be carried out by a

Dealer/Authorised Repairer, or other suitably

qualified personnel.

Components which require inspection

include:-

•Seat belt webbing and mechanisms.

•Seat belt pre-tensioners.

•Airbag covers and modules.

•Seat frames and mounting points.

•Child seats.

•Child seat anchor points.

•Pedestrian protection system.

Note: This list is not exhaustive.

In addition to the physical items checked, the

electronic control system and its associated

wiring should also be checked thoroughly. This

process will include a diagnostic check which

can only be carried out by a Dealer/Authorised

repairer or suitably qualified and equipped

persons.

WARNING

It is not recommended that the

vehicle be driven or used until all of

the occupant protection systems

have been checked.

253

Vehicle recovery

TOWING POINTS

Front and rear towing eyes and lashing points

The front and rear towing eyes are the only

recommended lashing points on the vehicle.

Attaching the front towing eye

The front towing eye is included in the tool kit,

located in the under-floor area of the luggage

compartment. See TOOL KIT (page 224).

1. Press the lower edge of the towing eye

cover in the front bumper to open, then

pull from the aperture, allowing the cover

to hang from its retaining strap.

2. Locate the towing eye through the bumper

and screw the towing eye

counter-clockwise into its fixing, until

secure.

E95301

WARNINGS

The towing eyes at the front and rear

of the vehicle are designed for

on-road recovery only. If they are

used for any purpose other than those

indicated, it may result in vehicle damage and

serious injury.

Never use the towing eyes to tow a

trailer, caravan etc. Doing so may

result in vehicle damage and serious

injury.

CAUTION

Only use the lashing points indicated, or

over-tyre tie-downs, to secure the

vehicle to the transporter or trailer. Use of any

other position (e.g. lower control arms) may

result in damage to the vehicle.

Vehicle recovery

254

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

The recommended method for

recovery/transportation of the vehicle, is on a

transporter or trailer designed for that purpose.

Ensure that transportation is carried out by

suitably qualified persons, and that the vehicle

is secured correctly.

If the vehicle is being transported on a trailer or

vehicle flat-bed transporter, the parking brake

must be applied, the wheels are chocked and

the Emergency Park Release (EPR) operated,

to ensure that the transmission remains in N

and does not automatically select P.

Emergency Park Release (EPR)

When recovering your vehicle, it is essential

that the EPR is operated. EPR prevents the

transmission from automatically selecting P,

ensuring that the transmission remains in

neutral (N). EPR is operated by a lever located

behind a trim panel in the cubby box. Before

activating the EPR, select P, apply the parking

brake and turn the ignition off.

1. Open the twin cup holder lid.

2. Open the cubby box lid.

3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, lever the

trim panel upwards (at the point indicated)

to release and remove.

E95304

E96407

255

Vehicle recovery

4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, turn the

locking device 90° counter-clockwise.

5. Apply the foot brake.

6. Use the strap to pull the EPR lever

upwards, until it latches in the vertical

position.

When EPR is activated, the JaguarDrive

selector will remain in P, but the selector

indicator and the gear display in the message

centre will both flash N (if ignition is on), to

indicate that EPR is active.

When vehicle transportation has been

completed, EPR should be cancelled, to allow

Park to be re-engaged.

Cancelling EPR

1. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, release

the latch (arrowed).

2. Return the EPR lever to its horizontal

position.

3. Turn the locking device 90° clockwise to

secure.

4. Replace the trim panel and close the cubby

box and twin cup holder lids.

E96408

E96409

Vehicle recovery

256

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR

WHEELS

Note: The recommended recovery method is

to raise all four wheels.

Towing procedure

1. The vehicle should be parked on firm level

ground, with the parking brake on, and the

gear selector in P (Park).

2. Secure the towing attachment from the

recovery vehicle to the front towing eye.

See TOWING POINTS (page 253).

3. Dock the Jaguar Smart Key and switch on

the ignition. See GENERAL INFORMATION

(page 132).

4. Apply the foot brake and release the

parking brake.

5. With the foot brake still applied, activate

the Emergency Park Release (EPR).

See TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

(page 254).

6. The vehicle can now be towed a maximum

of 0.8 km (0.5 miles) at a maximum speed

of 48 kmh (30 mph).

7. Upon arrival at the destination, ensure

wherever possible that the vehicle is

parked on firm level ground.

8. Lower the Emergency Park Release (EPR)

lever, to cancel EPR and to re-engage P

(Park).

9. Apply the parking brake.

10. Switch off the ignition and remove the

Jaguar Smart Key.

11. Remove the towing attachment from the

towing eye.

WARNINGS

Ensure that the remote control

remains docked whilst the vehicle is

being towed. Removing the remote

control will engage the steering lock, which

will prevent the vehicle from steering

correctly.

If the engine cannot be run whilst the

vehicle is being towed, there will be

no power assistance for the steering

or brakes. This will result in greater effort

being required to steer or slow the vehicle, and

greatly increased stopping distances.

CAUTIONS

The vehicle should only be towed in a

forward direction with all four wheels on

the ground.

The vehicle should only be towed for a

maximum of 0.8 km (0.5 miles), at a

maximum speed of 48 km/h (30 mph). Towing

for a greater distance or at a higher speed, may

result in serious damage to the transmission.

CAUTION

Leaving the ignition switched on for

extended periods will cause the battery

to drain.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when detaching

towing equipment. Vehicle movement

is possible which can result in serious

injuries.

257

Vehicle identification

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and

recommended maximum vehicle weights, are

shown on a plate adhered to the hinge side of

the left-hand (right-hand in China) front door.

VIN should match the VIN recorded in the

Service Portfolio, and the VIN visible through

the windscreen.

ENGINE NUMBER

Note: To access the number, it may be

necessary to remove the engine covers. For

further assistance, contact your Dealer/

Authorised Repairer.

V6 Petrol engines

The number is located on the lower left-hand

side of the cylinder block, near the bedplate.

V8 Petrol engines

The number is located on the front of the

right-hand cam cover.

Diesel engines

The number is located on a metal label attached

to the top of the left-hand camshaft cover

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

The transmission number is located on a label

attached to the transmission casing.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN)

As a deterrent to thieves, and to assist the

Police, the VIN is stamped on a plate which is

visible through the lowest part of the left side of

the windscreen.

Note: If you need to communicate with a

Dealer/Authorised repairer, you may be asked

to quote the VIN number.

VEHICLE BUILD DATE PLATE

This is the calendar month and year in which

the body and power train assemblies were

conjoined and the vehicle was driven from the

production line.

The vehicle built date is shown on the VIN

plate.

E95305

E95306

Technical specifications

258

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

Data V6 Diesel

Number of cylinders 6

Displacement 2998 cc

Compression ratio 16:1

Data V6 Petrol

Number of cylinders 6

Displacement 2967 cc

Compression ratio 10.5:1

Data V8 Normally Aspirated Petrol

Number of cylinders 8

Displacement 5000 cc

Compression ratio 11.5:1

Data V8 Supercharged Petrol

Number of cylinders 8

Displacement 5000 cc

Compression ratio 9.5:1

259

Technical specifications

WEIGHTS

Note: ¹The maximum permitted luggage compartment load can be exceeded, provided the

requirements regarding the maximum permissible axle weights and tyre pressures are followed.

¹ The maximum permissible weight of the vehicle including passengers and load.

² The front and rear axle maximum loads can not be reached simultaneously as this will exceed the

GVW limit.

³ The maximum permissible weight of the vehicle and braked trailer including their respective loads.

Variant Vehicle weight

from

Front axle weight

from

Rear axle weight

from

Max. luggage

compartment

load¹

V6 Diesel 1820 kg

4012 lbs

1016 kg

2240 lbs

804 kg

1772 lbs

35 kg

77 lbs

V6 Petrol 1679 kg

3702 lbs

878 kg

1936 lbs

801 kg

1766 lbs

35 kg

77 lbs

V8 Normally

Aspirated Petrol

1780 kg

3924 lbs

961 kg

2119 lbs

819 kg

1806 lbs

35 kg

77 lbs

V8 Supercharged

Petrol

1891 kg

4169 lbs

1022 kg

2253 lbs

869 kg

1916 lbs

35 kg

77 lbs

Variant Gross Vehicle

Weight (GVW)¹

Maximum front

axle load²

Maximum rear

axle load²

Gross Train

Weight³

V6 Diesel 2360 kg

5203 lbs

1200 kg

2646 lbs

1215 kg

2679 lbs

4210 kg

9281 lbs

V6 Petrol 2215 kg

4883 lbs

1090 kg

2403 lbs

1180 kg

2601 lbs

4065 kg

8962 lbs

V8 Normally

Aspirated Petrol

2285 kg

5038 lbs

1130 kg

2491 lbs

1200 kg

2646 lbs

Not

Applicable

V8 Supercharged

Petrol

2345 kg

5170 lbs

1165 kg

2568 lbs

1200 kg

2646 lbs

Not

Applicable

Technical specifications

260

DIMENSIONS

¹ Narrowest dimension applies to 20 inch wheels only.

E95307

Item Description mm/inches

1 Width 2053/80.5

2 Width with mirrors folded 1877/74.0

3 Track - front 1559/61.4

4 Maximum height 1460/57.5

5 Track - rear¹ 1571-1605/61.9-63.2

6 Wheelbase 2909/114.5

7 Length excluding number plate plinth 4961/195.3

- Turning circle (kerb to kerb) 11.5 m/37.7 ft.

261

Technical specifications

Wheel alignment data (China only)

Brake pedal travel (China only)

The brake pedal travel is set at the factory and

is non-adjustable.

Wheel alignment - front +0.25°

Wheel alignment - rear +0.13°

Camber - front -0.30°

Camber - rear -0.69°

Castor - front 6.61°

Castor - rear non-adjustable

Type approvals

262

DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY

E97083

263

Type approvals

E97084

Type approvals

264

E97085

265

Type approvals

E97086

Type approvals

266

E97087

267

Type approvals

JAG1291

Audio introduction

268

RADIO RECEPTION

Some interference is to be expected from time

to time during a journey. Occasionally, it may

be necessary to retune the audio unit, to offset

the effects of moving from one transmitter area

to another.

While Radio Data System (RDS) automatic

retuning helps to reduce the effects of signal

changes, some manual retuning may still be

required (especially for local stations) in areas

of weak reception.

FM Signals travel in a straight line, so large

obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the

vehicle from the signal, causing distortion or

loss of reception (known as dead spots).

Distortion can also occur if FM signals received

directly from the transmitter, mix with signals

deflected by obstructions such as mountains,

hills and tall buildings. This is known as

multi-path distortion.

Note: Although distortion, interference and

lack of signal clarity are sometimes attributed

to a fault in the radio, this is rarely the case.

JAG1328

269

Audio unit overview

AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW

The Jaguar infotainment system contains

AM/FM radio, compact disc player and portable

audio interface. Digital (DAB) radio, six-disc CD

player and TV are optional.

Audio controls

The audio unit is controlled by the

touch-screen (1) and console buttons (2–8).

1. Touch-screen: See TOUCH-SCREEN

(page 109).

2. LOAD: Press to load one or more CDs.

See LOADING COMPACT DISCS

(page 292).

3. Seek up: Short press to seek next station

frequency up or next CD track.

4. Settings button:

•Short press to display the audio Settings

menu.

•Long press (two seconds) to display the

Vol presets settings menu.

5. Audio system on/off and volume control:

•Press to switch the system on/off.

•Rotate to increase or decrease volume

level. Any volume adjustment made in

any mode will be memorised for that

mode.

6. SOURCE: Press repeatedly to scroll

through all audio sources: FM1, FM2, AM,

DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, CD, Portable audio

and TV.

7. Seek down: Short press to seek next

station frequency down or previous CD

track.

8. Eject: Press to eject CD. See EJECTING

COMPACT DISCS (page 294).

9. CD load and eject slot.

WARNING

Sustained exposure to high sound

levels can damage your hearing.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 BBC R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106 2

Radio 1

Settings

Autostore

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89 0 BBC R2

Portable audio

E93935

Audio unit overview

270

Steering wheel controls

1. Rotate up or down to increase or decrease

volume.

2. Rotate up or down and release repeatedly

to scroll through preset radio stations or

CD tracks. Rotate up and hold for two

seconds to select next strong radio station

or next loaded CD (if a six-disc system is

fitted).

3. SOURCE: Press repeatedly to scroll

through all audio sources.

4. Press to mute audio unit. This button is

also used to dial, answer or end calls in

phone mode and to start a Voice session.

Sound system overview

There are three versions of the sound system:

•The standard Jaguar sound system

comprises a 140W system with AM/FM

radio featuring EON, RDS, PTY, TA and

in-dash CD player with automatic volume

control, MP3 compatibility (six-disc

system only) and 8 speakers

•The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System

system also includes a remote amplifier,

upgraded speakers plus an additional

subwoofer mounted in the rear of the

vehicle.

•The Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround

Sound System has been developed in

conjunction with Bowers & Wilkins™ and

incorporates upgraded kevlar speakers,

additional mid range speakers mounted in

the front doors, an additional centre

speaker mounted in the fascia and

additional surround sound speakers to

support Dolby Prologic II Surround

Sound™.

CAUTIONS

Care must be taken to avoid spilling or

splashing drinks onto the audio unit

controls, speakers or touch-screen. In the

event of such an occurrence, contact your

Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

The audio unit may be damaged if

unsuitable items, such as coins or credit

cards, are inserted into the CD load slot.

E94043

1 2

4 3

271

Audio unit operation

ON/OFF CONTROL

The audio system can be used with the vehicle

ignition on or off, but will switch off

automatically when the ignition is switched off.

To operate the audio system when the ignition

has been switched off, press the On/off volume

control.

The audio system can be switched on in one of

two ways:

With the vehicle ignition on or off, press the

on/off control on the console, or;

With the vehicle ignition on and the

touch-screen active, select Audio/TV from the

Home menu.

The touch-screen displays the current audio

settings. The information displayed will depend

on the mode selected, e.g. AM/FM radio.

VOLUME CONTROL

The volume of the audio output can be adjusted

in one of two ways:

Rotate the audio on/off and volume control on

the audio console, or;

Rotate the volume control on the steering

wheel.

E94044

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

ft Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

AUDIO OFF

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E94045

WARNING

Sustained exposure to high sound

levels can damage your hearing.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E94046

E94085

E94086

Audio unit operation

272

While the volume is being adjusted, the volume

level is displayed on the touch-screen display

using a graduated bar.

Volume settings

A number of functions have preset volume

levels. You can adjust these settings on the Vol

presets menu.

1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select

Vehicle.

2. Select Syst. settings and then select Vol.

presets.

3. Use the + and – icons to adjust the volume

levels for the options available.

Automatic volume control (AVC)

This maintains radio volume at a level sufficient

to overcome road noise, as vehicle speed

increases or decreases.

On the Vol presets menu, select Low, Medium

or High levels for AVC.

The default AVC setting is Medium.

AUDIO CONTROL

Sound settings

On the main AM/FM screen, select Settings.

Select Sound to display the sound quality

settings menu.

Note: The list of settings available depends on

the sound system fitted to the vehicle.

See AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW (page 269).

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Left Right

TP TA PTY

Valet

12 : 26 pm

Audio

External

E94087

Voice

Vehicle

Display set

Preferences

Button audio

Parking aid

Vol. presets

AVC Low Medium High

12 : 26 pm

Navigation

Phone

E94052

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 BBC R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

Radio 1

Settings

Aut

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 BBC R2

Portable audio

E94055

273

Audio unit operation

Standard and Premium sound systems

To increase or decrease Bass and Treble levels,

select + or –.

Balance and Fade levels can be optimised for a

selected seating position, by selecting L (left)

or R (right) adjustment and R (rear) or F (front)

adjustment.

On vehicles fitted with a Subwoofer, to adjust

the Subwoofer volume level up or down, select

Sub + or –.

Bowers & Wilkins™ surround sound

system

Bass, Treble and Sub are adjusted as for the

Premium system.

Select Stereo, 3Ch (3-channel surround

sound) or DPLII (Dolby Prologic II surround

sound™), to choose the sound mode you

require. Your selection will be displayed in the

information panel at the top of the display.

Note: DPLII is not available for AM/FM radio

broadcasts.

Note: The settings available for adjustment

depend on the sound mode currently selected

(Stereo, 3Ch or DPLII).

From the Options menu, select Bal/Fade.

Select the four directional icons as required to

adjust the balance and fade.

Select DPLII and on the Settings menu, you

can scroll down to the Centre and Surround

settings. Select the + or – buttons to adjust

these settings as required.

Audio

Options

PTY

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Treble

Bass

Balance

Fade

E94056

Sub

Audio

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

PTY

E94274

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Treble

Sub

PTY

Bass

Stereo 3 Ch. DPLII

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Surround

PTY

Centre

E94671

Audio unit operation

274

WAVEBAND BUTTON

Select AM/FM to cycle the radio through FM1,

FM2 and AM (both Medium and Long

wavebands).

Your waveband selection will be shown in the

display panel.

Note: If a CD is being played, select AM/FM to

start radio operation.

AUTOSTORE CONTROL

The Autostore function finds and stores up to

nine strong stations on a selected waveband to

presets 1 to 9. This is a useful way to locate and

store stations with a good signal when

travelling in an unfamiliar area.

If no preset stations are currently stored, select

Autostore to start the process for storing

presets.

If preset stations are already stored, a short

touch will recall those stations and tune to the

previous station, whereas a long touch of

Autostore will start a new autostore process.

The radio will be briefly muted while it searches

the selected waveband (AM or FM) for up to

nine strong stations.

When the process is complete, the radio will

default to preset 1 and audio volume will be

restored.

If stations cannot be located for all the preset

positions, those that are found will be allocated

positions commencing with number 1, leaving

the remainder empty.

Note: The display will show — for empty

presets.

When stations have been stored, select

Autostore to switch between the

automatically-stored stations and the

manually-stored stations.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 BBC R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

Radio 1

Settings

Autostore

P TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 BBC R2

Portable audio

E94049

FM2 AMFM1

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R C R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

Radio 1

Settings

Autostore

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 BBC R2

Portable audio

E94050

275

Audio unit operation

STATION PRESET BUTTONS

Tuning stations

The seek buttons on the audio console and on

the touch-screen perform the same function.

Short touch: In AM or FM mode, selecting and

releasing the seek buttons will activate radio

tuning through the frequency range, up or

down, to the next available strong station.

The touch-screen displays Seek on the upper

display until a station has been found, and will

then display the station name during broadcast

(if available).

Long touch (two seconds): In AM or FM mode,

for as long as the seek button is being touched,

the frequencies will be scanned either up or

down. If you then release the button, the

touch-screen displays Manual for a short time

and repeated short touches of the button will

manually change the frequency.

Storing stations as presets

On each waveband, nine stations can be

memorised using the touch-screen keypad.

After tuning to a station, touch and hold (two

seconds) the selected preset number. An

audible signal indicates that the station is

stored. If RDS information is broadcast, the

station name will replace the preset number.

Briefly touch the preset key to recall the stored

station.

Rotate and release the steering wheel selector

control repeatedly to cycle through all the

preset stations.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

adio 1

Settings

Autostore

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 Seek

Portable audio

E94063

Seek

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

dio 1

Settings

Autostore

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 Manual

Portable audio

E94064

Manual

Fox FM

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

C R2 BBC R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Gala y 106.2

Radio

Settings

Autostore

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 BBC R2

Portable audio

E94051

Audio unit operation

276

TRAFFIC INFORMATION CONTROL

With the Traffic Announcements (TA) option

on, local traffic announcements will interrupt

normal broadcasts or playback.

If audio volume is set at a minimum, then the

volume will increase for the announcement,

returning to the previous volume setting

afterwards.

When broadcasting an announcement, a traffic

announcement pop-up is displayed.

When enabled, TA will appear at the top of the

touch-screen. The audio unit then checks that

the station has Radio Data System (RDS)

Traffic Programme (TP). If it is not available on

the current station, the display will not show

TP. If TP is not displayed with TA after 45

seconds have elapsed, then the audio unit will

search for a new TP station.

To change this setting, on the AM/FM screen,

select Settings.

Select Options and then switch the Traffic

option On or Off.

Note: You can switch the Traffic option on and

off on the Settings menu for each individual

source.

Skipping traffic announcements

Traffic announcements (TA) can be skipped

during broadcast by selecting Skip, which will

cancel the pop-up and the announcement. You

will be returned to your selected station.

Note: Selecting Skip will not switch off TA

permanently and it will remain ready for the

next interrupt.

Select Traffic off to switch TA off completely

(the TA indicator will clear from the display).

Selecting anywhere on the pop-up screen will

cancel the pop-up, but the traffic

announcement will continue to be broadcast.

Note: TA relies on the broadcast information

from local radio stations and may be better in

some locations than others.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 BBC R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

Radio 1

Settings

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 BBC R2

Portable audio

E94055

Audio/TV

Options

PTY

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Traffic

OnOff

Off

OnOff

Dist. LocalOff

OnOffFM text

EON

REG

E94053

Home

Audio

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12 : 26 pm

External

Traffic announcement

SkipTraffic off

BBC

95.6

FM1

E94059

277

Audio unit menus

RADIO DATA SYSTEM (RDS)

Options menu overview

Your radio is equipped with Radio Data System

(RDS), which enables the audio unit to receive

additional information with normal FM radio

signals.

When tuned to certain stations on the FM

waveband, the radio decodes signals

transmitted to provide the functions listed

below (dependent upon the service available

from the broadcasters).

Note: Not all FM radio stations broadcast RDS

information. If you are currently tuned to a

non-RDS station, then RDS features will be

unavailable.

Select Settings to display the Settings menu,

then select Options to display the list of RDS

options.

Traffic

RDS provides local travel information (where

broadcast). See TRAFFIC INFORMATION

CONTROL (page 276).

Regionalisation (REG)

As you drive into different radio reception

areas, RDS automatically retunes the radio to

the strongest signal. The Regional (REG)

option stops the system from tuning to another

local radio station with a stronger signal.

From the Options menu, you can switch the

REG option On or Off. With REG on, your

selected local radio station will remain tuned

even if reception levels drop.

Alternative frequency (AF)

Some radio stations broadcast on different

frequencies in different parts of the country. If

the selected station signal weakens, the radio

will automatically re-tune to a stronger

alternative frequency (AF), if one is available

(this feature is particularly useful on long

journeys where the vehicle travels through

different transmitter areas serving the same

radio station).

From the Options menu, you can switch AF On

or Off.

Enhanced other networks (EON)

The Enhanced Other Network (EON) option will

tune to any radio station on the same station

network as the one that you are listening to, if

the signal becomes weak.

Either local (Local) or distant (Dist.) networks

can be enabled on the Options menu, or the

option can be switched Off.

Audio/TV

Options

PTY

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Traffic

OnOff

Off

OnOff

Dist. LocalOff

OnOffFM text

EON

REG

E94053

Audio unit menus

278

FM text

FM text displays any text messages sent out by

the current station.

Select the arrow icon to display a pop-up

screen showing the complete text message.

Select Cancel to remove the pop-up screen.

PRIORITY PROGRAMME TYPE (PTY)

PTY overview

The Programme Type (PTY) feature has two

functions:

•To set a desired PTY category for the

current station.

•To search for a station in a selected PTY

category and then retune to that station (if

found).

Select Settings to display the Settings menu.

Select PTY to display a list of available PTY

categories.

Selecting PTY categories

Select the arrow icon to scroll through the list

of available PTY categories.

Select a PTY category to select it in the list;

touch the category again to clear the selection.

If you want to deselect all PTY categories,

select Clear all.

Note: If no PTY categories are selected, then

the text PTY will disappear from the top of the

touch-screen display.

While tuned to a station, touch the required

PTY category (or categories), then touch the

previous screen arrow. The audio unit will now

wait for RDS information to indicate that a

station has changed its programme type.

If the current station is already in the selected

PTY category and reception is lost, then the

radio will attempt to find another station with

the correct PTY category.

Note: PTY is active in FM radio, CD, TV and

Portable audio modes only.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 BBC R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

Radio 1

Settings

utostore

TP TA PT AF REG 3CH

FM2 89. BBC R2

Portable audio

Text sent by station

E94057

Text sent by station

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 BBC R2

Portable audio

FM text

The latest news headlines from BBC Radio 2.

Valet

E94058

Audio

Options

PTY

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Clear all

PTY

Education

News

Current affairs

Information

Sport

E94088

279

Audio unit menus

PTY alarm (where broadcast)

The Alarm option in the PTY menu will alert

you to a crisis of national or international

importance. Any radio broadcast or other audio

playback will be interrupted. When such a

broadcast is made, the word ALARM will be

displayed on the touch-screen. The default

setting is On.

PTY search

If you touch a PTY category and then select

PTY search, the audio unit will search for and

then retune to an available station belonging

that category. If no station is found in that

category, then NO PTY is displayed and you

will return to the current station.

While PTY is displayed (for ten seconds

following a search), a search of PTY categories

can be performed using the Seek buttons.

Audio

Options

PTY

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Alarm

National music

Oldies music

Folk music

Documentary

Clear all

PTY

E94062

Digital audio broadcasting

280

GENERAL INFORMATION

Digital radio reception

DAB radio is very different from normal AM/FM

radio in both operation and sound quality. The

DAB network is designed to provide near CD

quality from radio broadcasts. In most

locations DAB signals are available without

hiss, crackle, pop or interference, and no

fading or overlap.

DAB radio can significantly increase the

number of radio channels/stations available.

The DAB signals are transmitted to most major

cities, towns and motorway networks.

Radio signals travel in a straight line so large

obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the

vehicle from the signal, causing temporary loss

of reception (known as dead spots).

Digital radio is transmitted from regional

transmitters. Some local channels are not

available outside the range of their

transmitters. If you want to listen to local

channels as you move around the country, use

the auto-tune function (AUTO) to build new

channel lists. For more information on the

auto-tune function. See CHANNEL

AUTOMATIC TUNING (page 284).

Note: If any auxiliary electrical equipment is

connected to the vehicle, then this may reduce

the DAB radio sound quality.

E94094

281

Digital audio broadcasting

Ensembles

Unlike AM/FM radio, DAB transmits several

channels/stations on a single frequency. A

group of channels is known as an ensemble.

Ensembles may consist of six or more

channels (national or local). Some may have

sub-channels offering several listening

options.

When scrolling through the channels the

sub-channels will appear in order, and can be

selected in the same way as the channels. If

reception is lost when the vehicle is in motion

select AUTO to build a new list of ensembles.

The table below provides an example of the

ensembles, channels and sub-channels

available in one location.

Ensemble Channel/station Sub-channel 1 Sub-channel 2

First ensemble Channel/station 1

Channel/station 2 Sub-channel

Channel/station 3

Channel/station 4

Channel/station 5

Channel/station 6 Sub-channel Sub-channel

Channel/station 7

Channel/station 8

Channel/station 9

Second ensemble Channel/station 1

Channel/station 2

Channel/station 3

Channel/station 4

Channel/station 5

Channel/station 6

Third ensemble Channel/station 1

Channel/station 2

Channel/station 3

Channel/station 4

Digital audio broadcasting

282

AUDIO CONTROLS

1. Touch-screen. See TOUCH-SCREEN

(page 109).

2. Seek up.

•Short press to find the next channel.

•Long press (two seconds) to find next

available ensemble.

3. Settings:

•Short press to display the audio Settings

menu.

•Long press (two seconds) to display the

Vol presets menu.

4. On/off and volume control.

5. SOURCE button.

•Press repeatedly to select the next

available audio source FM1, FM2, AM,

DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, iPod, USB,

Auxiliary, TV.

6. Seek down.

•Short press to find previous channel.

•Long press (two seconds) to find

previous available ensemble.

Steering wheel controls

1. Rotate up or down to increase or decrease

the audio volume.

2. Rotate and release to scroll through

channels. Rotate and hold for two seconds

to select next available digital ensemble.

3. Press the SOURCE button repeatedly to

scroll through the available audio sources

FM1, FM2, AM, DAB1, DAB2, DAB3, CD,

iPod, USB, Auxiliary input and TV.

4. Press to mute the audio unit.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Viking

Trent Century BBC Leic

Radio 1

Settings

DAB search

TA-FM DAB-i L nk DPL I

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portab e audio

BBC National DAB

E94503

E94043

1 2

4 3

283

Digital audio broadcasting

DISPLAY OPTIONS

Touch-screen information panel

1. DAB band indicator.

2. TA-FM is displayed if the FM traffic option

is enabled. See SETTINGS (page 288).

3. The arrow icon indicates that subchannels

are available under the current channel.

SubCh is displayed if a subchannel is

tuned to.

4. Link is displayed if the Link DAB option is

enabled. See SETTINGS (page 288).

5. Dolby Prologic II surround sound

indicator.

6. Channel name.

7. DAB-i indicates that DAB Announcements

are enabled.

Note: The display can also show PTY or

Ensemble information if you have selected one

of these options under DAB text on the Settings

menu. See SETTINGS (page 288).

DAB radio text

Many digital channels transmit additional text

(DLS, Dynamic Label Segment) to accompany

a broadcast. For safety reasons, this text does

not scroll across the screen.

The first 16 characters of text are displayed

(1). If you want to read the full text, you must

select the additional text button (2).

The DAB radio text pop-up screen displays all

128 characters of text. This text may change

periodically, if the broadcaster chooses to do

so.

To remove the pop-up screen, briefly touch it.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Viking

Trent Century BBC Leic

Radio 1

Settings

DAB search

TA FM DAB i Link DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portable audio

DAB radio text

BBC National DAB

TA-FM DAB-i Link DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

BBC National DAB

E94179

1 2 3 4 567

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Vikin

Trent ury BBC

Radio 1

Settings

DAB search

TA FM DAB i L nk DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portable audio

DAB radio text

BBC National DAB

E94180

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

TA FM DAB i Link DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portable audio

DAB radio text

The latest news headlines from BBC Radio 2.

E94181

Digital audio broadcasting

284

CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING

Note: When you first use the DAB radio, you

will be unable to listen to any digital broadcasts

until you have completed the auto-tune

process.

In DAB mode, select DAB search, then select

Auto-tune to start automatic tuning and build a

list of all the digital ensembles and channels

that are available in your region.

While automatic tuning is running, the

message Auto-tuning will be displayed on the

touch-screen, along with a percentage

complete. When tuning is complete, the first

channel found will start playing.

Note: The auto-tune process can take longer

than one minute to complete.

To update the list of local channels when you

move to a different region, select Auto-tune

again. You can also add local channels as

presets to minimise the need for auto-tuning as

you move location.

CHANNEL OPTIONS

To receive digital broadcasts, short press the

SOURCE button repeatedly to toggle between

the available sources, or briefly touch the DAB

Radio button on the touch-screen. See AUDIO

CONTROLS (page 282).

Choose DAB1, DAB2 or DAB3 to receive digital

radio broadcasts. The three DAB sources

enable you to preset up to 18 different

channels. See PRESET BUTTONS (page 287).

The channel that was last played on your

chosen digital source will be selected for

playback automatically.

Note: If this is the first time you have used DAB

radio, you must first build a list of available

channels using the auto-tune function.

See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING

(page 284).

Digital radio channels are organised into

groups called ensembles. Some channels may

sometimes provide one or more subchannels.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Vik

Trent Century BBC Leic

Radio 1

Settings

DAB search

TA FM DAB i L nk DPL I

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portable audio

DAB radio text

BBC National DAB

12 : 26 pm

Now Middlesbrough

BBC National DAB

Digital1 Network

EMAP Leeds

MXR

Audio/TV

TA FM DAB i L nk DPL I

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Channel list

Subchannel list

Ensemble list

PTY

Channel data

Auto-tune

E94182

E94185

285

Digital audio broadcasting

If the digital radio signal is lost or the system

takes time to tune in to a channel, then the

display screen will show the message No

reception.

The problem may be caused by a temporary

problem, such as buildings or trees blocking

the signal, or it might be a problem with the

broadcast service operator. Try tuning to an

alternative channel and return later to see if the

problem has been resolved. If you are unable to

tune to any other channels, switch off the audio

unit and then try again.

Finding a channel

Briefly touch one of the channel seek buttons to

select the next available digital channel. The

seek up button selects the next channel, the

seek down button selects the previous channel.

Note: If the next or previous channel is in a

different ensemble, then there will be a pause

before the channel is located. The message

Searching... is displayed on the screen.

On the touch-screen, if channels have been

preset, select one of the six preset buttons to

start playing that channel. If no channel has

been preset, the button will display ---.

Finding a subchannel

If subchannels are available under the current

channel, the subchannel arrow icon (1) is

displayed at the top of the touch-screen and the

Subchannel button is enabled.

To access the subchannels, select the

downward-pointing arrow (2). Select the seek

buttons (3) to find the next/previous

subchannel.

To return to the channel tier, select the

upward-pointing arrow.

Note: When you select and play a subchannel,

the subchannel icon is replaced by SubCh.

Note: You cannot store a subchannel as a

preset.

Note: If you select the preset button for the

channel containing the subchannel you are

currently playing, you will be returned to the

channel.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Viking

Trent Century BBC Leic

Radio 1

Settings

DAB search

TA FM L nk DPLII

DAB1 No reception

Portable audio

E94186

TA-FM Link DPLII

DAB1 No reception

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R king

Trent Century BBC Leic

io 1

Settings

DAB search

TA FM Link DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portable audio

DAB radio text

BBC National DAB

E94187

Audio/TV

DAB rad

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

R2 Viking

Trent Century BBC Leic

Radi

Settings

DAB search

TA FM DAB Link DPLII

DAB1 Radio2

Portable audio

BBC N DAB

E94188

Digital audio broadcasting

286

Finding an ensemble

Touch and hold (two seconds) the seek

buttons to find the next or previous ensemble.

See AUDIO CONTROLS (page 282).

After a few seconds pause, the first channel in

the ensemble found will start playing.

DAB search

The DAB search menu enables you to view lists

of available ensembles, channels and

subchannels. You can also perform searches

based on programme type (PTY).

Select DAB search to display the DAB search

menu.

Auto-tune

Select Auto-tune to build a list of available

ensembles and channels for your current

location. See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING

(page 284).

Ensemble list

Select Ensemble list to display a list of all

available ensembles. Select an ensemble name

in the list to display a list of channels in that

ensemble. Select a channel name to tune that

channel.

Channel list

Select Channel list to display a complete list of

all channels in all available ensembles. Select a

channel name to tune that channel.

Subchannel list

Select Subchannel list to display a list of any

subchannels available for the currently tuned

channel. If no subchannels are currently

available, then the Subchannel list option is

disabled. If the maximum five subchannels are

available, then use the arrows to scroll through

the list.

PTY

Channels are categorised by the broadcaster as

belonging to a programme type (PTY)

category. You can display a list of channels

organised according to their PTY category.

Select PTY to display a list of PTY categories

that contain channels. Select a PTY category to

display a list of channels in that category.

Select a channel name to play that channel.

Briefly touch one of the seek buttons

repeatedly during the first ten seconds of

broadcast, to cycle through all channels

contained in the PTY category that you chose.

Stop touching the seek button when you have

found a channel you want.

Channel data

Select Channel data to display technical data

relating to the currently-tuned channel. The

data listed is as follows: Channel name,

Ensemble name, Bit rate (kbits/s) and Audio

level.

12 : 26 pm

Now Middlesbrough

BBC National DAB

Digital1 Network

EMAP Leeds

MXR

Audio/TV

TA FM DAB i Link DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Channel list

Subchannel list

Ensemble list

PTY

Channel data

Auto-tune

E94189

287

Digital audio broadcasting

PRESET BUTTONS

Storing channels as presets

Store up to eighteen digital channels (six each

on DAB1, DAB2 and DAB3) using the

numbered preset keys. Follow the procedure

below to store channels as presets.

1. Search for and start playing the channel

you want to preset.

2. Touch and hold (two seconds) the preset

button on which you want to store the

current channel. Audio output is muted for

a further two seconds while the channel is

stored and a confirmation message is

displayed.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each channel that

you want to store as a preset.

Note: You cannot store a subchannel as a

preset. If you try to store a subchannel, you will

store the channel to which the subchannel

belongs.

Recalling a preset channel

Make sure that you have selected the

appropriate digital source (DAB1, DAB2 or

DAB3) and then briefly touch the preset button

you require. The channel you have selected will

start to play automatically.

Note: If you try to recall a channel that has

previously been stored as a preset, but is now

unavailable or invalid, the message No channel

found is displayed. You must choose another

channel.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Viking

Trent ury BBC Leic

Radio 1

Settings

DAB search

TA FM DAB i Link DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portable audio

DAB radio text

BBC National DAB

E94183

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Viking

Trent ntury BBC Leic

Radio 1

Settings

DAB search

TA FM DAB i L nk DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio1

Portable audio

DAB radio text

BBC National DAB

E94184

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12 : 26 pm

Audio

Seek

No channel found

Preset 3

DAB 1

TA-FM DAB-i

E94487

Digital audio broadcasting

288

SETTINGS

In DAB mode, select Settings.

Select Options.

Note: If Settings is selected once, but no

action is taken for a further ten seconds, the

system will exit the menu automatically.

Announcements

You can select up to four types of

announcement from a list of eleven, for

example, News, Area/Weather, Traffic and

Alarm.

When a DAB announcement is broadcast, it will

interrupt normal play for the duration of the

announcement.

Note: The Alarm announcement type,

broadcasts information concerning crises of

national or international importance.

To display the full list of announcement types,

touch Select.

Select an announcement type to enable it,

select it again to disable it. If you want to clear

all enabled types, select Clear all. To scroll

through the list, select the arrow buttons.

Note: If you have already selected four

announcement types, you will be unable to

select further types.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 Viking

Trent Century BBC Leic

Radio 1

Settings

TA FM DAB i Link DPLII

DAB1 BBC Radio2

Portable audio

DAB radio text

BBC National DAB

E94190

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Announcements

OnOff

Ensemble

PTYOffDAB text

Link DAB

FM traffic

PTY

SelectClear all

E94191

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Announcements

OnOff

Ensemble

PTYOffDAB text

Link DAB

FM traffic

PTY

SelectClear all

E94192

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Settings

News

Alarm

Traffic

Transport flash

Warning services

Clear all

Select up to

four options

E94193

289

Digital audio broadcasting

FM traffic

The FM traffic option detects the presence of

local traffic announcements on FM stations. As

soon as an announcement is received, radio

reception or CD play will be interrupted. At the

end of the announcement, radio or CD play will

resume.

Select On or Off to enable or disable the FM

traffic option.

Note: The audio unit switches to an FM

broadcast for the duration of the

announcement, so there may be a temporary

loss of sound quality.

Link DAB

Regional ensembles containing a list of local

digital channels are broadcast by a variety of

regional providers.

A channel in two different regional ensembles

will share an identification if broadcast by the

same provider. If channels are being broadcast

by different suppliers, then they will not share

the same identification.

If you move from one region to another and

Link DAB is enabled, the DAB radio will attempt

to retune to a channel with the same

identification in a different ensemble.

If the signal strength for a local channel falls

below an acceptable level, the audio unit will

automatically search other available ensembles

for another channel with the same

identification.

If an alternative channel is found in another

ensemble that is also in your current channel

list, then the new channel is tuned

automatically after a few seconds. If a channel

is not found after a few seconds, then No

reception is displayed on the screen.

The word Link is displayed at the top of the

touchscreen to indicate that Link DAB is

enabled.

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Announcements

OnOff

Ensemble

PTYOffDAB text

Link D

FM traffic

PTY

SelectClear all

E94194

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Announcements

OnOff

Ense

TYDAB te

Link DAB

FM traffic

PTY

SelectClear all

E94195

Digital audio broadcasting

290

DAB text

The DAB text option controls the type of

information that is displayed on the screen

when a channel or subchannel is playing.

•Select Ensemble to display the name of

the ensemble to which the current channel

belongs.

•Select PTY to display the name of the

programme type to which the current

channel belongs.

•Select Off to display only the channel

name.

DAB country

If you move the vehicle to a different country,

you can change DAB Country options to make

sure that you receive the best possible

reception and sound quality.

Note: If you have already selected a DAB

format, then the DAB country option is

disabled.

Select Change to display a list of countries

where DAB services are available. Select the

country name to enable it.

Note: When you change the DAB country, the

audio unit will automatically start auto-tuning.

If you Cancel the auto-tune, the country setting

will remain changed but you may not have

access to all available ensembles for that

country. See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING

(page 284).

Note: This option is disabled when the vehicle

is moving

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Announcements

OnOff

Ensemble

PTYOffDAB text

Link DAB

FM traffic

PTY

SelectClear all

E94196

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Announcements

OnOff

Ensemble

PTYOff xt

Link DAB

FM traffic

PTY

SelectClear all

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Change

PTY

Change

DAB Country:

Spain

DAB Format:

Band III

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Turkey

Spain

Sweden

Switzerland

Taiwan

Format list

E94197

291

Digital audio broadcasting

DAB format

Different regions or countries may use different

digital bands to broadcast DAB channels. If you

know the band(s) required, then you can

choose from the Band selection list.

Select Change to display a list of formats. The

available bands are:

•L Band

•Band III

•L Band & Band III

•L Band Canada

•L Band Can & Band III

Note: When you change the DAB format, the

audio unit will automatically start auto-tuning.

If you Cancel the auto-tune, the format setting

will stay changed but you may not have access

to all available ensembles for that format.

See CHANNEL AUTOMATIC TUNING

(page 284).

Note: This option is disabled when the vehicle

is moving

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Settings

L Band Canada and Band III

Band III

Band L

Band III and Band L

L Band Canada

Country list

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Turkey

Spain

Sweden

Switzerland

Taiwan

Format list

E94198

Compact disc player

292

COMPACT DISC COMPATABILITY The following CD formats may cause the CD

player to malfunction. It is recommended that

the following types of CD are not used:

•8 cm (3.1 in.) discs with or without an

adaptor.

•CDs that are not circular.

•CDs with a paper label.

•CDs that are warped, dirty, scratched or

have an abnormal edge.

•Dual format, dual-sided discs (DVD Plus,

CD-DVD format).

•DVDs.

It is recommended that only high quality 12 cm

(4.7 in.) circular discs, that show the Compact

Disc Digital Audio logo, are used.

LOADING COMPACT DISCS

Note: Some privately recorded CD-R discs may

not have been acceptably formatted to be able

to be played on this CD player.

An in-dash compact disc (CD) player is

installed in the audio unit. The CD player will

accommodate one or up to six discs (where

fitted).

The unit will play Compact Disc Digital Audio

(CDDA) discs (normal discs), MP3 and WMA

files.

CAUTIONS

Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with a

scratch protection film should not be

used.

CDs with labels (or stickers) attached,

should not be used. Labels may become

warped and prevent the CD from being ejected,

causing damage to the CD player. Such

damage is not covered by the warranty

agreement.

The CD unit will play compact discs that

conform to the international Red Book

standard audio specification. Copy-protected

CDs from some manufacturers do not

conform to this standard and playback cannot

be guaranteed.

Due to technical incompatibility,

recordable (CD-R) discs and re-writable

(CD-RW) discs may not function correctly.

Dual format, dual-sided discs (DVD

Plus, CD-DVD format) are thicker than

normal CDs and consequently playback

cannot be guaranteed in Jaguar audio units,

and jamming could occur. Warranty claims,

where this type of disc is found to be inside an

audio unit returned for repair, will not be

accepted.

CAUTIONS

Do not force the disc into the slot.

293

Compact disc player

The Home menu indicates whether a CD is

loaded and (if applicable) which CD slot is

loaded and ready for playing. If no CDs have

been loaded, the touch-screen displays

ghosted discs.

To access the CD player touch-screen menu:

1. From the touch-screen Home menu, select

Audio/TV.

2. Select CD.

You can also press the SOURCE button

repeatedly to scroll through all audio sources

to find CD.

Loading a CD (player empty)

Gently place a CD into the loading slot. A CD

loading message is displayed on the

touch-screen, while the disc is drawn into the

player and the disc is loaded.

Loading one CD (six CD player,

part-loaded)

Touch one of the empty disc slots (2). You are

prompted to insert the CD into the empty slot.

1 indicates the currently playing CD and 3

indicates slots that are already loaded.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Phone

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

Valet

12 : 26 pm

Tr 3

03:42

E94065

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

BBC R2 BBC R3

BBC R4 BBC LDN BBC W&M

Mercia Galaxy 106.2

Radio 1

Settings

Autostore

TP TA PTY AF REG 3CH

FM2 89.0 BBC R2

Portable

E94090

E94066

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

123456

Mix Repeat

Tr 3 Paused

E94067 1 2 3

Compact disc player

294

Loading several CDs (six CD player)

Press the LOAD button and insert each CD into

the CD slot as requested by the message on the

touch-screen. A pop-up message will indicate

which slot is being selected in turn until the

unit is fully loaded.

When the CD player has been loaded, you can

operate the CD using the touch-screen

controls.

EJECTING COMPACT DISCS

Press the eject button. A short press will eject

a single CD, while a long press will eject each

loaded CD in sequence.

When a disc is ejected, remove it from the

loading slot. If you fail to remove an ejected

disc, it will be drawn back into the player after

ten seconds.

If you want to stop ejecting multiple discs, on

the touch-screen, select Cancel.

COMPACT DISC SELECTION

On a six CD player, when a CD has been

selected on the touch-screen, the upper display

indicates which disc is being loaded and play

will start when loading is complete. Touch

another disc on the screen to load and start

playing that disc.

•TP: The background radio station provides

Traffic Programme (TP) and is able to

support Traffic Anouncements (TA).

•TA: Traffic announcements are available in

the CD mode and will interrupt the playing

of the CD. At the end of the announcement,

the CD will resume playing.

E94068

E94071

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

123456

Mix Repeat

TP TA 3CH

Loading CD 1

E94072

TP TA 3CH

Loading CD 1

295

Compact disc player

TRACK SELECTION

Tr 12 - Track number of the track being played.

03:47 - Track elapsed play time from start of

track.

You can move to the next or previous CD track,

using the seek buttons either on the

touch-screen or on the audio console.

See AUDIO UNIT OVERVIEW (page 269).

Briefly touch the seek buttons to move to the

previous or next track.

Touch and hold (two seconds) to play rapidly

back through one or more tracks (review) or

rapidly forward through one or more tracks

(cue).

Normal playback resumes when the seek

button is released.

COMPACT DISC PAUSE

Select II to pause the current track. While play

is paused, the pause icon becomes a play icon,

select it again to resume playback.

Note: If the volume is turned down to zero, CD

playback is automatically paused. Play

resumes when the volume is increased.

SHUFFLE/RANDOM

Briefly touch Mix to activate the Mix CD option,

which shuffles the track order for the current

CD so that tracks are played in a random

sequence. If you are playing an MP3 CD, a brief

touch will mix the tracks in the current folder.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

2346

Mix Repeat

P TA 3CH

12 03 47

E94073

03 47Tr 12

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

123456

Mix Repeat

TP TA 3CH

12 03 47

E94074

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

123456

Mix

Repeat

TP TA 3CH

12 03 47Mix CD

E94076

Mix CD Mix all

Compact disc player

296

Touch and hold (two seconds) Mix to activate

the Mix all option, which shuffles the order of

play for all tracks across all loaded CDs. If you

are playing an MP3 CD, a long touch will mix

the tracks from all the folders on the current

disc.

REPEAT COMPACT DISC TRACKS

Briefly touch Repeat to play the current track

repeatedly. Select again to cancel repeat and

resume normal play.

Touch and hold (two seconds) Repeat to

repeat play the whole CD. Select again to

cancel repeat and resume normal play. This

feature applies only the 6-disc CD unit.

COMPACT DISC DISPLAY OPTIONS

In CD mode, select Settings to display the CD

Settings menu.

Traffic: Traffic announcements can be

switched On or Off. See TRAFFIC

INFORMATION CONTROL (page 276).

CD text: CD text can be switched On or Off. CD

text displays track-related information that has

been saved on the CD (not all CDs will provide

CD text).

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

123456

Mix

Repeat

TP TA 3CH

12 03 47Rpt CD

E94077

Rpt Tr Rpt CD

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

123456

Mix Repeat

TP TA 3CH

12 03 47

E94078

Vehicle

Options

Sound

Bal/Fade

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Traffic

OnOff

CD text

PTY

E94079

297

Compact disc player

MP3 FILE PLAYBACK

On audio units fitted with a 6-disc CD player,

you can play CDs containing MP3 files.

MP3 discs have the potential to hold more

music than a conventional CD, because each

track can be compressed to a higher degree

during recording.

If you record your own music, each session

must be properly closed but the whole disc

does not have to be finalised.

Some pre-recorded and personally-recorded

discs, can contain additional information on

the disc, e.g. CD titles, track titles and the

artist's name (this information is contained in

ID3 Tags).

Additional touch-screen controls enable you to

select folders and tracks and display various

items of information about the recordings.

Note: A mixture of CDs and MP3 discs can be

loaded into the 6-disc CD player together.

Note: The audio system will play MP3, WMA,

WAV and AAC files. The highest compression

rate supported, is 320k bits per second (kbps).

If anything less than 128 kbps is used, Digital

Signal Processing (DSP) functionality may be

lost.

Note: The CD player is not guaranteed to play

every disc available because of variation in the

quality of discs.

Using MP3 discs

When an MP3 disc is first played, the first track

in the root folder will play first. If you restart

play after switching to another disc or audio

source, then play will resume from the point

you left it.

Note: The CD player may take a long time (one

minute or more) to load an MP3 disc, owing to

the number of tracks on it. To minimise the

loading on the system, a rigid folder structure

is recommended.

If the MP3 disc has been recorded with the

music files contained within folders, additional

information is available by selecting Folders.

A list of folders and files is displayed on the

touch-screen. The titles of any folders and

tracks recorded on the CD, will be displayed in

alphabetical order, even when the disc has

been recorded in a different order.

CAUTION

countries; please check the laws in your

country if you want to record from copyright

source material.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

Settings

123 6

Mix Repeat

Folders

TP TA 3CH

Tr01 00:32

E94082

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

TP TA 3CH

Tr01 00:32

Please Please Me

Beatles-Hits

Revolver

Sgt. Pep

Help

E94083

Compact disc player

298

Select the folder to access the tracks contained

within the folder. To help you navigate through

multiple folders and files, the display changes

when you select folders, sub-folders and

tracks.

If more than four folders or files are listed,

select the up/down arrow icons to scroll

through the list.

Select a track to start playing that track.

Note: If you have selected a track using the

Folders function, then you will return to the

same folder when you next access the folder

menu.

MP3 folder structure

A CD-R or CD-RW can have MP3 folders and

tracks recorded in many different ways, with

many layers of folders and with tracks

distributed throughout the folder structure.

Note: Any CD containing a mixture of MP3 and

CDDA tracks will be treated as a CD (any MP3

tracks will be ignored).

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

TP TA PTY DPL I

Tr01 00:34

Eleanor Rigby

Revolver

I'm Only Sleeping

Love You To

Taxma

E94084

299

Portable audio

PORTABLE AUDIO

Portable audio overview

The portable audio system is located in the

centre console cubby box. You can connect a

variety of audio devices, including iPods, via

this interface to the audio system.

If you are connecting an iPod or mass storage

device, you can use the touch-screen to

operate and search the device. Many of the

controls are similar to those available for CD

play.

The devices that you can connect to the

portable audio interface include:

•USB mass storage devices, for example

memory stick.

•iPod.

•Auxiliary device (no touch-screen control).

Note: The portable audio interface supports

the following iPods:

•

iPod (generations 3-5).

•

iPod Mini.

•

iPod Nano (generations 1-3).

•

iPod Photo.

•

iPod Classic.

Note: The audio system will play MP3, WMA,

WAV and AAC files.

Note: Some MP3 players have their own file

system that is not supported by this system. To

use your MP3 player, you must set it to USB

Removable Device or Mass Storage Device

mode (see manufacturer's information for

further details). Only music that has been

added to the device in this mode can be played

via the vehicle's portable audio system.

Note: The system will support devices with a

storage capacity up to 256 GB (approximately

65 000 tracks).

CAUTION

We recommend that you replace the

rubber cover when a portable device is

not plugged in. This will prevent damage to the

system. The cover is not waterproof.

Please disconnect your iPod when

leaving the vehicle. Failure to do so may

result in the iPod battery discharging.

Portable audio

300

Connecting an iPod

On the audio Home screen, select Audio/TV,

then Portable audio, then iPod.

Note: You can also press the SOURCE button

repeatedly to select Portable audio device.

A dedicated iPod lead is supplied with the

Portable audio interface. Plug in your iPod with

the usual care necessary to protect the

connector pins from damage.

Play will start automatically from the point at

which the iPod was last played.

Connecting a USB device

On the audio Home screen, select Audio/TV,

then Portable audio, then USB.

Note: You can also press the SOURCE button

repeatedly to select Portable audio device.

Insert the USB device into the socket indicated.

Whenever the device is connected, the first

track in the first available folder is played

automatically.

Note: We recommend that only music files are

loaded on the USB device. This will speed up

the automatic indexing of files.

E94338

E94339

301

Portable audio

Connecting an auxiliary device

On the audio Home screen, select Audio/TV

and then select Portable audio.

Note: You can also press the SOURCE button

repeatedly to select Portable audio device.

Insert the AUX jack plug into the socket

indicated.

Select AUX.

Play will start when you switch on and start

playing the auxiliary device.

Note: You cannot operate or search the

auxiliary audio device using the touch-screen,

so all buttons on the touch-screen are

unavailable.

Connecting more than one device

You can connect an iPod and a USB device

simultaneously to the portable audio interface

and switch between them using the

touch-screen. Select iPod, USB or AUX, to

switch between modes.

The device docked first will remain the active

device until you choose to change.

If, after changing to the newly-docked device,

you change back to the first device, play will

resume at the point you left it (USB and iPod

only).

Note: You cannot use a USB hub to connect

more than one USB device to the audio unit.

Note: Devices connected to the iPod and USB

ports will be charged, but devices that are fully

discharged will not play. Please disconnect

your iPod when leaving the vehicle. Failure to

do so may result in the iPod battery

discharging.

Note: Options such as Repeat and Mix relate

to the device currently playing, they will not

apply to any subsequent device.

E94340

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod AUX

Repe

USB

Settings

Folders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 04

Portable audio

Sing for absolution

00:36

E94709

Portable audio

302

AUXILIARY INPUT DEVICES

Playing a portable device

If you are using a USB mass storage device or

iPod, you can control playback using the

touch-screen controls.

If you are using any portable audio device via

the AUX socket, then you must control

playback from the device itself.

Autoplay

Whenever a USB device is docked, play will

start automatically at the first track in the first

available folder.

For an iPod, play will always resume from the

current track, whether previously docked or

not.

Pause

Select II to pause playback, select the button

again to resume playback.

Mix

USB:

•Briefly touch Mix to play tracks in the

current folder in a random sequence.

•Touch and hold (two seconds) Mix to play

all tracks on the device in a random

sequence.

iPod:

•Briefly touch Mix to play tracks in the

current playlist in a random sequence.

•Touch and hold (two seconds) Mix to play

all tracks on the iPod in a random

sequence.

If the Mix option is active, select Mix to cancel

it and return to normal playback.

WARNING

Auxiliary devices cannot be controlled

using the touch-screen. We strongly

advise against controlling playback or

altering settings on the auxiliary device while

driving.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod AUX

Mix Repeat

USB

Settings

Folders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 02

Portable audio

iamond Dogs

01:36

E94341

Paused

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod AUX

Mix Repeat

USB

Settings

Folders

TP TA PTY DPL I

Tr 02

Portable audio

Diamond Dogs

01:36

E94342

Mix folder

Mix all Mix folder

303

Portable audio

Repeat

USB:

•Briefly touch Repeat to repeat play the

current track continuously.

•Touch and hold (two seconds) Repeat to

repeat all tracks in the current folder on a

loop.

iPod:

•Briefly touch Repeat to repeat play the

current track continuously.

•Touch and hold (two seconds) Repeat to

repeat all tracks on the iPod on a loop.

Select Repeat again to cancel it and return to

normal playback.

Displaying track information

Many tracks will be saved with additional

information contained in an id3 tag. You can

choose to display some or all of this

information on the screen. The default display

provides track title information only.

Briefly touch the --> button repeatedly to toggle

through the information, including track title,

artist, album and genre.

Touch and hold (two seconds) the --> button to

display the Portable audio text pop-up screen

providing all the id3 tag information available

for the track.

If no information is available, the screen will

display the text No entry.

Touch the pop-up screen to close it.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod AUX

Mix Repeat

USB

Settings

Folders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 02

Portable audio

Diamond Dogs

01:36

E94343

Rpt folder

Rpt Tr Rpt folder

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod AUX

Mix Repeat

USB

Settings

lders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 04

Portable audio

Sing for absolution

00:36

E94648

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 04

Portable audio

00:36

Portable audio text

Artist: Muse

Track: Sing for absolution

Genre: Rock

Album: Absolution

E94649

Portable audio

304

Searching a portable device

Next/previous track

Briefly touch the seek buttons to move to the

previous or next track.

If the Mix option is switched on, then the next

track will be the next in the randomised playlist.

In Mix mode, selecting previous will only return

playback to the beginning of the currently

playing track.

Fast forward/reverse

Touch and hold a seek button to fast forward or

reverse through the current track. Release the

seek button to resume normal play.

USB folders

The Folder option enables you to explore the

folder structure on the USB device.

Note: Only compatible file types will be

displayed on the touch-screen.

Note: We recommend that only compatible

files are loaded onto the device. This will speed

up the automatic indexing of your files.

Note: This feature is most useful when the files

and folders on the USB device have been

organised logically.

Select Folders to display all folders on the

device.

Select a folder name to display a list of tracks

in that folder. Use the arrow icons (if displayed)

to scroll through the list.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod X

Mix Repeat

Settings

Folders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 04

Portable audio

The man who sold t

00:01

E94344

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod X

Mix Repeat

Settings

Folders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 12

Portable audio

Suffragette City

01:36

E94345

03 47Tr 12

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod AUX

Mix Repeat

USB

Folders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 02

Portable audio

Diamond Dogs

01:36

E94346

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Elvis Costello

My USB device

Live stuff

Snow Patrol

Beatles

681

TP TA PTY DPLII

01:36

E94348

305

Portable audio

Select a track to start playback of that track.

Play will continue as normal through the

remainder of the tracks in that folder.

Select the open folder icon at the top of a menu

to move back to the level of that folder.

iPod folders

Select Folders to display all search methods

available on the iPod. Search methods include,

Playlist, Artist, Album, Genre, Composer,

Podcast, Audio Book and Song.

Select a search method from the list to display

a list of items found.

If you select Artist, a list of artists will be

displayed.

If you select an album title, a list of tracks is

displayed. Select a track to start playback.

Select the open folder icon at the top of a menu

to move back to the level of that folder.

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

One by One

Foo fighters

Skin and Bones

Monkey wrench

Favourite live tracks

681

TP TA PTY DPLII

01:36

E94349

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

iPod AUX

Mix Repeat

USB

Folders

TP TA PTY DPLII

Tr 02

Portable audio

Diamond Dogs

01:36

E94347

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Artist

My ipod

Album

Song

Playlist

TP TA PTY DPL I

00:36

E94350

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Air

Artist

Badly drawn boy

Coldplay

All

TP TA PTY DPL I

00:36

E94351

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

Everybody Hertz

Air

Moon safari

Premieres symptomes

All

TP TA PTY DPLII

00:36

E94352

Portable audio

306

Portable device settings

In Portable audio mode, select Settings, then

select Options.

Traffic announcements

With Traffic enabled, traffic announcements

(TA) will interrupt portable audio playback.

Portable audio text

With Portable audio text enabled, any text

information saved on the device associated

with a track, for example artist name, will be

displayed on the touch-screen during playback

of that track.

Page jump

Only five items are displayed on screen from a

list of many items. If you select a single arrow

scroll button, then four items will scroll past.

The Page jump setting helps you to navigate a

very long list of items by setting the number of

items scrolled through when a double-arrow

page scroll button is selected.

For example, if you select 10 under Page jump,

then 10 × 4 (40) items will scroll past each time

you select a page scroll button.

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

OnOff

PTY

51015 20

Traffic

Portable

audio text

Page

jump

E94355

307

Telephone

GENERAL INFORMATION Note: The vehicle telephone system is

designed to function with a wide variety of

Bluetooth® telephones.

As these telephones have a wide range of audio

and echo characteristics, it may take a few

seconds for the vehicle telephone system to

adapt and deliver optimum audio performance.

It may be necessary to reduce the in-vehicle

volume slightly, to fully optimise audio

performance and reduce echo.

In order to achieve the best possible audio

performance, it may be necessary to select a

lower speed on the heater blower and reduce

the system volume slightly, when using certain

mobile phones.

Telephone networks

The telephone network standard allows you to

use your telephone in many countries.

However, telephone reception may be poor or

unavailable in remote regions. This may be due

to the inadequate power of the transmitter,

which results in a weak signal or incomplete

coverage.

What is Bluetooth®?

Jaguar Bluetooth® Connectivity was

developed to be used with a selected range of

mobile phones, from a number of different

manufacturers. Some mobile phones feature

different operating software versions - the

correct version is needed for successful

integration with the Jaguar Bluetooth®

system.

Bluetooth is an international standard that

allows electronic components to communicate

with each other, using a short-range radio link.

Bluetooth eliminates the need for wires or

cables: Typically, devices can communicate at

a range of up to 10 metres (33 feet).

WARNING

Using the telephone near the car: Do

not telephone inside a garage or near

an open car bonnet. The air may

contain fuel vapours and the telephone could

produce sparks and start a fire.

Unusual ambient conditions: Switch

off the telephone in areas where high

explosives are being used. High

frequency remote controls could be interfered

with and cause an explosion. Switch off your

telephone in areas with a high explosion risk.

This includes filling stations, fuel storage

areas or chemical factories, as well as places

where the air contains fuel vapour, chemicals

or metal dust. The telephone might produce

sparks and cause a fire or explosion.

Medical equipment: The functioning

of cardiac pacemakers or hearing aids

may be impaired when the phone is in

use. Check with a doctor or manufacturer

whether any such devices you or your

passengers are using, are sufficiently

protected against high-frequency energy.

Always stow your mobile phone

securely. In an accident, loose items

can cause injury.

Using any hand-held appliance while

driving, can be dangerous and is

illegal in certain countries.

Telephone

308

The Bluetooth in-car telephone system allows

certain mobile phones to be used hands-free in

your vehicle. There is no need to connect the

mobile phone to a cradle or cable.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Please refer to the Owner section of the Jaguar

website at www.jaguar.com, for a list of

compatible phones. Alternatively, please refer

to your Dealer/Authorised Repairer.

Note: The Bluetooth technology phones listed

on Jaguar.com, have been tested for

compatibility with Jaguar vehicles.

Performance will vary, based on phone

software version, coverage and your wireless

carrier. Phones are warranted by their

manufacturer, not Jaguar.

If your mobile phone battery charge becomes

low it may switch off its Bluetooth link to the

vehicle. This is normal operation for mobile

phones, to help preserve the remaining battery

charge. In this event, the touch-screen will

display a phone connection message.

The mobile phone must be paired and docked

with the vehicle system before use.

See TELEPHONE PAIRING AND DOCKING

(page 309). Once paired and docked, the

phone can be operated via the steering wheel

switches or the touch-screen. The mobile

phone doesn’t need to be physically connected

to the vehicle, it can be left in a jacket pocket,

for instance. Calls are routed through the

vehicle’s audio speakers, and a dedicated

microphone is fitted within the overhead

console and is directionally biased towards the

driver.

You can use the system to answer or reject

incoming calls, make outgoing calls or alter the

call volume. The system does not support SMS

text messaging.

Note: The vehicle ignition system must be on

and the touch-screen system must be active, in

order to use the phone.

Call volume

The volume of telephone calls can be adjusted

for hands-free operation. To adjust the volume,

operate the audio system’s volume control

during a phone call.

If the audio system is in use when the phone

becomes active, the audio system source is

suppressed for the duration of the call.

Charging your phone

It is possible to use the in-car 12V/USB socket

to charge your mobile phone. Refer to the

mobile phone operating instructions for

charging information.

309

Telephone

Safety

Driving

Check local regulations covering the use of

in-car telephones in the areas that you intend to

use your telephone, and always obey them.

Observe the following guidelines if you are

using the phone when driving.

•Give full attention to driving - safe driving

is your prime responsibility.

•Always use hands-free operation when

driving.

•When receiving a call, if driving conditions

demand, pull off the road and park.

Electronic devices

Most modern electronic equipment is shielded

from Radio Frequency (RF) signals. However,

certain equipment may not be shielded against

RF signals from your phone.

Pacemakers

The Health Industry Manufacturers'

Association recommends that a minimum

separation of 15 centimetres (six inches) is

maintained between a wireless phone antenna

and a pacemaker, to avoid potential

interference with the pacemaker. These

recommendations are consistent with the

independent research by, and

recommendations of, Wireless Technology

Research.

TELEPHONE PAIRING AND DOCKING

Before use, your mobile phone must be paired

and docked with the vehicle’s Bluetooth

system. This is done via your mobile phone or

the touch-screen.

Pairing and docking using your mobile

phone

Follow the steps below, to pair and dock your

phone with the vehicle using your mobile

phone.

Note: The process of pairing and docking your

phone with the vehicle using the mobile phone,

will vary depending on the type of mobile

phone used.

3. Ensure that the ignition is on and the

touch-screen is active.

4. Ensure that there is no mobile phone

currently docked with the vehicle's

Bluetooth system. If a mobile phone is

docked with the system, you will not be

able pair and dock another phone until the

current phone has been undocked. To

undock a phone, select Phone or Comms

on the home screen, then Settings and

then Undock.

5. Using the mobile phone, search for

Bluetooth devices. See your phone's

operating instructions for further

information.

WARNING

Read the following information

thoroughly before using your

telephone.

nametag

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone options

Change phone

E96911

Comms

Add phone

Search new

Docked phone: Nokia 6230i

Undock

Telephone

310

6. When the vehicle's Bluetooth system is

discovered, your mobile phone will list

Jaguar as a discovered Bluetooth device.

Select this device from the list.

7. You will now be requested to enter a

Bluetooth PIN. When pairing and docking

from your mobile phone, this number is

always 1313.

Once your phone is paired to the vehicle's

Bluetooth system, it can connect automatically.

If the phone does not automatically connect,

you will have to connect manually with the

Jaguar Bluetooth System, via the mobile

phone. Please consult the mobile phone's

handbook for further information.

Note: Some mobile phones require you to

authorise the connection each time you start

the system. To change this, you must set

Jaguar as ‘authorised’ in the mobile phone’s

known device list. This will enable connections

from the vehicle to the mobile phone to take

place automatically without confirmation each

time. Please consult the mobile phone’s

handbook for further information.

Pairing and docking using the

touch-screen

1. Switch on your mobile phone’s Bluetooth

connection, using the phone’s menu. Make

sure that your mobile phone is in Bluetooth

discoverable mode, sometimes referred to

as find me mode (see your phone’s

operating instructions for more

information).

2. Switch the ignition system on, ensure that

the touch-screen is active.

3. From the home menu select Comms. If

your car is not fitted with JaguarVoice,

Phone will appear in the position occupied

by Comms.

4. Select Settings.

5. Select Search new. The system will search

for all Bluetooth phones that are in range.

If a phone is already docked, it will be

automatically undocked when a Search is

initiated.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Comms

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E96908

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96912

Comms

311

Telephone

6. Select your phone from the displayed list.

7. Once you have selected your phone, a

pop-up window appears.

8. To pair and dock the phone, enter XXXX on

the handset (XXXX being a random four

digit code displayed on the touch-screen).

Enter this into your phone (see your

phone’s operating instructions for more

information).

9. Your phone is now paired and docked

ready for use. For further information, refer

to the following procedures - Making a

call, Ending a call, Receiving a call.

10. Once a mobile phone has been paired and

docked with the vehicle, the system will

search for the last connected phone, each

time the ignition is switched on.

Note: Due to the duration of a Bluetooth

search, it is advised that the timeout to home

screen feature is switched off before

attempting to search for Bluetooth devices.

This setting can be changed within Vehicle,

Syst settings, Display set, Timeout to home

screen.

Note: You do not need to manually pair and

dock the phone with the vehicle every time you

switch the ignition on. If an incorrect code is

entered, your mobile phone should prompt you

to enter the correct code.

The Bluetooth system supports Bluetooth

Hands Free Profile 1.5 (HFP 1.5). If the mobile

phone paired to the system also supports this

profile, additional features will be available

such as battery level indicator, signal strength

indicator and network operator. If the mobile

phone does not support these features, they

will not be available on the touch-screen.

However, you can refer to the mobile phone's

display to determine these items.

Pairing other phones

Up to five mobile phones can be paired with the

vehicle in the same way. However, only one can

be docked for use. For further information,

refer to Changing the docked phone.

E96918

Comms

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Cancel

Bluetooth search

Please wait

Searching . . .

Apple iPhone

Comms

Nokia 6300

Pair & dock

Delete

Not

P i d

To pair & dock phone

Enter (5616) on handset

JAG1312

Telephone

312

Changing the docked phone

Only one phone can be docked to the vehicle at

any one time. To dock a different paired phone

to the vehicle, follow the steps below:

1. From the home menu, select Comms

(Phone on vehicles without Voice).

2. Select Settings.

3. Select Change phone.

4. Select Dock from the list of available

phones.

Deleting a paired phone

To delete a phone from the system, follow the

steps below:

1. From the home menu, select Comms

(Phone on vehicles without Voice).

2. Select Settings.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Comms

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E96908

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96912

Comms

JAG1314

Comms

Delete

Paired

Dock

Docked

Nokia N73

Nokia 6300

Apple iPhone

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Comms

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E96908

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96912

Comms

313

Telephone

3. Select Change phone.

4. Select Delete. This permanently removes

the phone from the vehicle's Bluetooth

system list. To use the phone again, you

have to pair and dock the phone to the

vehicle.

5. The phone does not need to be present to

be deleted from the list.

From the Settings main menu, selecting

phone or Search new. For further information,

refer to the following procedures - Pairing

other phones, Changing the docked phone.

VOICE MAIL

You can set up your voice mail to be accessed

via the touch-screen. The voice mail (network

service) option is an answering service, where

callers who are unable to reach you can leave

messages.

Select Voice mail, enter the number provided

by your service provider and select OK. This

number is stored in the system and used to

retrieve any voice mail messages.

Retrieving voice mail

To listen to your voice mail

messages, select and hold 1.

The voice mail features can be used as if dialled

from the mobile phone.

JAG1314

Comms

Delete

Paired

Dock

Docked

Nokia N73

Nokia 6300

Apple iPhone

Enter voice mail number

nametag

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone options

E96913

Comms

Add phone

Operator Name

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96922

Comms

Telephone

314

ANSWER OPTIONS

1. Select Answer options.

2. Auto answer: If automatic answer is on,

the call will automatically answer after a

few seconds. Select Off or On.

3. Caller announce: This feature, if available,

allows the callers name to be announced.

Select Off or On.

PHONE OPTIONS

1. Select Phone options (1).

2. Ring tones (Ring tone options).

3. Phonebook (Phonebook options).

Ring tones

Four ring tones are available (for in-vehicle

ringing) or you can use your mobile phone’s

own ring tone:

Select Ring tones (2). Select Portable’s

inband tone to use your mobile phones ring

tone.

Note: Not all phones support inband ringing.

Or, select Ring tone 1, 2, 3 or 4, to use a Jaguar

preset ring tone.

Note: The system will store the ring tone

setting associated with each mobile phone.

nameta

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone options

E96933

Comms

Add phone

Off

Auto answer

Caller announce

nametag

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone options

E96917

Comms

Add phone

Ring tones

Phonebook

E96916

Comms

Portable's inband tone

Ringtone 1

Ringtone 2

Rington

Ringtone 4

Comms

Portable's inband tone

Ringtone 1

Ringtone 2

Ringtone 3

Ringtone 4

315

Telephone

PHONEBOOK

The phonebook option (3), allows you to

download your mobile phone's directory

(either automatically or manually) or erase it

from the vehicle’s memory, assuming that the

phone supports this feature.

The system can store a maximum of 750

entries, although this figure varies, depending

on the type of mobile phone used. Refer to

Phone capacity.

Note: It may take several minutes to copy the

phonebook to the vehicle, depending on the

phone and number of entries stored. The

telephone system may not be operational

during this period.

Automatic download

Any phone numbers stored in your mobile

phonebook, can be copied to the vehicle’s

phonebook.

If Auto Download is on, the mobile phone

phonebook will be transferred to the vehicle

every time the phone is connected (docked).

This feature will only work on phones that

support AT Phonebook Profile. Refer to your

phone’s operating instructions.

To change Auto Download: Select Phone

options (1), then select Phonebook (3).

Select Off or On.

If On is selected, the vehicle will automatically

download the entire directory, each time the

phone is docked.

Manual download

If your phone does not support AT Phonebook

(automatic phonebook download), you may be

able to manually send your phonebook

(individual entries or in full) to the vehicle's

Bluetooth system using the phone's Object

push facility. Refer to your phone's operating

instructions to determine whether this feature

is available.

To initiate a manual download, select Phone

options, then Phonebook and then Start

manual download.

nametag

Voice mail

Answer options

Phone options

E96917

Comms

Add phone

Ring tones

Phonebook

E96914

Comms

Off On

Auto download

Start manual download

Erase entire phonebook

E96957

Comms

Off On

Auto download

Start manual download

Erase entire phonebook

Telephone

316

The Bluetooth system will disconnect the

currently docked phone and will be able to

receive phonebook data sent from that phone.

Please refer to your phone's operating

instructions for details of how to send

phonebook data using Bluetooth.

Once the phonebook data has been sent, select

Exit to reconnect the last docked phone.

The vehicle's Bluetooth system will now

display the manually downloaded phonebook

data. For more information, refer to your

phone's operating instructions.

Note: This feature only allows you to send

phonebook data from the last docked phone.

You cannot download data from the Bluetooth

system to a mobile phone.

Once a paired phone is deleted from the paired

phone list, the phonebook data associated with

this phone is deleted.

Erase entire phonebook

To erase the entire phonebook:

Select Phone options (1), then select

Phonebook (3).

Select Erase entire phonebook.

A pop-up window alerts you that you are about

to Erase entire phonebook. Select OK to

remove all names from the vehicle phonebook.

To delete one or more names, but not all, refer

to Deleting names from the Directory.

Note: This feature deletes phonebook entries

stored in the vehicle memory and not those

stored in the mobile phone memory.

Phonebook capacity

Certain mobile phones store the phonebook in

two different areas, the SIM card and the phone

memory. Where possible, the vehicle will

display both SIM card and phone memory

entries up to a maximum of 750. With some

mobile phones, the number of entries from one

or both of these areas may be restricted. It is

not always possible to transfer addresses

stored in one or both of these areas.

The number of entries displayed is dependent

upon the number of SIM and phone memory

entries supported by the mobile phone.

Note: Certain mobile phones do not allow

phonebook entries stored on the SIM card to

be transferred via Bluetooth. However, it may

be possible to transfer the SIM phonebook to

the mobile phone’s memory, before copying it

to the vehicle phonebook. Refer to your mobile

phone operating instructions for more

information. It is advisable to remove duplicate

and blank entries from the mobile phone,

before the phonebook is downloaded.

E96923

Off On

Auto download

Phone

Cancel

Erase entire phonebook

317

Telephone

MAKING A CALL

Before you make a call, your mobile phone

must be paired and docked with the vehicle’s

Bluetooth system.

From the Home menu, select Comms.

Key in the phone number, including the area

code, if applicable - the number will be

displayed. Touch the connect icon.

Changing a phone number

When entering a number, you can change the

phone number shown on the touch-screen

using the C button.

A momentary touch erases a single digit, a long

touch erases the complete number.

Receiving a call

If the audio system is in use when the phone

becomes active, the audio system source is

suppressed for the duration of the call.

If automatic answer has been programmed, the

call will automatically answer after a few

seconds. Refer to Answer options.

To answer a call: The preferred method to

accept an incoming call, if Automatic answer is

not active, is to use the hands-free controls on

the steering wheel (refer to Hand-free

controls). Alternatively, you can accept or

reject the incoming call, from the pop-up

displayed on the touch-screen.

Ending a call

The preferred method to end a call is to use the

hands-free controls on the steering wheel.

Refer to Hands-free controls.

Alternatively, select the End call icon

(arrowed).

Continuity of calls

Whilst in a call, the call remains connected if

the vehicle is in convenience mode. When the

call ends, another call cannot be made or

received through the vehicle system, unless

the ignition is on and the touch-screen system

active.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Comms

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E96908

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96924

Comms

02476303080

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96925

Comms

00:00:05

Telephone

318

NAMES

Directory name search

From the Home menu, select Comms.

Select Names.

1. Using the keyboard, select the first letter of

the contact name. If the name begins with

the second or third letter on the button,

touch the button two or three times

respectively (i.e. if the name begins with an

F, touch the DEF button three times).

2. Select OK.

Select the desired name to make a call.

Note: Using the hands-free controls, you can

search the phonebook via the message centre.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Comms

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E96908

E96926

Comms

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXYZ

DEF

MNO

Search letter

Comms

Names

Last 10

Settings

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXYZ

DEF

MNO

Search letter

Names

Last 10

Settings

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXY

DEF

MNO

JAG1315

Digit Dial

JAG0900

Comms

Delete

Mark

Mike

Mia

0201 9898989

0201 7878787

0223 6846846

07907970970

07044700447

Operator Name

319

Telephone

Directory contact types

If your phone supports contact type data, you

will be able to see a contact type icon in the

vehicle's phonebook directory. These can be

seen on the right-hand side of each contact in

the directory and will indicate one of the

following types:

Deleting names from the directory

From the Home menu, select Comms.

Select Names.

1. Using the keyboard, select the first letter or

letters of the contact name to narrow your

search. The selected letter(s) appears in

the upper display.

2. Select OK.

The search fields are opened and matching

contacts are listed.

Work.

Home.

Mobile.

Car.

No Icon Voice.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Comms

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E96908

E96926

Comms

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXYZ

DEF

MNO

Search letter

Comms

Names

Last 10

Settings

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXYZ

DEF

MNO

Search letter

Names

Last 10

Settings

PQRS

GHI

TUV

ABC

JKL

WXY

DEF

MNO

JAG1315

Digit Dial

Telephone

320

Select Delete to remove a name(s) from the

phonebook.

LAST 10 OPTION

The Last 10 option allows you to view the last

10 calls made, received or missed.

From the home menu, select Comms.

1. Select Last 10.

2. Select Calls made or.

3. Select Calls received or

4. Select Calls missed.

The search fields are opened and a list of the

calls made, received or missed are listed, with

the most recent at the top.

To make or return a call, select the name from

the list. Your call will be routed automatically.

Note: The vehicle will display the list in the

order that they are sent from the mobile phone.

Some phones may arrange the list in reverse or

other order.

JAG0901

Comms

Delete

Mark

Mike

Mia

0201 9898989

0201 7878787

0223 6846846

07907970970

07044700447

Operator Name

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

Comms

Navigation

Vehicle

External

Left Right

20 17

C C

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch. PL II

Valet

12 : 26 pm

E96908

E96927

Comms

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Calls missed

Calls made

Calls received

E96928

Comms

Mark Home

Mark Work

Melissa

Mike Home

Mia Mobile

321

Telephone

HANDS-FREE CONTROLS

Four system adjustment controls are situated

on the left-hand side of the steering wheel,

duplicating functions of buttons on the

touch-screen. Using these buttons is the

preferred method of adjustment, as driver

distraction is minimised.

1. Scroll up/down to increase or decrease

volume.

2. Scroll up/down to next/previous memory

location.

3. Source. Press and hold to access phone

mode on the touch-screen and message

centre.

4. Voice button. Briefly press to dial, answer

or end a phone call. This button is also

used for voice control functions.

Phonebook scrolling using message

centre

Press and hold the Source button on the

steering wheel, to scroll through and select a

phonebook contact via the message centre.

Phone will be displayed and the Phonebook

can be accessed on the touch-screen.

Use the scroll up and down buttons to search

through the Phonebook. Each entry will be

shown in the message centre.

With the required contact displayed, press the

Voice button on the steering wheel to make the

phone call.

E71452

Auto

miles

Inst Fuel

mpg

Phone

E96934

Auto

miles

Inst Fuel

mpg

John Johnson

012398765432

E96958

Telephone

322

Making/ending a call

To dial:

Key in the phone number, including the area

code. The number will be displayed.

To connect:

To end a call:

OTHER FEATURES

Keyboard magnification

This option allows the user to increase the

keyboard size.

When making a call using the numerical key

pad displayed on the touch-screen, the

Magnify icon becomes selectable.

Select the Magnify icon to enlarge the keypad.

Select the Magnify icon again to reduce the

size.

Do not disturb mode

If you do not wish to be disturbed by incoming

phone calls, select the bell icon (1) on the

touch-screen. A visual representation will be

displayed on the touch-screen, to advise the

driver that the Do not disturb mode is selected

(3) and Do not disturb mode will be visible

when in telephone mode (2). Any incoming

calls will be rejected or diverted to voice mail.

Press this button on the steering

wheel, or

Touch this icon on the

touch-screen.

Press this button on the steering

wheel, or

Touch this icon on the

touch-screen.

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96930

Comms

E96931

Comms

OptionsOptions

Digit Dial

Names

Last 10

Settings

Options

E96929

Comms

Do not disturb mode

323

Telephone

TELEPHONE VOICE CONTROL

Voice control allows many of the telephone

features to be activated by voice commands.

The system is controlled by the

switch on the left-hand side of the

steering wheel.

Note: The voice control directory is separate

from your phone SIM card address or

phonebook. See VOICE CONTROL (page 69).

The voice control system understands

predefined commands which need to be

spoken word for word. A list of all telephone

voice commands is below.

•PHONE HELP

•PHONE DIAL NUMBER

•PHONE REDIAL

•PHONE STORE NAME

•PHONE DIAL NAME

•PHONE ACCEPT CALLS

•PHONE REJECT CALLS

•PHONE DIAL LAST ANSWERED CALL

•PHONE DIAL LAST MISSED CALL

•PHONE DIAL VOICEMAIL

•PHONE PLAY DIRECTORY

•PHONE DELETE DIRECTORY

•PHONE DIAL HANDSET NAME

Most of the above commands are self

explanatory, those which are not, are explained

more fully in the following section.

Operating the system

Press and release the voice button on the

steering wheel (arrowed) and after the tone,

speak one of the system commands.

In response to your command, the system will

repeat your instruction and Listening will

appear in the message centre. The system will

either carry out your command or ask for more

information. If the system asks for more

information, wait until the tone has sounded

before replying.

To cancel a voice control session, press and

hold the switch on the steering wheel (until a

double tone sounds).

WARNING

Do not use voice control when placing

emergency calls. Your voice and tone

could be affected by stressful

situations and, as a result, the process of

establishing a connection could be delayed.

E95902

Telephone

324

Dialling a phone number

The system will guide you through the process.

After each prompt where the system asks for a

response, always wait for the tone before

responding.

The phone number can be given as a series of

single digits (from zero to nine). Either Zero or

Oh is recognised, but zero is likely to give the

best results.

For example: 01926543791 = zero, one, nine,

two, six, five, four, three, seven, nine, one.

You can also speak the number in groups of

three to six digits. If you adopt this approach,

always wait for the system to respond with

Continue before providing the next group of

numbers.

It is also possible to give the number as a

whole, with no pause between the digits.

To dial a phone number, follow one of the

procedures listed below.

If, during the procedure, the system prompts

you with a response of Continue, you can use

the following commands.

•DELETE - Will delete all digits entered and

prompt for entry of a number;

•CORRECTION - Deletes the digit entered

last, repeats the digits given so far and

prompts Continue;

•CANCEL - Cancels this dialogue;

•DIAL - Terminates the entry of digits and

dials the entered number.

Telephone numbers up to 20 digits are

acknowledged. If a longer number is given, the

message Number too long will be heard.

Dialling a number in groups

Dialling a number as a whole

Step Voice command System response

1. PHONE DIAL NUMBER PHONE DIAL NUMBER, NUMBER PLEASE

2. ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX. CONTINUE?

3. FIVE, FOUR, THREE FIVE, FOUR, THREE. CONTINUE?

4. SEVEN, NINE, ONE SEVEN, NINE, ONE. CONTINUE?

5. DIAL DIALLING

Step Voice command System response

1. PHONE DIAL NUMBER PHONE DIAL NUMBER, NUMBER PLEASE

2. ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX,

FIVE, FOUR, THREE, SEVEN,

NINE, ONE

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX, FIVE, FOUR, THREE,

SEVEN, NINE, ONE. CONTINUE?

5. DIAL DIALLING

325

Telephone

Phone store name

The system will guide you through the process.

After each prompt where the system asks for a

response, always wait for the tone before

responding.

To store a name, follow the procedure below.

If, during the procedure, the system prompts

you with a response of Continue, you can use

the following commands.

•DELETE - Will delete all digits entered and

prompt for entry of a number;

•CORRECTION - Deletes the digit entered

last, repeats the digits given so far and

prompts Continue;

•CANCEL - Cancels this dialogue;

•STORE - Terminates the entry of digits and

stores the entered phone number.

Step Voice command System response

1. PHONE STORE NAME PHONE STORE NAME, NUMBER PLEASE

2. ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX, FIVE,

FOUR, THREE, SEVEN, NINE, ONE

ZERO, ONE, NINE, TWO, SIX, FIVE, FOUR,

THREE, SEVEN, NINE, ONE. CONTINUE?

3. STORE NAME, PLEASE

4. <NAMETAG> PLEASE REPEAT NAME

5. <NAMETAG> <NAMETAG> STORED

6. DIAL DIALLING

Telephone

326

Storing nametags using the

touch-screen

Nametags can also be added to the system by

using the Add Phone nametag feature on the

touch-screen, as described below.

1. From the Home menu, select the Comms

button.

2. From the Comms menu, select the Add

Phone Nametag button.

3. A numerical touch-screen is displayed.

Enter the phone number.

4. When the number is entered, select the

Add button in the top right-hand corner

and, once the tone has sounded, speak the

name that you wish the number to be

stored under.

Note: The storage of the nametag itself is

subject to the nametag not being too short

(less than 0.4 seconds), too long (longer than

4 seconds), not sounding too much like

another stored nametag and relies on the

repetition of the nametag sounding the same

as the first utterance of it. If any of these criteria

are not met, the system will prompt you to give

a new nametag.

Note: The Add button will be greyed out if the

phone number is not valid.

Dialling a nametag

To dial a number stored under a nametag in the

directory, press and release the voice button

and say Phone dial name. The system will

repeat the command and will prompt you for a

stored nametag by saying Name please. After

the tone, speak the nametag of the required

number. The system will replay the stored

nametag and ask for confirmation that it is

correct. Answer with Yes or No, as appropriate.

Dialling voicemail

The number for your voicemail service needs

to be stored in the system, before using this

facility. To store the voicemail number:

•From the Home menu, select Comms.

•From the Comms menu, select Settings.

•The phone Settings menu has a Voice mail

button, to allow your voicemail number to

be entered.

To dial the voicemail number, press and

release the Voice button on the steering wheel,

wait for the tone to sound, then say Phone dial

voicemail.

Play all stored nametags

To play all the nametags stored in the directory,

press and release the Voice button on the

steering wheel and after the tone, say Phone

play directory. The list can be interrupted at

any time, by pressing and releasing the button

again. Once interrupted, you can then use the

commands, REPLAY, DIAL, DELETE, EDIT or

CANCEL.

Dialling a nametag stored on the

handset

To dial a number associated with a nametag

stored on the phone handset, press and release

the Voice button on the steering wheel and,

after the tone, say Phone dial handset name.

327

Telephone

Message centre messages

A number of responses by the telephone voice

system are reinforced by text messages

appearing in the message centre display.

These messages are in the following list.

•LISTENING

•VOICE NOT READY

•NOT AVAILABLE PHONE IN USE

•COMMAND NOT RECOGNISED

•NO SPEECH DETECTED

• STORING

•COMMAND CANCELLED

•SEARCHING

•HOLD BUTTON TO CANCEL

•DIRECTORY

Phonebook entries

You can also view the phonebook entries on

the message centre. See HANDS-FREE

CONTROLS (page 321).

Television

328

GENERAL INFORMATION

Introduction

TV viewing is possible when the vehicle is

stationary with the transmission in the P (Park)

position. The TV picture can be viewed in

preview mode or full-screen.

If the vehicle is moving when TV is selected or

if the vehicle is driven off when the TV is

operating, a warning message will display, the

TV picture will cease and only audio reception

is available.

Note: Japan market: The TV will operate

normally up to speeds of 5 km/h (3 mph), after

which the TV picture will cease and only audio

reception is available.

TV sound is provided through the audio system

speakers.

TV reception

Repositioning the vehicle may improve the

picture whereas in difficult locations (distant

transmitter, hills etc.), reception may not be

possible at all. Sound quality may also be

affected to a lesser degree by loss of signal,

which can give rise to variable quality over

short distances while on the move.

Note: Television systems require consistent

and strong signals for good quality reception.

These signals are affected by transmitter

coverage and surrounding features (hills, high

buildings, trees etc.) which will reduce the

signal, thus reducing picture quality.

TV inhibit with vehicle moving

If the vehicle is moved whilst the TV picture is

being displayed, the TV will be inhibited and

returned to the TV Menu screen.

A warning indicator will appear across the

screen for three seconds stating For your

safety, the picture is off while the vehicle is

in motion.

With the TV picture inhibited, TV sound and

channel changing continues to be available.

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

UK TV ITV1

Ch 4 Sky News

E4 CBBC

BBC1

Settings

Channel list

TP TA PTY DPLII

DTV BBC1

Style

UK TV

People

Sky

Sports N

Source

For your safety, the

picture is off while

motion

the vehicle is in

Analogue Digital

E94679

329

Television

TELEVISION CONTROLS

TV controls

1. Touch-screen: See TOUCH-SCREEN

(page 109).

2. Seek up: Short press to seek next channel

frequency; long press for next available

channel.

3. Settings:

•Short press to display the audio Settings

menu.

•Long press (two seconds) to display the

Vol presets menu.

4. On/off and volume control:

•Press the control to switch the system

on/off.

•Rotate the control to increase or

decrease volume level. Any volume

setting made whilst in audio, phone,

navigation or voice activation mode, will

be memorised for that system.

5. SOURCE: Press to change the source

media through FM1, FM2, AM, DAB1,

DAB2, DAB3, CD, iPod, USB, Auxiliary

input and TV.

6. Seek down: Short press to seek previous

preset channel; long press for previous

available channel.

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

More4 TMF

TP TA PTY DPLII

DTV ITV3

UKTV

History

Source

ITV2

ITV2+1 ITV4

Film4

Settings

Channel list

Analogue Digital

Ftn

ITV3

Touch image for

full screen

Savage Planet

E94705

Television

330

Steering wheel controls

1. Rotate up or down to increase or decrease

volume.

2. Rotate up or down and release repeatedly

to scroll through preset TV channel. Rotate

up and hold for two seconds to select next

strong TV channel.

3. Press repeatedly to scroll through all

sources.

4. This button can be used to mute the TV

sound at any time.

USING THE TELEVISION

On/off control

To operate the TV, the ignition system must be

on (press the engine START/STOP button).

Press the audio on/off and volume control on

the audio console.

On the touch-screen Home menu, select

Audio/TV, then select TV. The buttons on the

left of the screen will slide away and be

replaced by the TV preview picture. To

redisplay the buttons for five seconds, select

the Source button under the TV preview

picture. See TELEVISION CONTROLS

(page 329).

Volume control

The volume of the TV output can be adjusted in

one of two ways:

Rotate the audio on/off and volume control on

the audio console, or;

Rotate the volume control on the steering

wheel.

E94043

1 2

4 3

E94044

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

UK TV ITV1

Ch 4 Sky News

E4 CBBC

BBC1

Settings

Channel list

TA PTY DPLII

DTV BBC1

Style

UK TV

People

Sky

Sports N

Analogue Digital

E94680

E94085

E94086

331

Television

Analogue/Digital option

The TV offers both analogue and digital TV

reception. You can switch between the two

modes using the touch-screen controls.

Select Digital to display the options available

for digital TV.

Select Analogue to display the options

available for analogue TV.

Note: If no channels have been preset, no

channel names will be displayed on preset

keys.

Loss of reception

For a variety of reasons, you might lose

reception on the channel you are currently

viewing. This might happen because you have

moved outside the area for a local channel or

because the signal has become blocked by an

obstruction. In either case, the message No

reception will be displayed.

Full screen view

The TV main screen displays a preview picture

in a small screen alongside all the touch-screen

controls and preset channels.

Touch anywhere on the TV picture to display it

in full screen mode. A list of control buttons is

displayed on the full screen picture for five

seconds before disappearing.

To redisplay the buttons in full screen mode,

touch the screen again.

FINDING TV CHANNELS

Next/previous channel

Select the seek buttons on the touch-screen to

find the next/previous TV channel that is

available.

If you are watching in full screen mode, you

must first touch the picture to display the seek

buttons on screen.

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

More4 TMF

TP TA PTY DPLII

DTV ITV3

UKTV

History

Source

ITV2

ITV2+1 ITV4

Film4

Settings

annel list

Analogue Digital

Ftn

ITV3

Touch image for

full screen

Savage Planet

E94681

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

UK TV ITV1

Ch 4 Sky News

E4 CBBC

BBC1

Settings

Channel list

TP TA PTY DPLII

DTV BBC1

Style

UK TV

People

Sky

Sports N

Source

No reception

Analogue Digital

E94682

4:3

Zoom

16:9

ITV3

20:00

21:00

Movies Now

Brideshead Revisited

20 : 26

E94687

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

More4 TMF

TP TA PTY DPL I

DTV ITV3

UKTV

History

Source

ITV2+1 ITV4

Settings

Channel list

Analogue Digital

Ftn

ITV3

Touch image for

full screen

Savage Planet

E94696

Television

332

Channel list

On the preview screen, select Channel list to

display the channels available. The channel list

will update automatically. While you are

viewing the channel list, it is updated

automatically.

Use the arrow keys to scroll through the

channel list.

Using presets channels

On each waveband, nine channels can be

memorised using the touch-screen keypad.

Storing channels

After tuning to a channel, touch and hold (two

seconds) the selected preset button. An

audible signal indicates that the channel is

stored. If the information is broadcast, the

channel name will be displayed.

Recalling channels

Briefly touch the preset key on the

touch-screen to recall the stored channel.

Rotate and release the steering wheel selector

control repeatedly to cycle through all the

preset channels.

TELEVISION SETUP

TV screen format

You can change the format of the picture

displayed on the touch-screen. The default

format is 16:9 with the additional options of 4:3

and Zoom.

Touch the TV picture to display full screen

mode with control buttons displayed.

Select 4:3, Zoom or 16:9, as required. If no

further change is made within five seconds, the

format you have chosen will remain displayed

and the control buttons will disappear.

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

More4 TMF

TP TA PTY DPLII

DTV ITV3

UKTV

History

Source

ITV

ITV2+1 ITV4

Film4

Settings

Channel list

Analogue Digital

Ftn

ITV3

Touch image for

full screen

Savage Planet

E94697

Audio/TV

12 : 26 pm

More4 TMF

TP TA PTY DPLII

DTV ITV3

UKTV

History

Source

ITV2

ITV2+ ITV4

Film4

Settings

Channel list

Analogue Digital

Ftn

TV3

Touch image for

full screen

Savage Planet

E94701

4:3

Zoom

16:9

ITV3

20:00

21:00

Movies Now

Brideshead Revisited

20 : 26

E94702

333

Television

TV settings

On the TV main menu, select Settings, then

select Options.

Note: You cannot change any TV settings while

the vehicle is moving.

Traffic

The Traffic option detects the presence of local

radio traffic announcements. As soon as an

announcement is received, TV play will be

interrupted. At the end of the announcement,

play will resume as normal.

Select On or Off to enable or disable the Traffic

option.

TV country

If you move the vehicle to a different country,

you can change the TV country setting to make

sure that you receive the best possible

reception and sound quality. On the Options

menu, the currently selected TV country is

displayed.

Note: If you have already selected a TV format,

then the TV country option is disabled.

For TV country, select Change to display a list

of all countries where TV services are available.

Select the country name to enable it.

The TV country setting determines the most

appropriate settings for TV broadcasts in your

current location.

TV format

You can change the TV format setting from the

Options menu. If you change the format, then

the TV country setting will be disabled because

there are fewer formats that can apply to more

than one country.

On the Options menu, the currently selected TV

format is displayed, for example PAL-C. Select

Change to view a complete list of available

formats. Use the arrow buttons to scroll

through the list.

Audio/TV

DAB radio

AM/FM

12 : 26 pm

Portable audio

UK TV ITV1

Ch 4 Sky News

E4 CBBC

BBC1

Settings

Ch t

TA PTY DPLII

DTV BBC1

Style

UK TV

People

Sky

Sports N

Analogue Digital

E94703

Audio/TV

Bal/Fade

Options

Sound

12 : 26 pm

Settings

Traffic

OnOff

Change

TV country:

PTY

United Kingdom

TV format

PAL-C

Change

E94704

Navigation system

334

THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Loading the navigation DVD

Note: Before use, ensure that the navigation

DVD player is loaded with the correct mapping

DVD for your country.

The navigation DVD player is located behind an

access panel on the left-hand side of the

luggage compartment. The trim panel will need

to be removed (as shown) to access the DVD

player.

•Turn on the vehicle ignition.

•Move the lock/unlock button to the unlock

position (1).

•Press the unload button (2) to eject a DVD,

if one is installed in the DVD player.

•Load the correct Navigation System DVD

with the printed side upwards.

•Move the lock/unlock button to the locked

position. Replace the access cover.

SATELLITE SIGNALS

The system uses signals from the Global

Positioning System (GPS) satellites, which

allow the approximate position of the vehicle to

be calculated. This is combined with

information from vehicle sensors and data

from the Navigation DVD, to establish the true

vehicle position.

The navigation computer then integrates this

data with the information stored on the DVD,

enabling you to plan and follow a route to your

desired destination.

WARNING

In the interests of road safety, only

operate, adjust or view the system

when it is safe to do so.

JAG0840

CAUTION

Do not allow moisture, dirt or foreign

objects to enter the slot.

335

Navigation system

Digitised area

Ensure that you are using the latest version of

the correct DVD for your country.

Note: Your Dealer/Authorised Repairer will

have details of how to order DVD updates.

The navigation DVD provided, contains a

digitised street map. Larger cities and

boroughs are completely covered. The regional

and unclassified roads or access roads and the

town centre for smaller towns and boroughs

are included.

One way streets, pedestrian zones, turn bans

and other traffic regulations are taken into

account as far as possible. There may be

discrepancies between the data on the

navigation DVD and the actual local situation,

due to temporary or permanent changes to

road systems and their traffic regulations.

If the vehicle battery has been disconnected, or

if the vehicle has been transported to a new

location on another vehicle (e.g. by trailer or

train), the navigation system may require

several minutes to identify the new position.

Errors in vehicle position

Under certain driving conditions, it is possible

that the vehicle position shown may be

incorrect. Some examples are shown below:

•Negotiating circular ramps in car parks.

•Elevated roads in proximity to other roads.

•Where two roads run parallel to each other.

•Driving on steep roads.

•When the vehicle is transported by ferry or

train.

•After the tyres have been replaced.

•When using snow chains.

•After the vehicle has been rotated on a

turntable.

•After vehicle battery removal or supply

fuse failure.

Reception of GPS signals

GPS signals are highly directional and

reception may occasionally be interrupted.

Some examples of situations likely to cause

problems are shown below:

•Inside buildings

•Forest roads between mountains

•Between tall buildings

•Roads under cliffs.

The vehicle’s direction and speed sensors will

minimise any adverse effect on the operation of

the navigation system, if this should occur.

Normal operation will resume once the

obstruction has been passed.

Navigation system

336

GETTING STARTED

If the screen is already displaying another

function (radio, phone, etc.), touch either the

back arrow or the Home button below the

touch-screen to access the Home Menu.

Select Navigation.

Read the caution and touch Agree or select

Language if you need to select a different

navigation language.

Non-European countries only

The introduction screen text for non-European

countries is as shown below and not as seen on

the previous illustration:

Most functions are inhibited whilst the vehicle

is in motion. Please read the handbook for

operating instructions. Always obey traffic

regulations

Note: In some countries the front seat

passenger may enter data whilst the vehicle is

in motion.

Home

Audio/TV

Climate

hone

Navigation

Vehicle

Valet

12:26 pm

JAG1523

External

Left Right

20 17

.5 .5

DAB radio DAB1

BBC 5Live Xtra

BBC National DAB

TA FM DAB i Subch

Caution

Distraction may cause accidents.

Never enter data whilst driving.

Always concentrate on driving

and obey traffic regulations.

See Owners Handbook.

Language Agree

12 : 26 pm

JOL4500ENG

337

Navigation system

MENU STRUCTURE

The following menu outlines the touch-screen Navigation system menu structure.

Navigation Setup User Settings

Quick POI Selection

Calibration

Restore Defaults

RDS-TMC

Language Selection

Stored Locations Memory Add

Destination/waypoint Edit

Previous Delete

Avoid Points

Home

Destination Entry Address House

Street

Town

Intersection

Display Map

Save

POI POI Name

POI

Phone

Postcode

Map

Coordinates

Route Options Route Preferences

Destination/Waypoint

Detour

Search Condition

Route Preview

Display Route

Calculate

Cancel Guidance

Route Trace

Auto voice guidance off

Navigation system

338

MAIN MENU

After selecting navigation, the main menu is

displayed showing available functions. For

detailed information on these items:

See DESTINATION ENTRY (page 356).

See ROUTE PREFERENCES (page 347).

See USER SETTINGS (page 338).

There are additional sections in this handbook

specifically showing Points of Interest (POIs)

and End User Licence Agreements.

Select the menu item required.

Note: To view the map without the buttons

showing, touch anywhere on the map display.

To display the buttons, touch Menu.

USER SETTINGS

From the main navigation menu select

Navigation Setup.

A number of user settings can be made from

this menu.

Select those which you require then touch OK.

Note: Touch a dark blue band to deselect that

feature or a light band to select it.

The individual details must be firstly set in the

navigation setup menu.

LUTON

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

LUTON

FORD

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

JOL4506ENG

Guidance screen

User Settings

Motorway Information

Border guidance

Congestion Charge guidance

Default

Navigation Setup

Low Fuel Warning

User Settings

Display Petrol Station POI

Text Size on the MAP

iy traffic restriction

Auto voice guidance

Medium

Default

Selection

Calibration

Restore

User

Settings

Defaults

Quick POI

12 : 26 pm

RDS-TMC

Language

Selection

JOL4547ENG

339

Navigation system

Saving user preferences to memory

Use the scroll arrows (1) to see the options.

Most of these selections are either on or off,

light blue band is not selected, dark blue band

is selected.

Touch the line of your choice then OK (2).

TURN-BY-TURN NAVIGATION

(Message centre guidance)

Turn-by-turn navigation guidance (displayed in

the message centre) can be turned on or off as

follows:

From the main navigation menu, select

Navigation Setup, then select User Settings.

Scroll through the user settings list until the

Message centre guidance band is displayed.

Touch the band to select/deselect the feature.

If the band is dark blue, then Message centre

guidance is active. If the band is light blue,

Message centre guidance is turned off.

LANGUAGE SELECTION

From the initial navigation screen, select

Language and select your language.

If necessary, use the scroll arrows to the left of

the list to search up or down.

LUTON

Navigation Setup

Low Fuel Warning

User Settings

Display Petrol Station

Text Size on the MAP

y traffic restriction

Auto voice guidance

Medium

Default

Selection

Calibration

Restore

User

Settings

Defaults

Quick POI

12 : 26 pm

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

RDS-TMC

Language

Selection

JOL4507ENG

German

French

Italian

English

Caution

Language Agree

English

Language

US English

12 : 26 pm

JOL4501ENG

Distraction may cause accidents.

Never enter data whilst driving.

Always concentrate on driving

and obey traffic regulations.

See Owners Handbook.

Navigation system

340

MEASUREMENT UNITS

Distances are shown on the screen and given in

voice guidance, either in metric units

(kilometres and metres) or in Imperial units

(miles and yards) and can only be changed

from the vehicle touch-screen menu, not from

the navigation system menu.

To change the measurement units, select

Vehicle on the vehicle touch screen, then select

Unit Change.

To change the units: The unit choices are

selected by touching either km or Mls.

KEYBOARD LAYOUT

The keyboard layout can be changed from a

QWERTY type to ABCDEF type, from the User

Settings screen, accessible from the

Navigation Setup screen.

Touch the bar to change the keyboard layout,

then touch OK.

Display set

Preferences

Button audio

Mls. MPH MPG

km km/h 1/100

Vehicle

Display language

English UK

Vol. presets

Change

JOL4657ENG

Navigation Setup

Selection

Calibration

Restore

User

Settings

Defaults

Quick POI

12 : 26 pm

RDS-TMC

Language

Selection

12 : 26 pm

Low Fuel Warning

User Settings

Display Petrol Station POI

Text Size on the MAP

Key board layout

Medium

Default

ABC

JOL4658ENG

LUTON

12 : 26 pm

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

341

Navigation system

MAP SPLIT SCREEN

1. North is up.

2. GPS (Global Positioning System) a signal

is not being received.

3. TMC (Traffic Message Channel), a signal is

being received.

4. TMC, a signal is not being received.

5. Message box.

6. Small compass display which always

indicates North.

7. Next direction display.

8. Current vehicle position.

9. TMC Incident (Red Star).

10. Back one screen arrow.

11. Repeat last voice instruction.

12. Split screen.

13. POI - fuel station shown.

•The POI button will not be active if the

zoom level is above 1 km (½ mile).

14. Current street location.

15. Normal screen.

16. Screen mode selection.

17. Menu

18. Distance display.

19. Zoom

FO D

FORD

12 : 26 pm

132 mi

TMC

GPS

St James Lane

TMC TMC

M 4 0

GPS

M 4 0

JOL4497ENG

3 4

16 10

111415

mi1.2

Navigation system

342

MAP DISPLAY ICONS

The icons on the split screens are:

This is only displayed when

a satellite signal is not being

received.

This icon is displayed when

TMC is selected and a signal

is received.

When the bar is across the

TMC, then a signal is not

being received and TMC will

not function.

Touching this icon toggles it

with the N (North) icon (1).

The compass always points

North or else the vehicle

direction arrow always

points to the top of the map.

Distance and direction for

the next turn.

If the compass icon (6) is

showing, the vehicle

direction icon (8) is always

to the top of the map

irrespective of where North

is.

Example RDS-TMC Icon

(this one showing incident).

Go back one screen.

Touch to repeat last voice

instruction.

GPS

TMC

mi1.2

Example POI (this one

showing a fuel station).

This icon shows information

concerning journey distance

and the estimated time

remaining before arriving at

your destination.

It also indicates your journey from your

current position to the next waypoint or to

your destination. In this example the journey

is to your destination, shown in the top of the

icon as the vehicle position arrow and a

pointer towards a red circle.

This icon shows distance

from your current position,

distance and direction to

way point 2.

This is your zoom button,

enabling you to alter the map

scale. The current level of

zoom is shown between the

two arrows (e.g. 2 miles).

You may also see a zoom

bar on the map.

This icon is toggled with the

compass (6). When this is

showing, North is always to

the top of the map.

This icon is visible when the

navigation screen has been

scrolled away from the

current vehicle position, so

that the vehicle (compass)

icon is no longer visible.

Touch the icon to re-centre

the screen on the current

vehicle position.

136

343

Navigation system

Other icons

Other icons can be shown to select different

views of the screen(s). Touch the button,

arrowed above, to show the icons for selection.

Show full screen.

Show the split screen.

Show the compass.

List of forthcoming junctions

and turn directions shown on

the split screen.

LUTON

M 4 0

LUTON

NInfo

56 MI

Info

B4100 Banbury Road

56 MI

12 : 26 pm

JOL4528ENG

This displays a larger next

junction guidance arrow on the

right screen.

This facility is only available

when travelling on a motorway

and appears automatically to

display the remaining motorway

exits (up to the required exit for

your route) and the exit

numbers.

Automatically shows the next

junction on the right of the

screen.

Navigation system

344

SETTING A DESTINATION

After touching Agree, the initial map screen is

displayed, now select Menu

From the Navigation Menu, select Destination

Entry.

Note: If you wish to view the map without the

buttons showing, touch anywhere on the map

display. To display the buttons, touch Menu.

If at any time you make a mistake, use the back

arrow key on the lower right side of the screen

to either go back one letter or number at a time

or repeatedly touch it until the previous screen

is shown.

The Destination Entry menu provides a choice

of methods for entering a destination. For this

example, the destination address, 81 Austin

Place, Abingdon, Oxfordshire will be used.

From the Destination screen select Address

and input the Town name.

LUTON

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

LUTON

F RD

ORD

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

JOL4502ENG

12 : 26 pm

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

JOL4503ENG

Address

Street

Town

Intersection

House

Display Map GBR

Destination

POI

Postcode

Map

Coordinates

Address

Home GBR

12 34 5

vious

Motorway

Memory

Last 5

KETTERING(KETTERING),N

Clear

NUNEATON(NUNEATON),WA

LEAMINGTON SPA,WARWIC

Not Registered

Not Registered GBR

Town Name

Nearest 5

Area

12 : 26 pm

Area

Number

JOL4536ENG

345

Navigation system

Input the destination town name by touching

the letters on the display. Only letters which are

highlighted can be used. Delete incorrect

letters by touching the back arrow.

Once sufficient letters have been inputted the

system will display all the possible towns.

If necessary, use the scroll arrows to the left of

the list to search up or down.

Select (touch) the town you require.

Now enter the street name.

Once again, only letters which are available will

be highlighted. When the system recognises

enough letters, the street or a list of streets will

be displayed.

Select the street you require.

Address

Town Input Town Name ****

Delete

More 0-9 , ()

List

Address

Town ABIN 8

Delete

More 0-9 , ()List

Address

GBR

Town ABINGD 2

ABINGDON,OXFORDSHIRE

QWER T YU I O P

AS DF GHJ KL

XCV BNM

QWER T YU I O P

AS DF GHJ KL

ZXC NM

ABINGDON(ABING FORDSHIRE

12 : 26 pm

JOL4537ENG

Address

Street A132

Delete

More 0-9 , ()

List

Address

GBR

Street AU 2

AUDLETT DRIVE

QWER T YU I O P

AS DF G KL

ZXCV BNM

AUSTIN PLACE

Address

Street

Town

Intersection

Display Map GBR

ABINGDON,OXFORDSHIRE

House

Number

Area

12 : 26 pm

JOL4538ENG

Navigation system

346

Enter the house number of the address (if

known) then touch OK to confirm.

If the house number is not known, press OK (1)

- the mid-point of the street is then used as the

destination.

Note: If a list of house number ranges is

displayed, select the applicable range and then

enter the number.

The map screen showing the route settings and

destination details is displayed.

Touch Route Prefs. (1) to change the route

settings or Destination to start the route

calculation. If a destination is already set, touch

Waypoint to add a waypoint in the journey.

Address

Street

Town

Intersection

Display Map GBR

ABINGDON,OXFORDSHIRE

AUSTIN PLACE

Address

(1-139):

1 Delete23

456

789

Address

(1-139):81

1 Delete23

456

789

House

Number

House

Number

House

Number

Area

12 : 26 pm

JOL4539ENG

A 3 4

Info

Route

Prefs.

1/8

81 AUSTIN PLAC

TMC

12 : 26 pm

Destination Waypoint

JOL4540ENG

347

Navigation system

ROUTE PREFERENCES

If Route Prefs. is selected, the route

preferences screen will be displayed. select the

desired option(s) and select OK to confirm.

Note: Touch a dark blue band to select that

feature or a light blue band to deselect it.

START GUIDANCE

After touching Destination, the system will

calculate the route.

There is now a choice to select 3 Route,

Change Route or to Start navigation guidance.

If 3 Route is touched, a choice of three different

routes is displayed on the map.

Major Roads

Route Preferences

Toll Road

Ferry

Restricted Roa

Car Train OK

Major Roads

Route Preferences

Toll Road

Ferry

Restricted Road

Car Train OK

12 : 26 pm

JOL4541ENG

A 3 4

1/8

81 AUSTIN PLACE

Searching route....

Destination has been set as

81 AUSTIN PLACE.

12 : 26 pm

JOL4542ENG

OXFORD

LUTON

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Route 1

Change

Route Start3 Route

JOL4659ENG

Total

12 ml

TMC

JOL4669ENG

OXFORD

LUTON

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Route 1

Change

Route Start3 Route

Total

12 ml

TMC

Navigation system

348

The roads on the map are drawn in three

different colours to highlight each route.

Select route 1, 2 or 3 by touching the

respective box displayed on the right side of

the map.

If Change Route is touched you will be given a

menu to select from. Each menu item is

described in detail this handbook.

When you have made your selection, if any,

touch Start.

The route will be highlighted on the map, with

an arrow icon showing your current position

and a circle within a red circle showing your

destination. The road name/number is also

listed in the text area below the map.

Drive away, following the voice guidance given

by the system.

As you approach a junction, in addition to the

voice guidance, an inset on the map will display

an enlarged view of the junction.

When your destination is reached, voice and

visual confirmation is given.

OXFORD

LUTON

12 : 26 pm

TMC

Info

Route 1

Route 2

Route 3

128

min

383

min

356

m n

LONDON

B N

BIRM NGHAM

JOL4672ENG

JOL4670ENG

OXFORD

LUTON

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Route 1

Change

Route Start3 Route

Total

12 ml

TMC

JOL4671ENG

OXFORD

LUTON

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Route 1

Change

Route Start3 Route

Total

12 ml

TMC

43 mi

B4100 Banbury Road

NQuick

12 : 26 pm

JOL4543ENG

A 3 4

OXFORD

CULHAM

ATON

1 5 mi

A4183 / OXFORD ROAD

DUNMORE ROAD

300

yard

miles

1/2

12 : 26 pm

JOL4544ENG

349

Navigation system

VOICE GUIDANCE

The last voice guidance message can be

repeated by touching the speaker icon in the

lower right of the screen.

To turn voice guidance on or off but maintain

route guidance proceed as follows:

Go to the Navigation Menu, then select Auto

Voice Guidance Off. This takes you to the User

Settings menu.

If the panel is deep blue, Auto Voice Guidance

is on, if the panel is light blue then it is muted.

To change the voice guidance setting, touch

the bar, then touch OK (1).

Note: The repeat voice guidance key (the

speaker icon) is always available for use.

A 3 4

OXFORD

CULHAM

ATON

1 5 mi

A4183 / OXFORD ROAD

DUNMORE ROAD

300

yard

miles

1/2

12 : 26 pm

JOL4545ENG

LUTON

Low Fuel Warning

User Settings

Display Petrol Station POI

Text Size on the MAP

Notifiy traffic restriction

Auto voice guidance

Medium

Default

12 : 26 pm

JOL4504ENG

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

Navigation system

350

CANCEL GUIDANCE

To cancel guidance, touch the Menu button on

the touch-screen, select Route Options and

then Cancel Guidance.

QUICK POI SELECTION

Touch the Map screen to display the POI

button. Touch the POI button. The screen

shows six suggested categories that can be

selected as quick points of interest.

Note: The POI button will not be active if the

zoom level is above 1 km (½ mile).

Select a Quick POI category, or select More to

see further POIs.

The map screen with the POI icon(s) is

displayed. Select the five POIs you wish to see

when the Quick POIs are displayed.

LUTON

12 : 26 pm

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

12 : 26 pm

Route Options

Destination /

Detour

Route

Route Display

Preferences

Condition

Calculate

Cancel Guidance

Route Trace

12 : 26 pm

Route Options

Waypoint

Detour

Route

Preview

Route

Display

Route

Preferance

Condition

Destination

Cancel No Yes

Cancel guidance?

Route Trace

Waypoint

JOL4546ENG

Quick POI Selection

Default

All

Park

Petrol

Golf

Shop

Hotel

Car

Q-POI Selection

Community

Hotel

Leisure

Others

12 : 26 pm

FORD

LUTON

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Set

Destination

POI

JOL4508ENG

351

Navigation system

CALIBRATION

If the vehicle has been moved, for example, by

rail or trailer, the vehicle position/direction may

need to be calibrated.

The map showing the heading adjustment

arrows is displayed. Adjust the heading by

touching and using the arrows until the

navigation symbol shows the correct

alignment. Touch OK to confirm the new

heading.

Quick POI

Navigation Setup

Calibration

Select after

tyre change

Adjust the

Current Position Position/Direction

Distance

12 : 26 pm

Selection

Calibration

Restore

User

Settings

Defaults

Quick POI

JOL4548ENG

RDS-TMC

Language

Selection

A 3 4

NPosition

A 3 4

Calibration

1/8

12 : 26 pm

Direction

Calibration

JOL4509ENG

Navigation system

352

RESTORE SYSTEM DEFAULTS

If you have made any changes to the system

default settings, speed settings etc. then using

this menu will restore the original settings.

Navigation Setup

System defaults will be restored. Please see

handbook for more information on system defauls

System Defaults

Average Speed Default

Selection

Calibration

Restore

User

Settings

Defaults

Quick POI

12 : 26 pm

JOL4656ENG

RDS-TMC

Language

Selection

System defaults will be restored. Please see

handb k f i f ti t d f l

System Defaults

Average Speed Default

Cancel No Yes

Do you want to reset the average

speed to default value?

12 : 26 pm

JOL4549ENG

System defaults will be restored. Please see

handbook for more information on system defauls

System Defaults

Average Speed Default

Your average speed is now

a default setting

12 : 26 pm

JOL4550ENG

353

Navigation system

LANGUAGE SELECTION

Language change can be made from the map

screen, or as shown above using the

Navigation Setup menu.

MEMORY

From the navigation menu, select Stored

Locations. This enables you to manage

destinations such as, place of work, home,

favourite restaurant or areas to avoid.

From the Stored Locations menu you can save

up to 106 memory points, add your home

address and save up to 10 areas to avoid.

For this example we will store the exit at the

M69 motorway and on to the A5 major road to

Nuneaton.

Select Memory Points to add a memory point

(stored location).

Touching any of the Stored Locations

submenus, shown in the top illustration above,

allows you to Add, Edit or Delete.

Note: The screen above appears in many of the

navigation submenu selections.

Select Add to store a memory point.

T N

LUTON

Navigation Setup

Selection

Calibration

Restore

User

Settings

Defaults

Quick POI

12 : 26 pm

Stored

Destination

Auto Voice

Entry

Guidance Off

Locations

Navigation

Setup

Route

Options

RDS-TMC

Language

Selection

English

Language

US English

German

French

Italian

English

12 : 26 pm

JOL4510ENG

Stored Location

Destination &

Waypoint

Avoid Points

Home

Memory

Calculate

Display memory

Memory Points

Add

Edit

Delete

Stored Memory

1/106

point icon

Points

Destination

Points

JOL4551ENG

14 : 26 pm

Navigation system

354

To store a memory point

For this example we will choose a motorway

exit.

We will choose a motorway exit on the M69.

Touch the motorway letter M, then touch the

numeric key (0 - 9) to change the keypad.

Enter 69.

Choose Exit.

Select an exit, for this example choose the A5.

The map shows the M69 and the A5. Touch OK.

Select Nuneaton.

Motorway Input Motorway Name

Entry/Exit

QWER T YU I O P

AS DFGHJ KL

Z X C V B N M Delete

More 0-9 , ()List

12 : 26 pm

JOL4552ENG

M_ 54

~!$

123

%^&*_456

I-7 8 Delete

A-Z

?0 List

1/2

Motorway

Entry/Exit

12 : 26 pm

JOL4553ENG

Motorway Entry/Exit

Entrance

Motorway

Exit

M69

Please Select an

Entrance

12 : 26 pm

JOL4554ENG

Exit

Motorway

B4109

M69

Please select 17

Input

Dist

12 : 26 pm

JOL4555ENG

Info

1/8 ml

M69,A5

M69

12 : 26 pm

JOL4556ENG

Exit

Motorway

NUNEATON

M. KEYNES

B4109

M69

Please select 17

Input

12 ml

62 Name

12 : 26 pm

JOL4557ENG

355

Navigation system

Information on Destination/Waypoint entry is

given elsewhere in this handbook.

See DESTINATION ENTRY (page 356).

AVOID POINTS

After a route has been selected you can set a

single or a series of Avoid Points. Touch Avoid

Points and the map is displayed. Using your

finger, touch the map and drag it until the circle

is over the area you wish to avoid.

Use the zoom bar if required to firstly enlarge

the search area and, after moving the circle to

the general area, zoom to precisely the area to

avoid.

Use the Reduce/Enlarge buttons to find the

exact area you wish to avoid. Touch OK.

The area to avoid is stored.

HOME

From the Stored Locations menu select HOME.

NM69,HINCKLEY ROAD

Destination has been set as

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

M69

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

12 : 26 pm

JOL4558ENG

A 3 4

NAdd area to avoid

1/8 mi

12 : 26 pm

JOL4559ENG

A 3 4

12 : 26 pm

100

Change area size

Reduce Enlarge

400m

JOL4660ENG

TMC

Edit area to avoid

Location

Area

Name

ON OKEffect

EPSOM, EPSOM, SURREY

REIGATE

Area to avoid registered at

REIGATE

Searching route...

12 : 26 pm

JOL4560ENG

Navigation system

356

DESTINATION ENTRY

Setting a destination

From the Navigation Menu, select Destination

Entry.

The Destination Entry menu provides a choice

of methods for entering a destination.

Choosing your route

Once the destination has been calculated

options for your journey can be made by

touching Route Prefs. or by selecting 3 Route

or Change Route.

Information about altering your route

preferences is given earlier in this handbook.

See ROUTE PREFERENCES (page 347).

Start guidance

When the system has calculated the route, the

map is displayed.

The route will be highlighted on the map, with

an icon showing your current position. The

road name/number is also listed in the text

area.

If no destination is set, the Destination key is

highlighted and Waypoint is greyed out (not

selectable).

If a destination is set and no waypoint is set

both Destination and Waypoint are

highlighted.

Drive away, following the voice guidance given

by the system. As you approach a junction, in

addition to the voice guidance, an inset on the

map will display an enlarged view of the

junction.

When your destination is reached, voice and

visual confirmation is given.

Points of interest

To set a POI as destination or a waypoint.

See POINTS OF INTEREST (page 362).

Destination

POI

Postcode

Map

Coordinates

Address

Home GBR

12 34 5

vious

Memory

Motorway

Entry/Exit

Area

12 : 26 pm

JOL4561ENG

A 3 4

Info

1/8

81 AUSTIN PLACE

12 : 26 pm

Route

Prefs.

JOL4562ENG

357

Navigation system

POSTCODE

Not all countries have this facility. Enter the

postcode of your waypoint or destination from

the keypad. Ensure that any spaces and

punctuation is as used in reality otherwise the

system may not find it.

Postcode formats

The following is a list of countries where the

navigation system provides full postcode entry:

•Austria

•Belgium

•Denmark

•France

•Germany

•Italy

•Luxembourg

•Spain

•Switzerland

•United Kingdom

The following is a list of countries where the

navigation system provides reduced postcode

entry:

•Netherlands - The four numeric digits only,

e.g. 4817

•Sweden - Only the first three digits of the

postcode can be entered,

e.g. 162 00 must be entered as 162.

When the postcode has been entered touch OK.

MAP

After selecting map, the local area map is

displayed. If the destination or waypoint is not

shown on the map, use the zoom button to

increase the area. By using your finger on the

touch-screen move the circle to the area for

your destination or waypoint, zooming in if

required.

This location can be stored as a destination or

waypoint.

COORDINATES

If you know the coordinates of your destination

they can be entered from this screen. The full

latitude must be entered first before the

longitude coordinates can be entered.

When the coordinates have been entered,

touch OK.

If the coordinates entered are not contained

within the area covered by the DVD, a message

will be shown. This can also occur if the

incorrect coordinates have been entered.

Coordinates

Delete

123

456

LAT

N S Input Latitude

789

0WE

LONG

12 : 26 pm

JOL4564ENG

Delete

123

456

LAT

789

0WE

LONG

Coordinates

12 : 26 pm

JOL4565ENG

Delete

123

456

LAT

789

0WE

LONG

Input Longitude

Coordinates

12 : 26 pm

JOL4566ENG

Navigation system

358

MEMORY

Points of interest (POI)

Select POI Name, POI Near (1) or a Search

Area (2) from the Destination menu screen.

Input the POI name using the keypad or select

List to see the complete list of POIs.

Select the POI name, or select a search area

such as a city centre to find the selected POI.

After selecting Previous from the menu, the

screen shows a list of stored previous

destinations. Select your destination, by

touching the bar, and the details are displayed

for confirmation.

Note: Whilst driving, list scrolling is not active.

You can only choose from the items shown at

the top of the list.

POI

POI near

Phone

POI Name

GBR

Number

Area

12 : 26 pm

JOL4567ENG

Name Input POI Name ****

QWER T YU I O P

AS DF GHJ KL

Z X C V B N M Delete

More 0-9 , ( ) List

Category

Town

12 : 26 pm

JOL4568ENG

Car

POI Catergory

Community

Hotel

Leisure

Others OK

Delete

12 : 26 pm

JOL4570ENG

City Centre

QWER T YU I O P

AS DF GHJ KL

Z X C V B N M Delete

More 0-9 , ( ) List

City Centre ****

Input city centre name

Select Search Point

Input city centre

Current Position

Map

12 : 26 pm

JOL4569ENG

359

Navigation system

MOTORWAY

This enables you to select a motorway exit or

entrance as a destination or as part of a route

itinerary.

From Destination Entry select Motorway

Entry/Exit.

Enter the motorway name or number. In this

example the M69 is selected with a destination

of Nuneaton, exiting the M69 on to the A5.

Now select an entrance or exit.

The screen gives all of the entrance or exit

junctions on the M69. Choose the A5.

The map showing the selected motorway and

the selected exit junction is displayed.

Motorway Input Motorway Name

Entry/Exit

QWER T YU I O P

AS DFGHJ KL

Z X C V B N M Delete

More 0-9 , ()List

12 : 26 pm

JOL4552ENG

M_ 54

~!$

123

%^&*_456

I-7 8 Delete

A-Z

?0 List

1/2

Motorway

Entry/Exit

12 : 26 pm

JOL4553ENG

Motorway Entry/Exit

Entrance

Motorway

Exit

M69

Please Select an

Entrance

12 : 26 pm

JOL4554ENG

Exit

Motorway

B4109

M69

Please select 17

Input

Dist

12 : 26 pm

JOL4555ENG

Info

1/8 ml

M69,A5

M69

12 : 26 pm

JOL4556ENG

Navigation system

360

Now Nuneaton is selected by touching the bar.

The destination has now been set and the route

is calculated.

COMPASS

Select the compass icon and the compass will

be displayed.

Exit

Motorway

NUNEATON

M. KEYNES

B4109

M69

Please select 17

Input

12 ml

62 Name

12 : 26 pm

JOL4557ENG

NM69,HINCKLEY ROAD

Destination has been set as

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

M69

M69,HINCKLEY ROAD

12 : 26 pm

JOL4558ENG

56 mi

B4100 Banbury Road

Destination

Current

Lat N52' 29' 58'

Long : W1' 26' 48'

Long W1' 26' 48'

B4100 Banbury Road

LUTON

M 4 0

NInfo

B4100 Banbury Road

56 mi

12 : 26 pm

JOL4571ENG

361

Navigation system

The illustration above shows the map display

always facing North. The car (1) position faces

its compass direction of travel and item (2) is

the destination or next waypoint.

In this illustration the car (1) position faces

upwards to the top of the map and item (2) is

the destination or next waypoint.

56 mi

B4100 Banbury Road

Destination

Current

Lat N52' 29' 58'

Long : W1' 26' 48'

Long W1' 26' 48'

B4100 Banbury Road

12 : 26 pm

JOL4572ENG

56 mi

B4100 Banbury Road

Destination

Current

Lat N52' 29' 58'

Long W1' 26' 48'

Long : W1' 26' 48'

B4100 Banbury Road

12 : 26 pm

JOL4573ENG

Navigation system

362

POINTS OF INTEREST

The Navigation System DVD contains

information about a large number of points of

interest (POI). There are many categories of

POI, including fuel stations, restaurants,

railway stations and hospitals.

This chapter explains how to select a specific

POI. A selected POI can be set as a destination.

From the Destination Entry menu, select POI.

Input the POI name, for example Petrol to

display fuel stations on the map, or touch List

for a list of POIs.

Note: If entering a POI name results in too

many matches being listed, try entering the

town name first. If you do not know the name

of the POI you want, try selecting a POI

category.

Alternatively, choose Category to see all

categories of POI and make your selection.

Use the scroll arrows to change pages.

Some POIs are sub-categorised, e.g. selecting

Community will be further divided into:

•Community Centre.

•Exhibition Centre.

•Hospital.

•Park & Recreation.

•Town Hall

When the appropriate POI has been selected,

the system begins to search for a route to that

POI.

Note: POI icons can only be displayed up to the

1 km (½ mile) zoom level.

For this example, choose Petrol Station and 3D

Petrol.

POI

POI near

Phone

POI Name

GBR

Number

Area

12 : 26 pm

JOL4584ENG

Name Input POI Name ****

QWER T YU I O P

AS DF GHJ KL

Z X C V B N M Delete

More 0-9 , ( ) List

Category

Town

12 : 26 pm

JOL4585ENG

All

POI Category

Airport

Bowling centre

Bus station

Car Rental

Category

12 : 26 pm

JOL4586ENG

Category

3D PETROL

A D PETROL

ACTUAL PETROL

AMBER PETROL

Name 43

Town

12 : 26 pm

JOL4587ENG

363

Navigation system

Once the POI has been selected the route is

determined. Touch Route Prefs. to change the

route settings, or touch OK to start the route

calculation.

The map screen showing the destination

details and route settings is displayed.

POI ICON DISPLAY

After selecting a category, the map display

shows the location of each POI in the selected

category, indicated by the appropriate POI

icon.

For information about a particular POI, touch

the desired POI icon.

List of icons

Info

1/8 mi

3D PETROL

12 : 26 pm

Route

Prefs.

JOL4588ENG

3D PETROL

Destination has been set as

3D PETROL.

12 : 26 pm

JOL4589ENG

Shopping

Shopping Centre

Travel

Park & Ride

Railway Station

Tourist

Information

Airport

Bus Station

Ferry Port

Motorway Service

Station

Navigation system

364

Hotel

Car

Car Rental

Jaguar Dealer

Parking

Petrol Station

Community

Community Centre

Exhibition Centre

Hospital

Park & Recreation

Town Hall

Leisure

Bowling Centre

Casino

Cinema

Golf Course

Ice Skating Rink

Music Club

Ski Resort

Sports Centre

Tourist Attraction

Vineyard

Others

Historical

Monument

365

Navigation system

CANCELLING POI ICON DISPLAY

If the display of POI icons is no longer required,

they can be turned off as follows:

•Touch the map screen to display the

additional buttons.

•Touch POI Off to cancel the display of POI

icons on the map.

JAGUAR DEALERSHIP LOCATIONS

Details of Jaguar Dealerships are held on the

Navigation System DVD as a points of interest

(POI) category. Certain Dealers may be located

in areas that are not fully mapped on the DVD.

If a route is set to one of these Dealers,

guidance may only be possible to the nearest

town centre; a warning message will be

displayed.

If Jaguar Dealerships (or certain other

categories, such as airports) are selected, they

will be displayed across all search areas.

ENTRY BY TOWN

If a town name is entered first, the points of

interest listed will be restricted to that town.

•From the Input POI Name screen, touch

Town.

•Enter the town name required.

•Touch List to display the list of possible

towns.

•Select the town required.

The Input POI screen is displayed again.

•Enter the POI name required.

ENTRY BY CATEGORY

If a POI category is selected first, the points of

interest listed will be restricted to that category.

Others continued

Museum

Theatre

Town Centre

University/College

Restaurant

All Restaurants

Chinese

Fast Food

French

Italian

Japanese

Other Restaurants

Navigation system

366

OTHER SELECTION METHODS

Town centres

The POI database holds town centre locations.

To select a town centre, proceed as follows:

•From the Input POI Name screen, enter the

town name required in the Name text area

(do not select the Town button).

•Touch List to display the list of matches.

•For the town centre, select the entry

showing the town name only.

Note: In some cases, more than one town

centre location may be listed.

CATEGORIES AND SUB-CATEGORIES

The POI database is divided into a number of

categories. Each main category is further

divided into a number of sub-categories.

The first entry in the list of Restaurant

sub-categories, is ALL. This selects all of the

Restaurant sub-categories.

To narrow the search, touch the Town button.

This will display the alpha keyboard, to allow

the desired town name to be entered.

Search area

When searching the database, only points of

interest in the current search area are included,

except for the sub-categories marked All

search areas in the POI category list.

List button

The List button becomes active, when the

characters entered reduce the possible entries

to a small enough number (the list is displayed

automatically when the number of entries

reduces to four or less).

You can also select List (when active) without

entering a POI name. All the relevant points of

interest will be displayed, e.g. in a selected

town or category.

All button

The All button returns to searching all

categories after selecting one category.

POI ENTRY MESSAGES

While searching for points of interest, you may

encounter one of the following messages:

1. There are no POIs in this Category.

2. No POIs Found in this Town.

QUICK POI SELECTION

A total of five POIs can be stored.

Quick POI Selection

Default

All

Park

Petrol

Golf

Shop

Hotel

Car

Q-POI Selection

Community

Hotel

Leisure

Others

12 : 26 pm

FORD

LUTON

M 4 0

12 : 26 pm

Set

Destination

POI

JOL4508ENG

367

Navigation system

Changing the Quick POI Categories

The five default Quick POI categories can be

changed as required.

•At the Map screen, touch anywhere on the

map.

•Touch the POI button.

•Select the Quick POI category that you

wish to replace.

The screen shows the full list of POI categories.

•Select the new category required from the

list.

The screen shows the new selection of

category icons.

•Repeat for another category icon if

required.

•Touch OK to apply the new settings.

SELECTING A QUICK POI CATEGORY

•Touch the Initial Map screen, then touch

the POI button. The screen shows six

suggested categories that can be selected

as quick points of interest.

Note: The POI button will not be active if the

zoom level is below 1 km (½ mile).

•Select a Quick POI category.

The map screen is displayed with POI icons.

Other categories

You can also select from the complete list of

POI categories.

•Touch List Categories and select a

category from the list displayed.

Local POI search

This selects the points of interest in all

categories within 32 kilometres (20 miles) of

the vehicle.

•Touch the All Local POIs button.

MEMORY POINTS

The procedure for using memory points is

functionally the same as for using the Quick

Points of Interest.

The map display shows the location of all

stored memory points in view.

•For information about a particular memory

point, touch the desired memory point

icon.

After touching the memory point icon, the

name of the selected memory point is

displayed at the top of the screen.

Note: Unlike POIs, memory points are

displayed at all zoom levels.

Memory point details

•Touch Info. to display the details of the

selected memory point.

The details include Icon, Name, Position and

Tel.

The telephone number can be called by

touching the telephone button, if a Jaguar

telephone is fitted.

The memory point details can be edited.

Navigation system

368

RDS-TMC OVERVIEW

Radio Data System-Traffic Message Channel

(RDS-TMC) is a feature that announces traffic

hold-ups on your route, as broadcast by radio

stations that transmit TMC information.

Touch the RDS-TMC button on the Navigation

Menu to access the TMC menu.

Touch the Change button - the system begins

a search of all radio stations being received in

your locality.

The tuner will scan the FM frequency once and

this may take a few minutes. Searching will be

displayed while scanning is in progress.

When a station is found which is offering TMC

information, the RDS name is shown on the list

and the search for more stations will continue.

Note: In the United Kingdom the station giving

TMC information is Classic FM.

You can stop the search at any time and select

any stations presented on the list, by touching

the Change button or the button next to the

desired station in the list.

RDS-TMC display

When a TMC signal is received the icon in the

top left of the screen will appear gray. If a TMC

signal is not being received, the icon will be

shown with a bar through it.

The system will inform the driver of any

roadworks, narrow road, contraflow,

accidents, slippery road, diversion,

information, parking information, congestion

or other hazard.

The driver is informed of a traffic event as

follows:

•A TMC Event icon shown on the map at the

location of the event.

•Text can be displayed showing the details

of each occurrence which can be selected

either by touching the screen icon or from

the traffic information list.

•Voice guidance will describe the event on

the route. This information will be repeated

when the repeat switch is selected.

•Dynamic route guidance, which calculates

an alternative route when the system

receives the traffic event warning affecting

the route currently set in the navigation

system.

•Traffic event list shows all events sorted by

road name/ distance on your selected

route in a straight line or along your actual

route.

The information regarding the hold-up is

maintained and updated even if the vehicle

crosses into another country.

RDS-TMC icons

Any traffic event (broadcast on TMC) in your

area, will be displayed as a warning icon on the

map and an alert may be displayed as a

message giving the road number(s) and

between which junctions the hold-up or event

occurs. Voice guidance will also inform you of

the hold-up when an event icon exists on the

current route.

This data is stored in the system for up to of 30

minutes.

The colour of the TMC icon changes in order to

show the type and priority of a TMC event. The

background colour of the icon returns to

normal when there is no longer an event or

hold-up, or if any re-route instructions are

calculated.

369

Navigation system

The TMC Event icons appear on the navigation

map display to indicate the location and nature

of a TMC event.

TMC Event icons will appear on the map, even

if the event does not occur on your route.

Level 1 TMC event icons

Note: Single arrow icons indicate that the

traffic event affects traffic travelling in the

direction of the arrow. Double arrows indicate

that both directions are affected.

Level 2 TMC event icons

Incident (Red star)

Moving Tailback Ahead (Red

arrow)

Moving Tailback Both

Carriageways (Red double arrow)

Slow Traffic Ahead (Yellow arrow)

Slow Traffic Both Carriageways

(Yellow double arrow)

Information (Yellow circle)

Incident (Yellow star)

Stationary Traffic Ahead

(Red arrow pointing on line)

Stationary Traffic Both

Carriageways (Red double arrow

pointing on line)

Other Hazard (Yellow)

Roadworks (Pink)

Narrow Road (Pink)

Contraflow (Pink)

Accidents (Pink)

Slippery Road (Yellow)

Diversion (Yellow)

Parking Information (Grey)

Information (Gray)

Congestion (Red)

Navigation system

370

USING TMC

Dynamic route guidance

Dynamic route guidance will calculate an

alternative route to avoid a traffic event when

the system receives an event warning.

The system calculates a new route for all

sections. However, if any way points are set,

the system calculates for the next way point.

If the event on route is serious (closed road) or

if the new route is shorter than the current one

and the current one was not recalculated within

the last 5 minutes, then a message to confirm

the new route will be displayed. This pop-up

message will be displayed for 10 minutes and

if the new route is not rejected, then the vehicle

will follow the new route.

Voice guidance

While voice guidance is on, the system will give

audio guidance for traffic events on route.

If the on route icon is touched, with audio

guidance switched on, the audio message will

be repeated. If the icon is grey, the audio

guidance function has been switched off and

touching the icon will not repeat any message.

After the vehicle passes the event, you will be

notified of the next nearest event on route.

Audio messages are not given if you are in that

event.

Traffic on route

While the vehicle is on the guidance route, the

system will generate a traffic event list for that

route when you touch the Traffic on Route

screen button.

If a route is calculated but the vehicle is not on

the highlighted route, a pop-up is displayed

with an error message.

Traffic on route

Slippery Road

B214

Accident

A420

Road Works

M69

57 km

21 km

19 km

Map

Detail

Map

Detail

Map

Detail

12 : 26 pm

RDS-TMC

Traffic on

Show TMC

Auto avoid

ll Traffic

United KingdomCountry

Station

Manual

Change

Auto

Surveillance

Events

Voice

Guidance

12 : 26 pm

Information Setting

traffic

Route

JOL4655ENG

371

Navigation system

On route event icon

The on route event icon will show a traffic event

as a line of stationary vehicles with the distance

to the start point of the event. Touch the icon to

repeat audio guidance (when audio guidance is

switched on).

The icon will be displayed on the map with the

following conditions:

•The map scale is between 50 metres and

4 km (1/32 mile and 2 miles).

•RDS-TMC setting is on and there are some

events on the route.

The on route event icon will show the nearest

event on the route and the distance to the

event.

All traffic events

When the All Traffic Events button on the

RDS-TMC setting screen is touched, all traffic

events are listed by road name. If an event

occurs on more than one road of your route,

the system will list it with the first road name.

Each event is seen as text information from the

menu.

While the list is being displayed the information

is not updated.

When you select a road the system shows

traffic events, if there are any, with the basic

information.

Note: The maximum text length displayed is 24

characters.

The basic information screen shows:

•Road number.

•Brief information of the event.

•Direction and distance to the start point of

the event (in a straight line).

Up to 20 events can be shown in distance order

from the current vehicle position. If the event

list is longer than three the remaining can be

seen by scrolling the screen.

When the Map button is touched, the map

screen will display the place of the event start

point. The scale is always 500 metres (1/4

mile). If the event has finished, the map screen

will still be displayed when the Map button is

touched but no event icon will be shown on the

map.

When the Detail button is touched, the system

shows the detail of that event.

Navigation system

372

SURVEILLANCE SETTING

If you frequently travel through an area that is

subject to slow or stationary traffic, it is

possible to set a surveillance area which can be

viewed at any time.

Up to three areas can be set for this

surveillance.

RDS-TMC radio data for the selected

surveillance area must be available and TMC

must be enabled in order to show TMC events

in this area

From the Navigation Setup menu select

RDS-TMC.

Select Surveillance Setting.

Select Add.

Choose any of the methods above to select a

surveillance area.

If you select Map you can position the area

accurately by zooming in using the binoculars

icon (arrowed).

JOL4661ENG

Quick POI

Navigation Setup

Selection

Calibration

Restore

User

Settings

Defaults

Quick POI

12 : 26 pm

RDS-TMC

Language

Selection

JOL4662ENG

RDS-TMC

Traffic on

Show TMC

Auto avoid

All Traffic

United KingdomCountry

Station

Manual

Change

Auto

Surveillance

Events

Voice

Guidance

12 : 26 pm

Information Setting

traffic

Route

JOL4663ENG

Stored Locations

Surveillance Point 2

Surveillance Point 3

Surveillance Point 1

Delete

Add

Delete

12 : 26 pm

Add Surveillance Point?

POI

Postcode

Map

Coordinates

Address

Home

GBR

12 34 5

Memory

12 : 26 pm

Motorway

Entry/Exit

Area

JOL4664ENG

A 3 4

Info

1/8 ml

TMC

12 : 26 pm

B4100 Banbury Rd

JOL4665ENG

373

Navigation system

Choose to save as any one of the three choices.

The map will display the saved area.

USING VOICE CONTROL

JaguarVoice allows many of the navigation

features to be activated by voice commands.

The system is controlled by the switch on the

left-hand side of the steering wheel.

Briefly press the switch on the steering wheel

(arrowed) and after the tone, speak one of the

system commands.

In response to your command, the system will

repeat your instruction and Listening will

appear in the message centre. The system will

either carry out your command or ask for more

information. If the system asks for more

information, wait until the tone has sounded

before replying.

To cancel a voice control session, press and

hold the switch on the steering wheel.

The voice control system understands

pre-defined commands, which need to be

spoken word for word. A list of all navigation

voice commands is given in the following table.

Nametags

Information on nametags is given earlier in this

handbook. See VOICE CONTROL (page 69).

Message centre messages

A number of responses by the navigation voice

system are reinforced by text messages

appearing in the message centre display.

Info

1/8 ml

M69,A5

TMC

Surveillance Point2

Surveillance Point3

Surveillance

Cancel

Surveillance Point1

12 : 26 pm

JOL4666ENG

A 3 4

TMC

B4100 Banbury Road

Surveillance Point 1

1/4 ml

12 : 26 pm

JOL4667ENG

E95902

Navigation system

374

NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS

Voice command System response

NAVIGATION HELP Gives spoken information about the navigation commands.

NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE

Switches on voice guidance for a set route.

NAVIGATION VOICE GUIDANCE

OFF

Switches off voice guidance for a set route.

NAVIGATION SHOW MAP Displays the navigation map on the touch-screen

NAVIGATION SHOW TURN LIST

GUIDANCE

Lists forthcoming junctions and turn directions on the split

screen.

NAVIGATION SHOW CURRENT

POSITION

Shows current position of vehicle on the map.

NAVIGATION SHOW

DESTINATION

Shows a route preview and allows you to fast forward to the

end.

NAVIGATION SHOW ENTIRE

ROUTE MAP

Shows complete route.

NAVIGATION SHOW ARROW

GUIDANCE

Changes right-hand side of split screen to show arrow

guidance directions. See COMPASS (page 360).

NAVIGATION SHOW

CROSSROADS GUIDANCE

If there is a crossroads within 500 metres (1640 feet), the

right-hand side of split screen changes to show crossroad

guidance directions. If there are no crossroads, a voice

message There are no nearby crossroads on the set route

will be given.

NAVIGATION SHOW

MOTORWAY GUIDANCE

When travelling on a motorway, changes right-hand side of

split screen to show the remaining motorway exits, and

their numbers, up to the required exit for the route.

NAVIGATION DUAL MAP MODE Displays split screen view.

NAVIGATION SINGLE MAP

MODE

Shows full screen map.

NAVIGATION SHOW NORTH UP Changes orientation of the map so that North is at the top of

the screen.

NAVIGATION SHOW HEADING

Changes orientation of the map so that the vehicle is always

heading up the screen. A compass in the top left-hand

corner will point to North.

NAVIGATION SHOW RIGHT MAP

NORTH UP

Changes orientation of the right-hand map so that North is

at the top of the screen.

NAVIGATION SHOW RIGHT MAP

HEADING UP

Changes orientation of the right-hand map so that the

vehicle is always heading up the screen.

NAVIGATION ZOOM IN

MAXIMUM

Displays the map (left-hand map in split screen mode) at

the maximum magnification.

375

Navigation system

NAVIGATION ZOOM OUT

MAXIMUM

Displays the map (left-hand map in split screen mode) at

the minimum magnification.

NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM

IN MAXIMUM

In split screen mode, displays the right-hand map at the

maximum magnification.

NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM

OUT MAXIMUM

In split screen mode, displays the right-hand map at the

minimum magnification.

NAVIGATION ZOOM LEVEL

(NUMBER)

Allows you to specify the level of magnification of the map

(left-hand map in split screen mode). A selection of

between 1 and 13 can be made, e.g. voice command

Navigation zoom level eleven, will set the magnification

level accordingly.

NAVIGATION ZOOM IN

(NUMBER)

Allows you to zoom in on the map (left-hand map in split

screen mode) according to the user specified increment (a

selection of between 1 and 12 can be made). If the current

zoom level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom in

two, will cause the system to zoom in to level three.

NAVIGATION ZOOM OUT

(NUMBER)

Allows you to zoom out on the map (left-hand map in split

screen mode) according to the user specified increment (a

selection of between 1 and 12 can be made). If the current

zoom level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom out

two, will cause the system to zoom out to level seven.

NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM

IN (NUMBER)

Allows you to zoom in on the right-hand map. A selection of

between 1 and 12 can be made, e.g. If the current zoom

level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom in two,

will cause the system to zoom in to level three.

NAVIGATION RIGHT MAP ZOOM

OUT (NUMBER)

Allows you to zoom in on the right-hand map. A selection of

between 1 and 12 can be made, e.g. If the current zoom

level is five, the voice command Navigation zoom out two,

will cause the system to zoom out to level seven.

NAVIGATION GO HOME Sets the destination to your currently set Home. Home

location can be stored using the Stored locations option,

available from the Navigation menu on the touch-screen.

NAVIGATION GO TO NAME The system will respond with Name please and you can

specify a previously stored nametag either as a destination

or a waypoint.

NAVIGATION GO TO PREVIOUS

DESTINATION

Allows you to specify a previously stored destination either

as a new destination or a waypoint. If you are following

route guidance, and this is the last destination set, this will

be your current destination.

Voice command System response

Navigation system

376

NAVIGATION GO TO PREVIOUS

STARTING POINT

Allows you to specify the start point of a previous route

either as a destination or a waypoint. If you are following

route guidance, and this is the last start point set, this will

be your current start point.

NAVIGATION SHOW (NEXT, 1ST,

2ND, 3RD, 4TH, 5TH) WAYPOINT

Displays the waypoint asked for, provided it has been set.

NAVIGATION DELETE NEXT

WAYPOINT

Deletes the next waypoint from the route and recalculates

the route if appropriate.

NAVIGATION DETOUR This command prompts the navigation system to propose a

detour in the route being followed. This takes effect from

your current position and the length of the detour can be

specified in Route Preferences. See ROUTE PREFERENCES

(page 347).

NAVIGATION DETOUR ENTIRE

ROUTE

This command prompts the navigation to offer one of the

alternative routes calculated for the current destination.

NAVIGATION CANCEL GUIDANCE Cancels route guidance.

NAVIGATION AVOID MAJOR

ROADS

Ensures that routes are calculated avoiding major roads.

NAVIGATION PREFER MAJOR

ROADS

Ensures that major roads are included when routes are

calculated.

NAVIGATION AVOID TOLL

ROADS

Ensures that routes are calculated avoiding toll roads.

NAVIGATION PREFER TOLL

ROADS

Ensures that toll roads are included when routes are

calculated.

NAVIGATION AVOID FERRIES Ensures that routes are calculated avoiding ferries.

NAVIGATION PREFER FERRIES Ensures that ferries are included when routes are

calculated.

NAVIGATION PLAY DIRECTORY Prompts a voice message giving all the navigation

nametags. This can be interrupted by pressing the voice

control button and, after the tone, saying REPLAY, GO TO,

DELETE or CANCEL.

NAVIGATION DELETE

XF Owners Handbook 10MY Tcm144 47656

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation